3BDD012514R0101 PDF

ControlIT
AC 800F
Engineering Reference Manual

Functions and Function Blocks
Notice
Information provided in this manual is subject to change without prior notice and
represents no obligation on the part of ABB Automation Products.
The industrial standards and regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE, VDI, etc.) applicable in the
Federal Republic of Germany are used. Outside the Federal Republic of Germany, the
relevant national specifications, standards and regulations must be observed.
ABB Automation Products reserves all rights, especially those arising out of BGB,
UWG, UrhG as well as out of industrial property rights (patents, utility models,
trademarks, service trademarks and flavor samples).
The designations used and the products shown/mentioned in this manual have not been
specifically marked regarding existing industrial property rights.
No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission from ABB
Automation Products.
Should you find any mistakes in this manual, please make a copy of the appropriate
page(s) and send it/them to us with your comments. Any suggestions which may help to
improve comprehension or clarity will also be gratefully accepted.
Please send your suggestions to:
Product Management Dept., DEAPR/LMS-Hannover, Fax: +49 (0)511 6782 701
Engineering Reference Manual

Overview
Engineering Manuals
System Configuration
A
General Information
B
Installation DigiTool
C
Project Manager
D
Project Tree
E
Hardware Structure
F
Commissioning
G
Documentation
Glossary
New Features
Index
IEC 61131-3 Programming

A
General Information
B
Variables
C
Tags
D
Function Block Diagram (FBD)
E
Instruction List (IL)
F
Ladder Diagram (LD)
G
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
H
User Function Blocks
Index
Operator Station
A
General Information
B
Messages and Hints
C
Standard Displays
D
Graphic Display
E
Logs
Index
Overview
Engineering Manuals
Process Station Rack based System
1
General
2
Loading the operating system and EPROMS
3
Configuration of resource D-PS and D-PS/RED in project tree
4
Processing and failure action
5
Configuration of rack-based process station in the hardware structure
6
Commissioning the process station
7
Redundancy
Process Station FieldController

1
General
2
3
Configuration of resource D-PS in project tree
4
5
Configuration of process station FC in the hardware structure
6
Commissioning of FC
Process Station ABB FieldController 800

1
General
2
3
Configuration of resource D-PS and D-PS/RED in project tree
4
5
Configuration of process station AC 800F in the hardware structure
6
Commissioning of AC 800F
7
Redundancy
Overview
Engineering Reference Manuals

A
Getting Started
B
General Description and Overview
C
Analog Function Blocks
D
Binary Function Blocks
E
Controller Function Blocks
F
Acquisition Blocks
G
Monitoring Function Blocks
H
Open-loop Control Function Blocks
J
Standard Functions Blocks
K
Arithmetic Blocks
L
Converter Blocks
M
Constants
N
System Functions
V
Abbreviations
W
Glossary
X
Index
Communications and Fieldbusses

A
Getting Started
B
C
Profibus
E
Modbus Master Function Blocks
F
Modbus Slave Function Blocks
G
Send / Receive Blocks
H
Rack Modules
V
Abbreviations
W
Glossary
X
Index
Overview
Operators Manual
Operator Station
A
Getting started: DigiVis
B
Installation DigiVis
C
Operating Philosophy
D
Messages and Hints
E
Overview Display
F
Group Display
G
Graphic Display
H
Trend Display
I
Faceplates
J
SFC Display
K
Time Scheduler Display
L
Logs
M
System Display
V
System Messages
W
Glossary
X
Index
Contents
Contents
Getting Started: DigiTool
A 1
A 2
Visual Orientation Hints ..................................................................................... A-5

General Hints for Operating DigiTool ................................................................ A-6
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
General .............................................................................................................. B-5

Data Types of the Block Inputs and Outputs ..................................................... B-6
Hints on Parameter Definition of the Blocks ...................................................... B-6
Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................. B-11
Description of Function Block Data ................................................................. B-12
The Behavior of Function Blocks in Relation to Time...................................... B-13
Warm Start Behavior of the Function Blocks................................................... B-14
Commisioning Mode ........................................................................................ B-15
Overview of the Functions and Function Blocks.............................................. B-17

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Overview Analog Function Blocks ..................................................................... C-5

Counter with Analog Input, CT_ANA ................................................................. C-6
Linearisation, LIN............................................................................................. C-10
Set Point Controller, C_ANA ........................................................................... C-13
Analog Input Transformation, AI_TR ............................................................... C-17
Analog Input Transformation, Transient AI_TRT............................................. C-20
Analog Output Transformation, AO_TR .......................................................... C-24
Scale Change, SCAL....................................................................................... C-27
Delay Function, DELAY ................................................................................... C-30
Lead/Lag Filter, LD_LG ................................................................................... C-32
Dead Time Function, TDEAD .......................................................................... C-35
Average Value in Time, TAVER ...................................................................... C-37
Maximum Value in Time, TMAX ...................................................................... C-39
Minimum Value in Time, TMIN ........................................................................ C-41
Analog time filter TFILT ................................................................................... C-43
Time Scheduler, TS ......................................................................................... C-45
Contents
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
F
F
F
F
Overview Binary Blocks ..................................................................................... D-5

Binary Output, M_BOUT .................................................................................... D-6
Monoflop, MONO_F........................................................................................... D-9
Timer, Switch-on/off Delay, TONOF ................................................................ D-12
Timer, Switch-on Delay, TON .......................................................................... D-15
Timer, Switch-off Delay, TOF........................................................................... D-18
Timer with External Time Input, TIMER........................................................... D-21
Time Counter, CTT .......................................................................................... D-25
Pulse Counter, CT_P ....................................................................................... D-28
Up/down Counter, CTUD ................................................................................. D-31
Operating Time Counter, CT_LT ..................................................................... D-34
Frequency / Analog Converter, FAC_D ........................................................... D-37
Touch Button, TOUCH..................................................................................... D-40
Overview Controller Functions Blocks ............................................................... E-5

Functional Diagram for Controllers .................................................................... E-6
Continuous Controllers .................................................................................... E-11
Step Controllers ............................................................................................... E-49
Two-position Controller for Off - On................................................................. E-92
Three-position Controller for Heat-Off-Cool................................................... E-116
Controller selftune, TUNE .............................................................................. E-143
Acquisition Blocks
1
2
3
4
Overview Acquisition Blocks.............................................................................. F-5

Acquisition Blocks - General Description........................................................... F-5
Disturbance Course Log Acquisition, DISLOG .................................................. F-6
Trend Acquisition, TREND................................................................................. F-9
Contents
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Overview of Open-loop Control Function Blocks............................................... H-5

Individual Drive Function for Unidirectional UnitsIDF_1 .................................... H-6
Individual Drive Function for Bi-directional Units IDF_2 .................................. H-13
Individual Drive Function for Actuators, IDF_A................................................ H-22
Dosing Circuit, DOS......................................................................................... H-31
Dosing Circuit with Analog Input, DOS_A ....................................................... H-36
Dosing circuit DOS_E ...................................................................................... H-42
Standard
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
Overview of Monitoring Function Blocks ........................................................... G-5

Analog Monitoring, M_ANA ............................................................................... G-6
Binary Monitoring, M_BIN.................................................................................. G-9
Binary Monitoring of Antivalence, M_BAV....................................................... G-12
General Monitoring, M_GEN ........................................................................... G-15
Sequence of Event Monitoring, M_SOE.......................................................... G-19
Connection Monitoring, M_CONN ................................................................... G-21
Event Message, EVENT .................................................................................. G-23
Horn Control, HORN........................................................................................ G-26
Overview Standard ............................................................................................. J-5

Standard / Logic Functions ................................................................................. J-6
Standard / Bit-String Functions........................................................................... J-8
Standard / Statistic Functions ............................................................................. J-9
Standard / Comparator Functions .................................................................... J-11
Standard / Binary Switch Blocks....................................................................... J-12
Standard / Edge Detection Blocks.................................................................... J-16
Standard / Basic Functions............................................................................... J-18
Standard / String Functions .............................................................................. J-35
Arithmetic Blocks
1
2
3
4
5
6
Overview Arithmetic........................................................................................... K-5

Arithmetic / Basic Functions .............................................................................. K-6
Arithmetic / Numeric Functions.......................................................................... K-9
Arithmetic / Logarithm Functions ..................................................................... K-11
Arithmetic / Trigonometry Functions................................................................ K-13
Arithmetic / Limiter Functions .......................................................................... K-15
Contents
L
L
L
L
L
Converter Blocks
1
2
3
4
Overview Converter ............................................................................................L-5

Converter / Data Types Blocks ...........................................................................L-6
Converter / Binary Functions Blocks.................................................................L-15
Converter / Date + Time Blocks........................................................................L-28
Constants
M 1
M 2
M 3
Overview of Function Block Constants ..............................................................M-5

Constants, CSTBO, ...... , CSTWO ....................................................................M-6
String Constants, CSTSTR8, ...... , CSTSTR256 ............................................M-10
System Functions
N 1
N 2
N 3
Overview of System Functions .......................................................................... N-5

Force cold start, FCS ......................................................................................... N-5
Force redundancy toggle, PRIM/SEC................................................................ N-6
Abbreviations
V 1
V 2
V 3
Function and Function Blocks............................................................................ V-5

Functionblock Inputs and Outputs ................................................................... V-11
Message Types / Limit Types .......................................................................... V-19
Glossary
Index
Section A
Contents
A 1
Visual Orientation Hints ........................................................................................A-5
A 2
A 2.1
A 2.2
General Hints for Operating DigiTool ..................................................................A-6

Operation with mouse or keyboard.......................................................................... A-6
Recurring virtual keys .............................................................................................. A-7
A-3
Section A
A 1 Visual Orientation Hints

To grant direct access to information, we have used different types of scripts and symbols.
Script
Meaning
Italics
Representation for (selectable) menu items or parameters.
SMALL CAPITALS
Inputs to be made via the keyboard, also via virtual keys.
boldface
Highlights important information, also as an orientation hint.
Symbols
Meaning
Selection with mouse.
The various instruction steps are separated by arrows.
Example: Edit Dimensions ... .
In this example, the menu item Edit is to be selected followed by the
menu item Dimensions.
Operating alternative with the mouse
Information on operation with the keyboard, inasmuch as it differs from

the Windows Standard.
Example:
Select module ALT E D ... .
Having selected the module via the ARROW KEYS, the keys ALT, E and D
must be pressed successively.
If two keys are to be pressed simultaneously:
... SHIFT + INSERT ... .
Alternative keyboard operation
Hints
Special hints, must be observed!
Preconditions
Preconditions which must be fulfilled to implement commands or for satisfactory results.
A-5
Section A
A 2 General Hints for Operating DigiTool

Operation of DigiTool is based on the Windows Standard.
Therefore knowledge of general operation under Windows is strongly recommended, see
Windows Manual.
The "typical Windows operation" will therefore not be dealt with in detail when describing the
various editors.
A 2.1 Operation with mouse or keyboard
Mouse
Keyboard
Select menu
items
Cursor on menu item

+ left mouse button.
ALT + underlined letters
Select within
pull-down menu
Cursor on menu item

+ left mouse button.
Enter only underline letters
Select individual
elements
Cursor on program element

+ left mouse button
Cursor on programme element

+ SPACE
Select multiple
elements
Cursor on start position

press left mouse button and
keep pressed down
move to desired position and
release mouse button
Cursor on start position

Press SPACE and hold
A-6
move to desired position and release SPACE
Section A
A 2.2 Recurring virtual keys
di0212uk.bmp
OK
The parameter dialog is quit and the parameter status saved.
CANCEL
The parameter dialog is quit without saving the parameter status. A

warning appears if parameter definition data are lost.
SAVE
The current parameter status is saved and the window remains active.
RESET
The parameters of the active parameter window are reset completely to

the previously set values. Any parameters previously saved and differing
from the default settings can be fetched again by canceling and recalling
the parameter window.
CHECK
The function block is checked for plausibility with the current parameters,
even if they have not been saved.
HELP
Call up the Windows On-line help (with F1 also).

To get information about functions on monitor without using the documentation. Thematically structured information is displayed in the helpwindow.
A-7
Section A
<<
>>
Change to the previous

or next parameter mask.
This is displayed with shading if no further parameter window exist.
Control box
A setting or parameter is selected or deselected.
Option buttons
are situated for selection at all locations where one parameter must be
selected from several mutually exclusive ones.
A-8
Section B
Contents
B 1
B 1.1
General...................................................................................................................B-5
Definitions .......................................................................................................... B-5
B 2
Data Types of the Block Inputs and Outputs .....................................................B-6
B 3
Hints on Parameter Definition of the Blocks .....................................................B-6
B 4
Input/Output Pins................................................................................................B-11
B 5
Description of Function Block Data..................................................................B-12
B 6
The Behavior of Function Blocks in Relation to Time ....................................B-13
B 7
Warm Start Behavior of the Function Blocks ..................................................B-14
B 8
Commisioning Mode ..........................................................................................B-15
B 9
Overview of the Functions and Function Blocks ............................................B-17
B-3
Section B
B 1 General
This document describes all the standard functions and function blocks available in the function
block libraries and which can be used in a user program.
The following description is given for each block:
- function, hints on display and operation,
- hints on parameter definition and parameter masks.
Detailed description can be obtained in the following manuals for display, operation and configuration of the blocks.
Installing, loading
function block libraries
See Engineering Manual, System Configuration,

Installation
Commissioning
Display and operation
See Operators Manual, Operator Station
Description of the configuration
See Engineering Manual, IEC 61131-3 Programming,

Function block diagram
Ladder diagram
Instruction list
B 1.1 Definitions
Function
Function
block
Block
On being executed, a function supplies exactly one data element. Functions do not contain state information. Therefore when ever a function is
called with the same arguments (input parameters) the same result (output parameter) is always obtained.
On being executed, the function block supplies one or several data elements. Several copies of a function block can be produced and differentiated by means of block names. Parameters can be defined for each copy
separately and all values of the output variables as well as the necessary
internal variables are preserved from one processing operation until the
next. Hence, each function block contains status information. Therefore
when a function block is called with the same arguments (input parameters), the same result is not always obtained (output parameters).
The expression "block" is used in the documentation if it is not clear
whether a function and/or a function block is meant.
B-5
Section B
B 2 Data Types of the Block Inputs and Outputs

The data types for the block inputs and outputs are preset. The data types can be changed for
some blocks. How to change and define data types in the configuration dialog, see Engineering
Manual, IEC 61131-3 Programming, Function block diagram, chapter Display and change
data types.
For description of the data types see Engineering Manual, IEC 61131-3 Programming, Variables.
B 3 Hints on Parameter Definition of the Blocks

Certain parameters (name, scale start, etc.) can or must be entered for different functions and
function blocks. Parameters are defined for the block at the time of configuration of the Function
Block Diagram or Instruction List.
The so-called mandatory parameters are displayed in red in the parameter masks and must be
input. If an optional input field for numerical data is not filled in the function block uses "Zero" as
default value internally. Deviations from this rule are explained with the individual function blocks.
All entries into these parameter definition masks are displayed in italics.
The functions and function blocks are handled in a similar manner. Repetitive actions, entries and
markers are therefore described here centrally.
Name
The name is unequivocal within a project. Its entry is absolutely necessary and may be up to 12 (16) characters long. DigiTool can be set such
that the name has to start with a letter or with any arbitrary character. To
this end, plausibility of the name is switched off fully or partially. The setting is made in the start menu under the menu item Options Tag
names. One may select either Error Message, Warning or Ignore.
More information on the setting facilities can be obtained in Engineering
Manual, System Configuration, Project Tree.
Short Text
Up to 12 characters, all characters are permitted.
Long Text
Up to 30 characters, all characters are permitted.
Processing
By selecting off the box Processing, the block is immediately taken up

by the processing facility and is processed after a download.
The block input EN does not have a terminal pin.
The function is not processed and all outputs are set "0" (off) if it has
not been ticked off. The block input EN does not have a terminal pin. It
is possible to attend to this during commissioning without having to resort to a further download. The EN terminal pin is not displayed in this
B-6
Section B
case. Additionally, this state is signaled by means of a blue tag name

during commissioning.
n A box that has been ticked off indicates that processing is effected as
a function of the input EN. The terminal pin EN is shown on the block
and must be connected. The block is processed if a signal of logic 1 is
present. See also the Chapter Input/Output Pins.
Sequence
Define processing sequence (1...99) within the user program.

If no entry is made, the function block is processed acc. to the processing
order of the block location. If the sequence is changed subsequently, the
other entries are adjusted accordingly where necessary.
Scales...
In the case of standardized function blocks that can be operated and observed, the depictions on the bargraph display can be freely selected with
the specifications Scale start, Scale end and Dimension.
Scale start and scale end as well as the selected physical unit refer to the
depiction on the faceplate.
Measuring ranges
Measuring range start and end are used for internal standardization of the
control algorithm in the case of controllers. Furthermore, they perform the
same functions as the Scales with respect to display.
Dimension
Dimension (the physical unit) is used for displaying items in DigiVis. Dimension can be selected through a selection window or entered directly.
The dimensions that appear in the selection window are entered in the file
DIGTOOL.STR and apply to all function blocks in the projects. This file is
located in the Freelance\exe directory and can be added to or altered using a text program (e.g. WRITE, EDITOR).
Dimensions entered directly and not stored in the file are used only for
that specific function block; they are not automatically added to the file.
Messages
Different blocks feature up to 4 limit value inputs and provide one binary
output for each of these limit values.
If the limit value has been infringed, the respective binary output is set to
logic-1 signal, otherwise to 0.
Value
An limit value can be either specified as a fixed value or can be inferred

from other analog signals. Fixed values must be entered into the dialog
display under value. If they are configured as "accessible" (Access ticked
off), they can be changed during operation.
B-7
Section B
di0165uk.bmp
Type
A processing type can be selected for each limit value under type:
- Max. value H, HH
- Min. L, LL
(H, HH
(L, LL
High limit value)

Low limit value)
- Rate of change for analog monitoring M_ANA

DLs, DLLs, DHs, DHHs
(change per second s)
DLm, DLLm, DHm, DHHm
(change per minute m)
DLh, DLLh, DHh, DHHh
(change per hour h)
The way in which rate-of-change limit values D operate.
These limit values monitor the rate of signal changes. The LOW limit values check for the rate dropping too far towards zero. The HIGH limit values check for the rate rising too far towards - and +. The sign is determined by the limit values sign.
di0802uk.bmp
- Control difference (CE) for the controllers

L_CE, LL_CE, H_CE, HH_CE
- Limit value (CE)
LH_CE
(LH amount of the control difference)
- Ratio limit values (R) only for ratio controllers

L_R, LL_R, H_R, HH_R
B-8
Section B
Hyst
For each limit valve a hysteresis of max. 30 % related to the limit valve
can be set under Hyst.
Message text
The message text to be selected is output in the event of limit value infringement. In the related faceplate the limit valve flags change colour.
Prio
The message priority 1 ... 5 is entered here. If "-" is input here, no message
will be output. Further information on event priorities see Engineering Manual, Operator Station, Messages and Hints.
Hint
Apart from the message, a freely configurable Hint text can be output for
each limit value infringement or message of a function block. The text is
entered under hint.
On selecting the respective key under +LQW a further window is opened,
where the required text can be entered and modified. "X" on the key indicates that a hint text has been entered.
The text is displayed with the allotted block name and an additional display assignment in the DigiVis display.
If the hint text is double clicked, the respective faceplate is called. Direct
branching is effected to the entered display (group display, trend display,
free graphic etc.) by selecting the key DISPLAY.
di0704uk.bmp
Hint text
Enter a text of max. 200 characters.
Display access
Enter the display name to which branching is to be effected on selection;

enter directly or via selector window.
Audio file
Several audio files (WAV files) can be entered as the audio file. The individual audio files are separated by a +.
The entry can be made directly or via a selection window (ADD button).
The entry field is 100 characters long. Any number of audio files can be
entered in the space available.
B-9
Section B
Considering the priority, the DigiVis sound system will play the selected
file for incoming/outgoing messages. See Operators Manual, Operator
Station, Message and Hints.
Acknowledgment
B-10
Every block with messages allows all the messages to be acknowledged

from the operator line.
Section B
B 4 Input/Output Pins
For supplying the pins with values a distinction is made between Optional and mandatory
pins. Mandatory pins must have values brought in or taken out through signal lines. In the
function block these are represented by a length of one grid.
Optional pins do not have to have values supplied. If the Optional function block inputs are
not supplied with values, these pins are initialized to zero. They are represented in the function
block by a length of half a grid.
Some block variables can be entered via block pins or in the parameter mask e.g. the limit values
via pins L1 ... L4 or entries as fixed values. If they are routed via pins, entry into the parameter
mask is not possible. This state is marked by a gray background. If the variable is entered first
into the parameter mask, the input pin is removed from the block. In both cases this value is only
accessible via the input pin.
Processing of blocks
Each function block has an input EN (enable). With a logic-1 signal, the function block is processed. If a logic-0 signal is present, the function block is set off function (disabled), and all outputs
are set to 0. An "Enable" signal switches on again the function block and initializes it. This block
state is made available at the output ENO (enable out) (0 = disable, 1 = enable).
Output of error states
Various function blocks have the output ERR. A logic-1 signal at this output indicates that the
function blocks parameter definitions cannot operate without problems with the given input values (e.g. division by 0). In such a case, the output values are only valid under certain conditions.
The output STA supplies a status code for identification of the error that has occurred. The output
is set to 0 if there is no error.
Operating mode pins
An input is available for each operating mode for the purpose of switching operating modes:
MANUAL operating mode
Input MM and
AUTOMATIC operating mode
Input MA.
INTERNAL operating mode
Input MI and
EXTERNAL operating mode
Input ME.
This system enables the operator to switch specifically to the operating mode required. The
operating mode is latching, so that a pulse at the input has the effect of setting the operating
mode. A constant (logical 1) signal has the effect of forcing the block to retain its operating
mode. If there is a logical 1 signal at both operating mode inputs, then the secure operating
mode INTERNAL or MANUAL is adopted.
Only in the event of a logical 0 signal at both block inputs can the operating mode be accessed
from DigiVis or from commissioning.
B-11
Section B
B 5 Description of Function Block Data

For each function block the internal data is listed in a table. The table has the following structure:
Name
Name
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
The name of the parameter.
Data type
The data type of the parameter.
Conf.
The declaration of whether or not the parameter is configurable in the parameter-definition masks.
If yes is entered then the parameter will be shown in the parameterdefinition mask while if no is entered here the parameter will normally be
used for display purposes, e.g. the arrows indicating direction of running in
the function block IDF_1.
Acc.
The declaration of whether or not the parameter is accessable on the process station.
RO
The parameter is only readable.
RW
The parameter is readable and writable.
no Acc.
The parameter is no accessable on the process station, e.g. message texts.
Comment
A short comment of the parameter.
The value for Processing (EN) is only accessible by the corresponding input pin.
Messages have a uniform structure as described below. For function blocks they are described
as message point AP.
Name
Gt
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
WORD
no1
no Acc.
Message type
Mp
BYTE
yes
no Acc.
Message priority
Mt
TEXT
yes
no Acc.
Message text
Ht
TEXT
yes
no Acc.
Hint text
Bz
BZO
yes
no Acc.
Display access
Wav
TEXT
yes
no Acc.
Audio file name
1 Only configurable for limit values. Other messages, e.g. final position of IDFs, have a fixed limit value
type.
B-12
Section B
B 6 The Behavior of Function Blocks in Relation to Time

For all function blocks that can only be calculated in an equidistant cyclical task (controller etc.)
the algorithm is based on equidistant scanning. If this equidistance is violated, the function
considers the input change to have occurred in a cycle. This can lead to inaccuracies when
processing the output values.
All other function blocks that can only be calculated in a cyclical task (timer, individual drive
functions etc.) use time differences in their processing.
B-13
Section B
B 7 Warm Start Behavior of the Function Blocks

Each function block has two data areas on the process station, one area for configuration data
and one for working data. The configuration data are protected against cold start and the working
data against warm start.
On cold start, new working data are generated from the configuration data area, i.e. all current
data (e.g. counter readings) are initialized and reset to the configured values.
For warm start, the working data area is preserved and the function blocks can continue
operation with the existing working data. In addition, in some function blocks attention is paid to
specific block features and the values are processed accordingly.
In the case of the acquisition blocks, the interruption time is designated in the archive.
Affects function blocks:
TREND
DISLOG
In the case of function blocks with past history, the time gap is filled with the last value that
was valid before interruption.
Affects the function blocks:
TDEAD
TAVER
TMAX
TMIN
TFILT
In the case of the function blocks with analog filters the last value that was valid before the
interruption is used for further calculations.
Affects function blocks:
CT_ANA
DELAY
LD_LG
TS
RLIMIT
INTEG
DIFF
DOS_A
In the case of function blocks with monitoring times, the interrupted time is also counted and
taken into account for further calculations.
MONO_F
TON
TOF
TONOF
TIMER
CTT
CT_LT
CT_P
IDF_1
IDF_2
IDF_A
M_BAV
FAC_D
In the case of the function blocks using a task cycle time, bumbles transient action must be
achieved at the outputs.
C_CS
C_CU
C_CR
C_SS
C_SU
C_SR
C_OS
C_OU
C_PS
C_PU
More information on the cold and warm start can be obtained in Engineering Manual, System
Configuration, Commissioning.
B-14
Section B
B 8 Commisioning Mode
Function block parameter settings can be changed (written) or corrected directly at the process
station in commisioning mode.
di1567uk.bmp
Differences between the current value at the process station and the configured value
in the project file are displayed with a yellow background in the corresponding fields.
CLOSE
Closes the current dialog box.
CURRENT VALUES
Displays current parameter settings and values for the selected function
block at the process station. Values which cannot be changed are displayed in gray.
Values and parameters can only be changed in the CURRENT
state. After a value has been changed in a field of the parameter assignment mask, the following buttons appear:
VALUES
CONFIG. VALUES
Displays current parameter settings for the selected function block.
HELP
Calls up context-sensitive help for the selected function block.
WRITE
Writes the parameter change for the selected function block to the assigned process station.
B-15
Section B
The single value changed overwrites the current configured value in the
memory of the process station. This storage location is not saved; its
contents are lost on reset or cold start.
CORRECT
Writes the parameter changes for the selected function block to the assigned process station and at the same time in the project file.
The changed single value overwrites configuration data still residing in the
memory of the process station. This data is deleted by initializing or a cold
start. Corrected values are saved in the project file and thus are written to
the process station on reloading.
CANCEL
Breaks off the writing or correction dialog.
B-16
Section B
B 9 Overview of the Functions and Function Blocks

The block designations are identical in the function block diagram FBD, ladder diagram LD and in
the instruction list IL. This also applies to their inputs and outputs as well as parameter definitions.
In the Instruction list IL operators, which are needed for the actual IL configuration, are made
available in addition to the blocks.
Block
Function/Function block
FBD/IL designation
Analog
Counter with analog input

Linearization
Set point controller
Analog input transformation
Analog input transformation transient
Analog output transformation
Scale change
Delay function
Lead/lag
Dead time function
Average value in time
Maximum value in time
Minimum value in time
Analog filter in time
Time scheduler
CT_ANA
LIN
C_ANA
AI_TR
AI_TRT
AO_TR
SCAL
DELAY
LD_LG
TDEAD
TAVER
TMAX
TMIN
TFLILT
TS
Binary
Binary output
Monoflop
Timer, switch-on/switch-off delay
Timer, switch-on delay
Timer, switch-off delay
Timer with extern time
Time counter
Pulse counter
Up/down counter
Operating time counter
Frequency/analog converter
Touch button
M_BOUT
MONO_F
TONOF
TON
TOF
TIMER
CTT
CT_P
CTUD
CT_LT
FAC_D
TOUCH
Controller
Continuous controller, standard

Continuous controller, universal
Continuous controller, ratio
Step controller, standard
Step controller, universal
Step controller, ratio
Two-position controller, standard
Two-position controller, universal
Three-position controller, standard
C_CS
C_CU
C_CR
C_SS
C_SU
C_SR
C_OS
C_OU
C_PS
B-17
Section B
Block
FBD/IL designation
Three-position controller, universal

Controller self-tuning
C_PU
TUNE
Acquisition
Disturbance course log acquisition

Trend acquisition
DISLOG
TREND
Monitoring
Analog monitoring
Binary monitoring
Binary monitoring of antivalence
General monitoring
Connection monitoring
Event message
Horn
M_ANA
M_BIN
M_BAV
M_GEN
M_CONN
EVENT
HORN
Open-loop control
IDF for unidirectional units

IDF for bi-directional units
IDF foractuators
Dosing circuit
Dosing circuit with analog input
Extended dosing circuit
IDF_1
IDF_2
IDF_A
DOS
DOS_A
DOS_E
Standard/
logic
And
Or
Xor
Not
AND
OR
EXOR
NOT
Standard/
Bit shift operation
Shift left
Shift right
Rotate left
Rotate right
SHL
SHR
ROL
ROR
Standard/
Statistic
Minimum
Maximum
Average
MIN
MAX
AVER
Standard/
Comparator
Equal
Greater equal
Greater than
Less than
Less than equal
Not equal
EQ
GE
GT
LT
LE
NE
Standard/
Switches
Binary
Multiplexer
Flipflop
Trigger
SEL
MUX
FF
TR
B-18
Section B
Block
FBD/IL designation
Standard/
Edge detection
Rising
Falling
R_TRIG
F_TRIG
Standard/
Basic functions
Integrator
Differentiation
Dead band
Split-range
Hysteresis
Sample & Hold
Selection of three
INTEG
DIFF
DEADB
SPLIT
HYST
S_H
OF3
Standard /
String functions
String length
Left string part
Right string part
Mid string part
Concate string
Insert string
Delete string part
Replace string part
Find string
S_LEN
S_LEFT
S_RIGHT
S_MID
S_CONCAT
S_INS
S_DEL
S_REPL
S_FIND
Arithmetic/
Basic
arithmetic
Addition
Multiplication
Subtraction
Division
Modulo
Power
ADD
MUL
SUB
DIV
MOD
POW (XY)
Arithmetic/
Numeric
Absolute value
Square root
N-th root
Sign
ABS
SQRT
NRT
Arithmetic/
Logarithm
Natural logarithm
Common logarithm
Exponent
LN
LOG
EXP(eX)
Arithmetic/
Trigonometry
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arc sine
Arc cosine
Arc tangent
SIN
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
SGN
B-19
Section B
Block
FBD/IL designation
Arithmetic/
Limiter
Analog limiter
Time limiter
Rate of change limiter
LIMIT
TLIMIT
RLIMIT
Converter
Data type conversion
Data type to BOOL

Data type to BYTE
Data type to INT
Data type to UINT
Data type to DINT
Data type to UDINT
Data type to WORD
Data type to DWORD
Data type to REAL
Data type to TIME
Data type to DT
TO_BO
TO_BY
TO_IN
TO_UI
TO_DI
TO_UD
TO_WO
TO_DW
TO_RE
TO_TI
TO_DT
Data type to STRING8

Real to integer
TO_STR8
TO_STR16
TO_STR32
TO_STR64
TO_STR128
TO_STR256
TRUNC
Int to code
Code to Int
INT TO CO
CO TO INT
Pack BOOL to BYTE

Pack BOOL to WORD
Pack BOOL to DWORD
Pack BYTE to WORD
Pack BYTE to DWORD
Pack WORD to DWORD
Extract type to type
Unpack BYTE to BOOL
Unpack WORD to BOOL
Unpack WORD to BYTE
Unpack DWORD to BYTE
Unpack DWORD to WORD
PBOBY
PBOWO
PBODW
PBYWO
PBYDW
PWODW
EXTCT
UPBYBO
UPWOBO
UPWOBY
UPDWBY
UPDWWO
Pack to DT
Unpack DT
Local time to summer time
Summer time to local time
P_DT
UP_DT
LT_TO_DST
DST_TO_LT
Converter
Binary conversion
Converter
DT conversion
B-20
Section B
Block
FBD/IL designation
Constant
BOOL constant
BYTE constant
DINT constant
DT constant
DWORD constant
INT constant
REAL constant
TIME constant
UDINT constant
UINT constant
WORD constant
STRING8 constant
STRING16 constant
STRING32 constant
STRING64 constant
STRING128 constant
STRING256 constant
CSTBO
CSTBY
CSTDI
CSTDT
CSTDW
CSTIN
CSTRE
CSTTI
CSTUD
CSTUI
CSTWO
CS8
CS16
CS32
CS64
CS128
CS256
System functions
Force cold start

Force redundancy toggle
FCS
PRIM/SEC
B-21
Section C
Analog
Contents
C 1
Overview Analog Function Blocks......................................................................C-5
C 2
C 2.1
C 2.2
Counter with Analog Input, CT_ANA ..................................................................C-6

Parameters: Counter with analog input CT_ANA ..............................................C-7
Function block data: Counter with analog input CT_ANA..................................C-8
C 3
C 3.1
C 3.2
Linearisation, LIN................................................................................................C-10
Parameters: Linearisation LIN .........................................................................C-11
Function block data: Linearisation LIN.............................................................C-12
C 4
C 4.1
C 4.2
Set Point Controller, C_ANA..............................................................................C-13

Parameters: Setpoint controller C_ANA ..........................................................C-14
Function block data: Set point controller C_ANA.............................................C-15
C 5
C 5.1
C 5.2
Analog Input Transformation, AI_TR ................................................................C-17

Parameters: Analog input transformation AI_TR .............................................C-18
Function block data: Analog input converter AI_TR.........................................C-19
C 6
C 6.1
C 6.2
Analog Input Transformation, Transient AI_TRT ............................................C-20

Parameters: Analog input transformation, transient AI_TRT ...........................C-21
Function block data: Analog input converter with transients AI_TRT ..............C-23
C 7
C 7.1
C 7.2
Analog Output Transformation, AO_TR ...........................................................C-24

Parameters: Analog output transformation AO_TR .........................................C-25
Function block data: Analog output converter AO_TR ....................................C-26
C 8
C 8.1
C 8.2
Scale Change, SCAL ..........................................................................................C-27

Parameters: Scale change SCAL ....................................................................C-28
Function block data: Scaling change SCAL.....................................................C-29
C 9
C 9.1
C 9.2
Delay Function, DELAY......................................................................................C-30

Parameters: Delay function DELAY.................................................................C-30
Function block data: Delay function DELAY ....................................................C-31
C 10
C 10.1
C 10.2
Lead/Lag Filter, LD_LG ......................................................................................C-32

Parameters: Lead/lag filter LD_LG ..................................................................C-33
Function block data: Lead/Lag-Filter LD_LG ...................................................C-34
C 11
C 11.1
C 11.2
Dead Time Function, TDEAD .............................................................................C-35

Parameters: Dead time function TDEAD .........................................................C-35
Function block data: Dead-time filter TDEAD ..................................................C-36
C 12
C 12.1
Average Value in Time, TAVER .........................................................................C-37

Parameters: Average value in time TAVER.....................................................C-37
C-3
Section C
Analog
C 12.2
Function block data: Average time TAVER......................................................C-38
C 13
C 13.1
C 13.2
Maximum Value in Time, TMAX .........................................................................C-39

Parameters: Maximum value in time TMAX.....................................................C-39
Function block data: Maximum time value TMAX ............................................C-40
C 14
C 14.1
C 14.2
Minimum Value in Time, TMIN ...........................................................................C-41

Parameters: Minimum value in time TMIN .......................................................C-41
Function block data: Minimum time value TMIN ..............................................C-42
C 15
C 15.1
C 15.2
Analog time filter TFILT......................................................................................C-43

Parameters: Analog time filter TFILT ...............................................................C-44
Function block data: Analog time filter TFILT...................................................C-44
C 16
C 16.1
C 16.2
Time Scheduler, TS.............................................................................................C-45

Parameters: Time scheduler TS ......................................................................C-49
Function block data: Time scheduler TS..........................................................C-52
C-4
Section C
Analog
C 1 Overview Analog Function Blocks

Designation
CT_ANA
LIN
C_ANA
AI_TR
AI_TRT
AO_TR
SCAL
DELAY
TDEAD
TAVER
TMAX
TMIN
TFILT
LD_LG
TS
Counter with analog input

Linearisation
Setpoint controller
Analog input transformation
Analog input transformation, transient
Analog output transformation
Scale change
Delay function
Dead time function
Average value in time
Maximum value in time
Minimum value in time
Analog filter in time
Lead/lag filter
Time scheduler
C-5
Section C
Analog
C 2 Counter with Analog Input, CT_ANA

Function
The counter converts analog values into quantity values, with the values
being added up with the correct signs. To increase accuracy, the counter
operates internally with 64-bit REAL resolution.
Integration is effected acc. to the equation
CTC = CTC n -1 + IN x
di0011.bmp
CTC
CTCn-1
IN
tz
ZB
ta
ZB
Counter output (counter reading)

Counter output of previous cycle
Counter input
Task cycle
Time base
Depending on the parameter definition, the counter can be reset on

reaching the parameterized Resetting value, at fixed Period duration, by
an external reset signal or by an operator intervention. The output OFL
then denotes a parameterisable number of cycles at a logic-1 signal.
Apart from the current counter reading CTC, the final value of the last period reached is available at a second output CTP. This signal remains constant until the next reset.
The Limit values (Messages) refer to the current counter reading of the
current period.
This function block must run in interval tasks with equidistant mode.
Display
Name, short text, scale range and physical unit.
Current counter reading CA (Pin CTC), counter reading of the last period
CP (Pin CTP) and the Basic value BV (Pin PR) as numerical values.
The current counter reading and the counter reading of the last period CTP
are displayed additionally as bars.
Limit value L1 to L2 as numerical values and corresponding marker on the
counter reading bar.
If reset has been configured permitting access, press the RESET key within
the display.
Operator interventions
Change the basic value BV (Pin PR) and the limit values L1, L2 (Pin L1,
L2) as well as the counter reset.
Message Acknowledgment.
C-6
Section C
Analog
C 2.1 Parameters: Counter with analog input CT_ANA
di0657uk.bmp
Scale start,
Scale end,
Dimension
Enter in REAL format

Enter a dimension text or select from list.
Basic value
Counting begins from this value. The entry must lie within the scale range.
Reset counter by:

Resetting value
Period duration
Reset on overshooting the largest value parameterized.

If the input field is blank, resetting value becomes ineffective. During
commissioning the value 0.0 appears and is not changeable.
Reset after a fixed period of time, e.g. T#2h.
If the input field is blank, the period duration becomes ineffective, i.e.
permanent run. In this condition no value can be change during commissioning.
C-7
Section C
Analog
Time base
Time unit for the integration of the input.

second, minute, hour or day.
Cycle count
for OFL
After reset, the output OFL denotes the entered number of cycles (1..99)
at logic-1 signal.
Access
Basic value
Preset value can be modified

Cannot be operated
Reset
Reset can be operated

Cannot be operated
Messages
See General Description and Overview,

max. 2 limit values.
C 2.2 Function block data: Counter with analog input CT_ANA

The values for basic value (PR) and the limit values (L1, L2) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
IN
RES
PR
L1
L2
Outputs
ENO
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
TRUE: the function block is processed
Input signal
Reset signal
Preset value
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
BOOL
no
RO
CTC
REAL
no
CTP
REAL
no
OFL
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
Parameter definition mask
Zua
INT
yes
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
C-8
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Counter current reading since last period
Counter reading of last period
Carry signal, TRUE for a parameterizable time,
TRUE, if limit value 1 violated
Logic-2 signal, if limit value 2 violated
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
No. of cycles for transmission output

Measuring range start output
Measuring range end output
Dimension
Section C
Name
Uw
Pd
Ltf
Lr
Pr
Zb
Pzp
Pzl
Hy1
Lf1
MP1
Hy2
Lf12
MP2
Analog
Data
type
REAL
TIME
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
no
no
yes
yes
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
REAL
BOOL
yes
yes
RW
no Acc.
Resetting value
Period duration
Access basic value
Access reset parameter
Reset parameter
Time base
0 = Second, 1 = Minute, 2 = Hour, 3 = Day
Display-variable count last period
Display-variable count current period
Hysteresis for limit value 1
Access limit value 1
Message 1
Message 2
C-9
Section C
Analog
C 3 Linearisation, LIN
Function
This function provides the standard characteristics acc. to IEC 584-1 or IEC
751 for conversion of thermoelectric voltages or thermal resistances to
temperatures.
Linearisation is effected with correction curves whose tiepoint distribution
guarantee an error limit of 0.1%.
di0014.bmp
The following sensor type characteristics are available:

Type
Pt13Rh-Pt (Type R)
Pt10Rh-Pt (Type S)
Fe-CuNi (Type J)
Type T
Type E
NiCr-Ni (Type K)
Pt30Rh (Type B)
Fe-CuNi (Type L)
Input value range

in [V]
from
to
- 226.0 + 21 133.0
- 235.0 + 18 709.0
- 8 095.0 + 69 536.0
- 6 257.0 + 20 869.0
- 9 835.0 + 76 358.0
- 6 457.0 + 54 874.0
+ 3 154.0 + 13 814.0
- 8 150.0 + 53 140.0
Resistance thermometer PT100 (type P) in []

from
to
18.49
390.26
Output value range

in [C]
from
to
- 50
+ 1 770
- 50
+ 1 769
- 210
+ 1 200
- 270
+ 400
- 270
+ 1 000
- 270
+ 1 372
+ 800
+ 1 820
- 200
+ 900
from
- 200
to
+ 850
A V signal is required for the sensors as input signal, an signal is required for the resistance thermometers.
In addition, a user-defined linearisation with max. 32 segments is possible.
The number of tiepoints can be freely defined.
The first input field which is less or equal to predecessor X(i) is evaluated as
the end of the linearisation curve by the module.
The ERR output is set if:
input IN violates the acceptable input range, output STA = 1,
an internal calculation error occurs in the REAL range, output STA = 9,
too few tiepoints are specified for user-defined characteristic curves,
output STA = 2.
Display
None
C-10
None
Section C
Analog
C 3.1 Parameters: Linearisation LIN
di0635uk.bmp
Characteristic
curve
Select characteristic type.

A linearisation curve can be freely defined if user defined is selected. After selection, the various tiepoints are entered into a second and third
dialog display. The freely parameterisable characteristic comprises up to
32 segments.
di0636uk.bmp
Tiepoint numbers 0...32
X(i)
X-value for tiepoint (i), entry ascending in REAL format. The end of the
linearisation is reached when a value x(i) is less or equal to its predecessor.
Y(i)
Y-value for tiepoints (i), entry in REAL format.
C-11
Section C
Analog
C 3.2 Function block data: Linearisation LIN

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Parameter definition mask 1
Kl
INT
yes

S1 .. 17
REAL
yes
S34 .. 54
REAL
no
Ew1 .. 17
REAL
yes
Ew34 .. 54
REAL
no
S18 .. 33
REAL
yes
Ew18 .. 33
REAL
yes
C-12
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal
TRUE, if error in the function block
Status error code of function block
RO
Characteristic curve
0 = User-defined
1 = Type R
2 = Type S
3 = Type J
4 = Type T
5 = Type E
6 = Type K
7 = PT100
8 = Type B
9 = Type L
RW
RO
RW
RO
Output field Y1 .. Y17

Output field Y34 .. Y54
Input field X1 .. X17
RW
RW
Output field YX18 .. Y33

Section C
Analog
C 4 Set Point Controller, C_ANA

Function
This function block is used for analog value input without a controller
function; e.g. as a setpoint station or as a Multiple enable. In the automatic
mode, the analog signal present at the input IN is passed on and in the
manual mode the hand value that can be operated.
If the configuration is for a weighting adjuster, ratio RAT and bias BIA are
also applied to the output OUT.
The values of Ratio and Bias are used in the internal mode, and in the
external mode, the RAT and BIA inputs specified externally are used.
di0013.bmp
The output OUT is calculated as shown in table 1:

Mode
No multiple
enable
Manual
OUT = MV
Automatic OUT = IN
OUT
IN
MV
Multiple enable
Internal
OUT = MVRatio+Bias
OUT = INRatio+Bias
External
OUT=MVRAT+BIA
OUT=INRAT+BIA
Output
Input
Manual value
The operation modes internal and external or manual and automatic can
be changed with the input signals MI and ME or MM and MA logic-1 signals. If both input pairs are set to Logic-1 signals, internal and manual will
take precedence.
The current operation modes can be polled at the outputs SIE (internal =
logic-0, external = logic-1) or SMA (manual = logic-0, automatic =
logic-1). The manual value is replaced by the input IN in the automatic
mode.
Ratio values are only permitted if larger than 0.
Bias values are only permitted within the range [-scale range ... +scale
range]. scale range = scale end - scale start
If the range of an input is violated in external mode, the function block will
calculate internally with the corresponding limit value.
The output ERR is set if:
in automatic mode the input IN violates the scaling limits, output
STA = 1,
in manual mode the manual value violates the scaling limits, output
STA = 8,
an internal calculation error occurs in the REAL range, output STA = 2.
C-13
Section C
Analog
Display
Name, short text, scale range and physical unit. Output value Out (Pin OUT), manual value
MV, ratio R (fixed value or Pin RAT) and bias B (fixed value or Pin BIA) are displayed as numerical values. The output value Out is displayed as an actual value bargraph.
Switching of the operation mode MAN/AUTO with buttons M and A.
Switching of the operation mode internal/external with buttons I/E.
Changing the manual value NV (possible only in manual operating mode) and changing the
internal values of ratio and bias.
C 4.1 Parameters: Setpoint controller C_ANA
di0637uk.bmp
Scale start,
Scale end,
Dimension
Initial manual value Initial value in the manual mode. If the multiple enable is OFF, then the
manual value must lie within the scale limits.
Ratio
C-14
Multiplicator for the multiple enable. A ratio less than or equal to 0 is not
permitted.
Section C
Analog
Bias
Additive constant for multiple enable. Only a bias within the range [-scale
range ... +scale range] is permitted.
Access
Value can be modified

Value cannot be operated
Multiplier enable
Analog input IN is processed in the automatic mode; in the manual

mode the manual value with ratio and bias for the output value OUT.
Analog input IN is passed on in the automatic mode to the output
OUT.
In the manual mode the manual value.
Internal
Internal start mode
External
External start mode
Manual
Manual start mode
Automatic
Automatic start mode
lock Internal
Changeover to internal not possible

Changeover to internal possible
lock External
Changeover to external not possible

Changeover to external possible
lock Manual
Changeover to Manuel not possible

Changeover to Manuel possible
lock Automatic
Changeover to automatic not possible

Changeover to automatic possible
C 4.2 Function block data: Set point controller C_ANA

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RAT
BIA
MM
MA
MI
ME
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Ratio
Input of Bias
Mode manual
Mode automatic
Setpoint in operating mode internal
Setpoint in operating mode external
C-15
Section C
Analog
Name
Outputs
ENO
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
SMA
REAL
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO
SIE
BOOL
no
RO
Processing state
Output
Operating mode status
True = automatic, False = manual
Setpoint internal / external
False = internal, True = external
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Hw
REAL
yes
Lhw
BOOL
yes
Ska
REAL
yes
Ske
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Pri
REAL
yes
Lri
BOOL
yes
Pie
INT
yes
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no
RW
no Acc.
RW
Vi
Ve
Pha
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vh
Va
Pbi
Lbi
Ae
Pa
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RO
C-16
RO
RO
Manual value
Access manual value
Scale start
Scale end
Dimension
Internal ratio
Access internal ratio
Operating-mode parameter Internal/External
0 = Internal, 1 = External
Lock internal mode
Lock external mode
Operating-mode parameter Manual/Auto
0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic
Lock manual mode
Lock automatic mode
Internal bias
Access internal bias
Multiplier enable
Display variable output
Section C
Analog
C 5 Analog Input Transformation, AI_TR

Function
This function block transforms an analog/digitally converted variable value
(format UINT) of the analog input module (12-bit) into a numerical value
(format REAL).
The Measuring range start and the measuring range end are assigned to a
signal range (0...20 mA / 0..10 V or 4...20 mA) on the input side.
Underranging errors can only be made in the signal range 4...20 mA.
di0050.bmp
If an analog input signal is outside the permitted value range, the function
block switches to the Default value and the respective limit value signal
(SL, SH) is set. The default value is the value either for under- or overstepping (DVL, DVH) depending on direction or, if configured accordingly
(keep last value), the last valid value.
To correct transmitter inaccuracies, a tolerance band in the range under 4
mA and above 20 mA can be defined. The input is stated in percentages
of the maximum value permitted (20 mA) within the 0.0%...3.0% range. A
hysteresis of 50% of the tolerance band is automatically integrated.
If the function module detects a Wire break (incoming message with
< 3.2 mA, outgoing message > 3.8 mA) this fact will also be signaled
(SWB). The wire break detection is only active in the signal range
4...20 mA. The wire break results in a system message that cannot be parameterized.
Display
Name, short text, and scale range.
The converted analog value Out (Pin OUT) is depicted as a bar and as a
numerical value as well as the default values DL (Pin DVL) and DH (Pin
DVH). If a default value is used (undershoot or overshoot), the analog
value OUT will be output in red. Outputting the input range IR 0...20 mA or
4...20 mA.
Message acknowledgment.
C-17
Section C
Analog
C 5.1 Parameters: Analog input transformation AI_TR
di0600uk.bmp
Measuring range
start
Measuring range
end
Tolerance range
Tolerance band range 0.0%..3.0%;

enter in REAL format
Input range
Define the signal range to be used

0...20 mA / 0..10 V or
4...20 mA
Hold last value
Configured default value active in the event of a fault

Last valid value is held in the event of a fault
Default values
Define the default source in the event of fault
Too low
Fixed value in REAL format or external signal if measuring range is undershot
Too high
Fixed value in REAL format or external signal if measuring range is overshot

If the field Understep or Overstep is left blank the function will set the
measuring range limits internally.
Prio.
C-18
Enter priority 1..5 or "-" for no message
Section C
Analog
Hint
Enter hint text
Message text
Enter output text of message directly or via selector window
Wire break
Wire break monitoring (not configurable)
C 5.2 Function block data: Analog input converter AI_TR

The values for default value too low (DVL) and default value too high (DVH) are only accessible
via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
DVL
DVH
Outputs
ENO
UINT
REAL
REAL
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Default value Low at signal undershoot
Default value High at signal overshoot
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
SWB
SL
UINT
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
SH
BOOL
no
RO

Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Sb
INT
yes
Cew
Wtb
MP1
MP2
MP3
Ewa
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
REAL
yes
yes
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RW
Processing state
Output signal
Status display, TRUE means wire break
Status display, TRUE corresponds to signal level undershot
Status display, TRUE corresponds to signal level overshot
Measuring range start
Measuring range end
Signal range
0 = 0...20 mA, 1 = 4...20 mA
Hold last value
Conversion tolerance range
Message 1 (Too low)
Message 2 (Too high)
Message 3 (Wire break)
Default value active
C-19
Section C
Analog
C 6 Analog Input Transformation, Transient AI_TRT
di0730.bmp
Function
This function block transforms an analog/digitally converted variable value
of the analog input module (12-bit) into a numerical value.
The measuring range start and the measuring range end are assigned to
an signal range (0...20 mA / 0..10 V or 4...20 mA) and a dimension on the
input side.
A default value can be provided in addition. It is activated upon violation of
the signal range and/or overranging of the permitted transient value. The
last value can be retained as default value, another signal (via input DV)
can be used or a fixed value can be configured.
To correct transmitter inaccuracies, a tolerance band in the range under 4
mA and above 20 mA can be defined. The input is stated in percentages
of the maximum value permitted (20 mA) within the 0.0%...3.0% range. A
hysteresis of 50% of the tolerance band is automatically integrated. The
transient monitoring can be switched off and only the canceled items will
be detected.
The type of violation, signal range or transient, is displayed at the outputs
SMR and SRC.
The output SRC is set if the value of the input IN in one cycle falls more
than the configured transient value (in % of the current value). Thus a wire
break can also be detected in a signal range of 0...20 mA.
If the function module detects a wire break (incoming message with
< 3,2 mA, outgoing message > 3,8 mA) this fact will also be signaled
(SWB). Wire break detection is only active in the signal range 4...20 mA.
The wire break results in a system message that cannot be parameterized.
Display
Name, short text scale range and physical unit.
The converted analog value Out (Pin OUT) is depicted as a bar as well as
the default value DV (Pin DV). If a default value is used (undershoot or
overshoot), the analog value Out will be output in red.
Outputting the input range IR 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA.
C-20
Section C
Analog
C 6.1 Parameters: Analog input transformation, transient AI_TRT
di0731uk.bmp
Measuring range
start
Measuring range
end
Dimension
Rate of change
Max. rate of change max. permissible reverse-action change of the input signal IN in %, enter
in REAL format
Monitoring
OFF No transient monitoring

ON Transient monitoring
Tolerance range
Tolerance band range 0.0%...3.0%; enter in REAL format
Input range
Define the input range to be used

0...20 mA / 0..10 V
4...20 mA
Default value
(fixed)
Enter of a fixed default value

C-21
Section C
Default value
process signal
fixed value
last value
Analog
Define the default value source in case of fault

default value of input DV
fixed default value
hold the last valid value
Messages
Mess. range
For measuring range and
Rate of change
Transient independently adjustable:
Prio.
Enter priority 1...5 or "-" for no message
Hint
Enter hint text
Message text
Output the message text, directly or via the selector window
Wire break
Monitoring wire break (not configurable)
C-22
Section C
Analog
C 6.2 Function block data: Analog input converter with transients AI_TRT
The value for default value (fixed) (DV) is only accessible via the corresponding input pin.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
DV
Outputs
ENO
UINT
REAL
no
yes
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Default value
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
UINT
SWB
BOOL
SMR
BOOL
SRC
BOOL
Mba
REAL
Mbe
REAL
Sb
INT
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Cew
INT
yes
RO
Trs
Tru
REAL
INT
yes
yes
RW
RO
Pa
Pewa
Wtb
MP1
MP2
MP3
Ewa
REAL
BOOL
REAL
no
no
yes
RO
RO
RW
BOOL
no
RW
Processing state
Output signal
Status display, TRUE means wire break
TRUE if signal range violated
TRUE if transients violated
Measuring range end
Signal range
0 = 0...20 mA, 1 = 4...20 mA
Source of default value
0 = Process signal
1 = Fixed value
2 = Last value
Transient value
Transient monitoring
0 = Off, 1 = On
Display value output
Conversion tolerance range
Message 1 (Mess. range)
Message 2 (Rate of chg.)
Message 3 (Wire break)
C-23
Section C
Analog
C 7 Analog Output Transformation, AO_TR
di0051.bmp
Function
This function block converts a numerical value into a signal value for output
to an analog output module (12-bit).
The numerical value is compared with the parameters Measuring range
start and Measuring range end. In the event of violation, the output range
limits entered are taken over and the status ERR is set to logic-1 signal.
The Signal range 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA can be switched.
In order to allow the possibility of an undercurrent and/or overcurrent at the
analog output, undercurrent and/or overcurrent should be selected accordingly in the parameter definition mask.
The undercurrent configuration is effective only at 4...20 mA.
If the value falls below the measuring range start, then 3.6 mA are output,
while if it exceeds the measuring range end, 20.4 mA are output.
Display
Name, short text and scale range.
The analog value In (Pin IN) as bar and numerical value. The output range
OR 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA.
None
C-24
Section C
Analog
C 7.1 Parameters: Analog output transformation AO_TR
di0601uk.bmp
Measuring range
start
Measuring range
end
Output range
Defines the output range to be used

0...20 mA
4...20 mA
Decrease output...
(only at 4...20 mA)
Decrease output if output falls below 3.6 mA,

Output of 4 mA
Increase output...
Increase output if output of 20.4 mA is exceeded,

Output of 20 mA.
C-25
Section C
Analog
C 7.2 Function block data: Analog output converter AO_TR

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
UINT
ERR
BOOL
Mba
REAL
Mbe
REAL
Sb
INT
no
no
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
LoO
HiO
yes
yes
RW
RW
C-26
BOOL
BOOL
Processing state
Output signal
Measuring range end
Input Signal range
0 = 0...20 mA, 1 = 4...20 mA
Undercurrent output
Overcurrent output
Section C
Analog
C 8 Scale Change, SCAL

Function
The scaling of an analog signal can be changed with this function block.
This is needed for adjusting the scales of several analog values which
must be compared or calculated. Signals lying outside the new Measuring
range due to adjustment of scaling, are limited between 0 and 100 % of
the new measuring range.
di0052.bmp
The output ERR is set with logic-1 signal if:

overshoot/undershoot of the permitted input value IN, output STA = 1
overshoot/undershoot of the permitted output value OUT, output
STA = 2
division by 0 or overshooting of the numerical range, output STA = 3
internal calculation error in the REAL range, output STA = 9.
Display
None
None
C-27
Section C
Analog
C 8.1 Parameters: Scale change SCAL
di0602uk.bmp
Scaling
Scale start input
Measuring range start of the input signal (REAL format)
Scale end input
Measuring range end of the input signal (REAL format)
Scale start output
Measuring range start of the output signal (REAL format)
Scale end output
Measuring range end of the output signal (REAL format)
C-28
Section C
Analog
C 8.2 Function block data: Scaling change SCAL

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
Measuring range start of input

Measuring range end of input
Measuring range start of output
Measuring range end of output
OUT
REAL
ERR
BOOL
STA
INT
Mae
REAL
Mee
REAL
Maa
REAL
Mea
REAL
C-29
Section C
Analog
C 9 Delay Function, DELAY

Function
A delay of the first order is implemented. The function block acts upon the
analog signal as a smoothing low-pass filter whose time constant can be
parameterized.
The operating equation is:
di0053.bmp
O U T n = O U T n-1 +
tz
x (IN n - O U T n-1)
T1 + tz
OUTn
OUTn-1
INn-1
tz
T1
Output for cycle n

Output for cycle n-1
Input for cycle n-1
Task cycle time
Delay time
Entry of the Delay time at 0 is not permitted.

Display
None
None
C 9.1 Parameters: Delay function DELAY
di0603uk.bmp
Delay time
C-30
Enter the delay time with the TIME format, e.g. T#10s
Section C
Analog
C 9.2 Function block data: Delay function DELAY

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
T1
TIME
yes
RO
Processing state
Output signal
RW
Delay time
C-31
Section C
Analog
C 10 Lead/Lag Filter, LD_LG

Function
This function module is a special function in a delay circuit.
It is used e.g. for dynamic disturbance variable feedforward (to improve
process behavior) or for setpoint filtering (to prevent the actual value
being overshot when setpoint changes are occurring in jumps).
di0058.bmp
Dependent on the parameters Lead time Td and Lag time T1, a jump at
input IN can result in various different behaviors. If Td and T1 are the
same, the output responds with a jump the same size as at the input.
If the parameters are not the same, the output signal will first change in
jumps to a value proportional to the ratio of Td/T1. The output then, using
a level-1 transition function, attains its final value, which is the same as
the jump which initiated the process.
The following diagram below illustrates this process:
di0746.bmp
C-32
Section C
Analog
The operating equation is:
OUTn = OUTn1 +
tz
Td
*(IN n OUTn1 ) +
*(IN n IN n1 )
T1 + tz
T1 + tz
OUTn
OUTn-1
INn
INn-1
Td
T1
tz
Output for cycle n

Output for cycle n-1
Input for cycle n
Input for cycle n-1
Lead time
Lag time
Cycle time
This function module must only be used for cyclical tasks with equidistant mode.
Display
None
None
C 10.1 Parameters: Lead/lag filter LD_LG
di0608uk.bmp
Lead time
in TIME format e.g. T#4m2s
Lag time
Time constant T1 in TIME format, must be > 0 sec.
C-33
Section C
Analog
C 10.2 Function block data: Lead/Lag-Filter LD_LG

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
T1
TIME
yes
Tau
TIME
yes
C-34
RO
Processing state
Output signal
RW
RW
Delay time
Lead
Section C
Analog
C 11 Dead Time Function, TDEAD
di0054.bmp
Function
The function block applies a dead time to an analog signal, i.e. the input
signal is passed on with the dead time added.
Depending on the resolution of the task cycle time, the module determines
the current dead time. It is internally displayed in a ring buffer with a
maximum of 100 values.
The module provides two outputs OU1, OU2 with parameterisable dead
times, dead time 1 and dead time 2.
The ring memory is initialized with the input value IN at the point calculation
first commences.
Display
None
None
C 11.1 Parameters: Dead time function TDEAD
di0604uk.bmp
Dead time 1
Enter dead time 1, output OU1 in the data format

TIME
Dead time 2
Enter dead time 2, output OU2 in the data format

TIME
C-35
Section C
Analog
C 11.2 Function block data: Dead-time filter TDEAD

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal 1
Output signal 2
yes
yes
RW
RW
Dead time 1
Dead time 2
OU1
REAL
OU2
REAL
Mt
TIME
Nt
TIME
C-36
Section C
Analog
C 12 Average Value in Time, TAVER
di0055.bmp
Function
This function block returns an average time value at the output OUT depending on the task cycle time. This is calculated as the arithmetic mean
of up to 100 values from the time window assigned. If the parameterized
time window exceeds 100*task cycle time, then operation is performed
automatically with a step-down. This can lead to a reduction of the memory depth (e.g. time range = 150*task cycle time: each second value is
then stored via 75 values and incorporated into the processing).
This function enables the input signal IN to be smoothed out. It is not designed for producing average values over a longer period of time.
The ring memory is initialized with the input value IN at the point calculation first commences.
Display
None
None
C 12.1 Parameters: Average value in time TAVER
di0605uk.bmp
Time
Enter the average time in the data format TIME
C-37
Section C
Analog
C 12.2 Function block data: Average time TAVER

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
Mt
TIME
yes
C-38
RO
Processing state
Output signal
RW
Buffer time
Section C
Analog
C 13 Maximum Value in Time, TMAX
di0056.bmp
Function
Maximum value in time, TMAX
This function block returns the maximum value in time at the output OUT
depending on the task cycle time.
The value is determined from up to 100 values from the time window assigned. It is not suitable for maximum value formation over a longer period.
If the parameterized time window exceeds 100*task cycle time, then operation is performed automatically with a step-down. This can lead to a reduction of the memory depth (e.g. time range = 150*task cycle time: each
second value is then stored via 75 values and incorporated into the processing).
The ring memory is initialized with the input value IN at the point calculation
first commences.
Display
None
None
C 13.1 Parameters: Maximum value in time TMAX
di0606uk.bmp
Time
Enter the time in the data format TIME.

Filter times <= 0s are not acceptable.
C-39
Section C
Analog
C 13.2 Function block data: Maximum time value TMAX

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
Mt
TIME
yes
C-40
RO
Processing state
Output signal
RW
Buffer time
Section C
Analog
C 14 Minimum Value in Time, TMIN
di0057.bmp
Function
Minimum value in time, TMIN
This function block returns the minimum value in time at the output OUT
depending on the task cycle time.
The value is determined from up to 100 values from the time window assigned. It is not suitable for minimum value formation over a longer period. If the parameterized time window exceeds 100*task cycle time, then
operation is performed automatically with a step-down. This can lead to a
reduction of the memory depth (e.g. time range = 150*task cycle time:
each second value is then stored via 75 values and incorporated into the
processing).
The ring memory is initialized with the input value IN at the point
calculation first commences.
Display
None
None
C 14.1 Parameters: Minimum value in time TMIN
di0607uk.bmp
Time
Enter the filter time in the data format TIME.

C-41
Section C
Analog
C 14.2 Function block data: Minimum time value TMIN

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
Mt
TIME
yes
C-42
RO
Processing state
Output signal
RW
Buffer time
Section C
Analog
C 15 Analog time filter TFILT

Function
The purpose of this block is to filter analog signals with high resolution.
The following functions are implemented in the block, each of the values
below being available at an output:
bau-tfl1.bmp
Dead time
Average time value
Minimum time value
Maximum time value
Output ODT
Output OAV
Output OMN
Output OMX
The total time for the filter function can be specified optionally by pin T or
through a parameter.
The values for the output function are stored in a ring memory, spaced at
uniform time intervals. The ring memory is limited to a maximum of 1500
values. The block calculates the filling ratio of the ring memory internally
and if this is not sufficient, a scan step-down.
The time intervals are multiples of the task cycle time. They are output on
output ST. The total achievable filter time (scan step-down x filling ratio)
is output on output AT. If the step-down factor is altered (by changing the
time setting or the task cycle time), then the ring memory is initialized, i.e.
the whole ring memory is filled with the value of the current input signal.
Because of the high time resolution, this block may only be used in
equidistant tasks.
Display Operation
none
none
C-43
Section C
Analog
C 15.1 Parameters: Analog time filter TFILT
bc0001uk.bmp
Time
Enter the filter time in the data format TIME.

C 15.2 Function block data: Analog time filter TFILT

The value for the filter time (T) is only accessible via the corresponding input pin.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
T
Outputs
ENO
REAL
TIME
no
yes
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Processing time of the filter function
BOOL
no
RO
ODT
OAV
OMN
OMX
AT
ST
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO

PT
TIME
yes
C-44
RW
Processing state
Output of dead time
Output of average value in time
Output of minimum value in time
Output of maximum value in time
Current total time of the filter function
Resolution in time (step time) of the filter
function
Filter time
Section C
Analog
C 16 Time Scheduler, TS
Function
The time scheduler is used to output a time-dependent analog value. This
can be used as a variable setpoint for controllers or as a function
generator. The Setpoint curve of the time scheduler is defined by Duration
and associated tiepoints. The first tiepoint forms the start of the time
schedule program and has therefore the Duration 0.
The Duration is calculated from the previous section and are assigned
successively. The numbers of the run time and of the respective tiepoints
are the same. Up to 32 run times can be entered with the respective 33
tiepoints i.e. up to 32 segments can be defined.
di0059.bmp
The time scheduler can be manipulated via its inputs. Hence it is possible
to end the time schedule immediately (input POF), to stop it (input PST)
or to restart it after Stop (input PON).
The number of times the time schedule is to run can be defined via a fixed
value or via the input PCY. After the last run, i.e. the end of the program,
the time scheduler is set to status STOP and the output OUT holds the
last tiepoint. It must be explicitly switched to status OFF.
di0729uk.bmp
The maximum run time of the time scheduler corresponds to the maximum of the data type TIME (24d 20h 31m 23s 648ms).
Expansion of the setpoint curve (entry of new tiepoints) is only possible in
commissioning if:
the time scheduler is in the OFF state, and
the tiepoint value lies within the scaling limits.
The time scheduler can also be switched in permanent run. Permanent
run refers to the entire setpoint curve.
A specific range can be repeated within the setpoint curve by configuration of the cycle from section ... to ... .
C-45
Section C
Analog
The output variable OUT is composed of the addition of the configured program value and in
certain cases the offset value. This offset value is effective in all execution modes, except OFF.
Depending on the operation mode, the offset in the manual mode can be operated. In the
automatic state access is gained via the input OSP.
If the OSP not present the time scheduler works with the manual mode offset.
Various operation modes are available for the execution mode of the time scheduler:
OFF
The time scheduler gives the tiepoint 0 as time scheduler output OUT.
Runtime from start and expiry time are 0. The runstate OFF can be
switched from the process via the input POF and via the operation.
STOP
The time scheduler gives the configured program value (in some cases
plus an offset value) as output OUT.
From start the runtime runs with the current time. The executions mode
STOP can be adjusted via the input PST or via the operation. If it continues to run, the time scheduler runs again according to the preset setpoint
curve. At the end of the program the time scheduler is set in the state
STOP and the output OUT hold the last tiepoint.
ON
The time scheduler outputs the preset value of the setpoint curve at the
output OUT. Runtime since start and expired time in the program run with
the current time. The execution mode ON can be activated via the input
PON or via the operation.
SKIP
The time scheduler program jumps to the setpoint curve value at the end
of the current segment and outputs it at OUT. Runtime since runs with the
current time. The run times are measured from the preceding step onwards, and are sorted into order. The elapsed time in the program is adjusted at the point in the set curve reached at that time. The execution
mode SKIP can be adjusted via the input PSK or via the local operation.
A next jump is possible only after the input PSK has been deleted and reset.
SCROLL
If the input signal PSC is present, the time schedule program runs forwards at a rate of 5 seconds per segment. If the specified max. of change
RC does not permit this time, the run time of the respective segment is
prolonged accordingly. As output OUT the setpoint curve value is output
with the corresponding run time. Runtime since runs with the current time.
The execution mode SCROLL can only be activated via the input PSC or
by operating interventions..
C-46
Section C
Analog
The execution modes have the following priorities:

OFF
STOP
ON
SKIP
SCROLL
The inputs DST, DM, DON prevent switching in the STOP and ON conditions, or in the manual
operating mode.
Changeover to the manual or automatic mode can be effected with MM and MA, respectively.
The time scheduler provides a series of outputs for further processing. Hence the runtime can
be polled at output ET as from the start of a time schedule.
The output ETP specifies the time that has expired in the time schedule program, i.e. interruptions by the STOP command are ignored.
The time that has expired in the current step can be obtained from the output ETS.
The output NS shows the current step number, output PCP the number of program cycles executed, output SMA, the current mode and output SR shows whether the time scheduler is currently active.
Output SR
execution mode
0
OFF
1
STOP
2
ON
3
SKIP
4
SCROLL
The output ERR is set if:

the maximum rate of change at pin RC is less than or equal to 0.0, output STA = 1,
the setpoint curve is erroneous, output STA = 3,
an internal computing error occurs in the TIME range, output STA = 4
an internal computing error occurs in the REAL range, output STA = 9
This function block must only be used for cyclical tasks with equidistant mode.
Display
The time scheduler features its own operator and observation display. The setpoint curve is
shown statically in a curve field. In the standardized form of depiction it displays the entire time
scheduler curve, and if zooming (in x direction) is active, it displays the corresponding segment.
The actual curve displays the actual course and runs from left to right with the actual marker.
The setpoint and actual value are also displayed as numerical values. Other information includes the function name of the setpoint curve, current segment number, number of planned
and executed program repeats, elapsed time since program start and offset value.
Parallel to the special time scheduler display important values of the time scheduler are displayable and operable in a faceplate.
In the faceplate the actual output value Out is displayed as a value bargraph and as numerical
values. The button ACT/NOM switch the content of the digital field.
C-47
Section C
Act
Nom
Sec
T
Cyc
EM
Sec
T
Cyc
Off
Analog
Number of actual time scheduler sections

Time mark on the actual curve
Number of actual program cycles
Execution mode
(0 = Off, 1 = Stop, 2 = On, 3 = Skip, 4 = Scroll)
Number of configured time scheduler sections
Time mark on the nominal curve
Number of configured program cycles
Time scheduler offset value
operable
operable
operable
The actual states Manual/Automatic and Permanent/Cyclic are displayed with the button M/A
or PM/CY.
The following operator facilities are available in the operator buttons MAN/AUTO and EXE.MODE:
MANUAL and AUTOMATIC can only be activated if the inputs pin MM and MA are enabled, i.e. are
set to logic-0 signal.
With the EXE.MODE OFF, the time scheduler outputs tiepoint 0 as output and deletes the "Run
time since start" and the "expired time of the time scheduler".
In the automatic mode, the outputs the time schedule value plus, if applicable, the offset value.
In the manual mode, the time scheduler output can be changed per operation (Offset). With
ON, the time schedule value of the setpoint curve is output as time scheduler output. The "expired time" and the "run time since start" runs with the current time.
Via the operator buttons OFFSET, CYCLES, the offset value, number of program runs can be
changed.
C-48
Section C
Analog
C 16.1 Parameters: Time scheduler TS
di0609uk.bmp
Scale start
Scale end
Max. rate of
change
Permitted rate of change of the actual value per second.
Offset set-point
Additive value added to the setpoint in manual mode
Access
Program options
Number of cycles
Permanent
Enabled for operation

Disabled for operation
Number of program runs from 1...32767

Permanent relates to the whole setpoint curve and not to the cyclic part of
the curve.
Setpoint curves processed without any limitation in number; Number
cycles only be effective for configured sections.
Setpoint curve is processed as often as stated in the number of program cycles
C-49
Section C
Analog
Cycle from section
The repetition of time schedule program runs begins from this segment. In
case of an empty input field the setpoint curve will be repeated from the
beginning.
to
The repetition of time schedule program runs ends as of this segment. In

case of empty input field the setpoint curve will be repeated to the end.
Execution mode
Start-Up
Lock
Off / Stop / On / Skip / Scroll

Execution mode of time scheduler at initial start
Off / Stop / On / Skip / Scroll
Changeover not possible
Changeover possible
Offset operation mode

Manual
Manual mode on initial start
Automatic
Automatic mode on initial start
Lock Manual
Changeover to manual not possible

Changeover to manual possible
Lock Automatic
Changeover to automatic not possible

Changeover to automatic possible
di0610.bmp
C-50
Section C
Analog
di0611uk.bmp
Every tiepoint of the setpoint curve consist of tiepoint value and duration. One tiepoint is defined, if for tiepoint value and duration valid values are entered.
Value
Enter tiepoint values 0...32

Changing the tiepoints is only possible during commissioning.
Tiepoint values are only accepted within the scale limits.
Duration
Enter the duration in the TIME format, until the next tiepoint is reached.
Changing the Duration time only in execution mode OFF.
The end of the setpoint curve will recognized, if one duration is empty.
Only durations greater the task cycle time are valid.
C-51
Section C
Analog
C 16.2 Function block data: Time scheduler TS

The values for max. rate of change (RC) and number of cycles (PCY) are only accessible via the
corresponding input pins.
Name
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
Inputs
EN
BOOL
no
RW
POF
PST
PON
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RC
PCY
OSP
PSK
PSC
REAL
INT
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
MM
MA
DST
DON
DM
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Program OFF (TRUE = Off)
Program stop (TRUE = Stop)
Program ON continue program run (TRUE =
continue)
Max. rate of change per second
Program cycles
Offset for the setpoint in the time schedule
Program Skip to next program segment
Program Scroll fast scrolling through the program
True mode manual
True mode automatic
Disable Stop (TRUE = no time scheduler Stop)
Disable On (TRUE = no time scheduler On)
Disable manual (TRUE = no manual mode)
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
ET
ETP
ETS
NS
PCP
SMA
REAL
TIME
TIME
TIME
INT
INT
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
SR
INT
no
STA
INT
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Za
INT
no
Lpd
BOOL
yes
Pha
INT
yes
C-52
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
RW
Processing state
Output signal
Elapsed Time since start
Elapsed Time in the time schedule
Elapsed Time in current step
Current program segment number
Number of program cycles
TRUE = automatic, FALSE = manual
Status execution mode (see Pls)
Number of sections
Access number of cycles
Parameter Manual/Auto
Section C
Name
Vh
Va
Wtx
Wt
Ska
Ske
Poffs
Loffs
Pls
Analog
Data
type
BOOL
BOOL
TIME
TIME
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
INT
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
Lock manual
Lock automatic
Time elapsed since start of setpoint curve
Time marker on current setpoint curve
Scale start
Scale end
Offset Set point
Access offset Set point
Execution mode
0 = Off
1 = Stop
2 = On
3 = Skip
4 = Scroll
Lock mode Off
Lock mode Stop
Lock mode On
Lock mode Skip
Lock mode Scroll
Execution mode Off
Execution mode On
Execution mode Stop
Execution mode Skip
Execution mode Scroll
Permanent
Access permanent
Run-through from section
Run-through up to section
VPa
BOOL
yes
VPs
BOOL
yes
VPe
BOOL
yes
VPk
BOOL
yes
VPc
BOOL
yes
PPa
BOOL
no
PPe
BOOL
no
PPs
BOOL
no
PPk
BOOL
no
PPc
BOOL
no
Dlf
BOOL
yes
Dll
BOOL
yes
As
INT
yes
Ae
INT
yes
S01 .. 17
REAL
yes
L01 .. 17
TIME
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW1
Tiepoint 0 .. 16
Runtime 0 .. 16

S18 .. 33
REAL
yes
L18 .. 33
TIME
yes
RW
RW
Tiepoint 17 .. 32
Runtime 17 .. 32
RW
1 Run times are only RW, if the execution mode of time scheduler is OFF.
C-53
Section D
Binary
Contents
D 1
Overview Binary Blocks ..................................................................................D-5
D 2
D 2.1
D 2.2
Binary Output, M_BOUT ..................................................................................D-6

Parameters: Binary output M_BOUT .................................................................D-7
Function block data: Binary output allocation M_BOUT ....................................D-8
D 3
D 3.1
D 3.2
Monoflop, MONO_F..........................................................................................D-9
Parameters: Monoflop MONO_F .....................................................................D-10
Function block data: Monoflop MONO_F.........................................................D-11
D 4
D 4.1
D 4.2
Timer, Switch-on/off Delay, TONOF .............................................................D-12

Parameters: Timer, switch-on/off delay TONOF..............................................D-13
Function block data: Timer, switch-on/off delay TONOF .................................D-14
D 5
D 5.1
D 5.2
Timer, Switch-on Delay, TON ........................................................................D-15

Parameters: Timer, switch-on delay TON........................................................D-16
Function block data: Timer, switch-on delay TON ...........................................D-17
D 6
D 6.1
D 6.2
Timer, Switch-off Delay, TOF ........................................................................D-18

Parameters: Timer, switch-off delay TOF ........................................................D-19
Function block data: Timer, switch-off delay TOF............................................D-20
D 7
D 7.1
D 7.2
Timer with External Time Input, TIMER .......................................................D-21

Parameters: Timer with external time input TIMER .........................................D-22
Function block data: Timer with external input TIMER ....................................D-24
D 8
D 8.1
D 8.2
Time Counter, CTT .........................................................................................D-25

Parameters: Time counter CTT .......................................................................D-26
Function block data: Time counter CTT...........................................................D-27
D 9
D 9.1
D 9.2
Pulse Counter, CT_P......................................................................................D-28

Parameters: Pulse counter CT_P ....................................................................D-29
Function block data: Pulse counter CT_P........................................................D-30
D 10
D 10.1
D 10.2
Up/down Counter, CTUD ...............................................................................D-31

Parameters: Up/down counter CTUD ..............................................................D-32
Function block data: Up counter and down counter CTUD .............................D-33
D 11
D 11.1
D 11.2
Operating Time Counter, CT_LT...................................................................D-34

Parameters: Operating time counter, CT_LT...................................................D-35
Function block data: Operating time counter CT_LT .......................................D-36
D-3
Section D
Binary
D 12
D 12.1
D 12.2
Frequency / Analog Converter, FAC_D........................................................D-37

Parameters: Frequency / Analog converter FAC_D.........................................D-38
Function block data: Frequency / Analog converter FAC_D............................D-39
D 13
D 13.1
D 13.2
Touch Button, TOUCH ...................................................................................D-40

Parameters: Touch button, TOUCH.................................................................D-41
Function block data: Touch button TOUCH .....................................................D-42
D-4
Section D
Binary
D 1 Overview Binary Blocks

Designation
M_BOUT
MONO_F
TONOF
TON
TOF
TIMER
CTT
CT_P
CTUD
CT_LT
FAC_D
TOUCH
Binary output
Monoflop
Timer, switch-on/switch-off delay
Timer, switch-on delay
Timer, switch-off delay
Timer with external time input
Time counter
Pulse counter
Up/down counter
Operating time counter
Frequency/analog converter with spacing evaluation
Touch button
D-5
Section D
Binary
D 2 Binary Output, M_BOUT
di0001.bmp
Function
The binary output assignment serves to set a binary output.
The two operating modes manual and automatic are possible. In the
operating mode manual the output is switched over by the operator, in
automatic mode the output is controlled by the input signal.
If both operating mode signals are applied simultaneously, manual has
priority. An SMA output signal indicates the operating mode manual
(logic-0 signal) or automatic (logic-1 signal).
Display
Name, short text, operating mode with button M and A and state text.
The function has a small faceplate.
Switching over operating mode from manual to automatic and viceversa with buttons M and A. In the operating mode manual the output
can be switched over by the operator, buttons 1/0.
D-6
Section D
Binary
D 2.1 Parameters: Binary output M_BOUT
di0612uk.bmp
Operating mode
Manual
Automatic
Start operating mode manual

Start operating mode automatic
Lock Manual
switching to manual not possible

switching possible
Lock Automatic
switching to automatic not possible

switching possible
Display text for

Status 1
Status 0
Output text for binary signal 1,

direct input or via selection window
Output text for binary signal 0,
Initial settings
Manual value output
at start in the operating mode manual the output is
set to logic-1
set to logic-0
Manual value
accessible
Possible to change the output in the operating mode manual

not operator-controllable
D-7
Section D
Binary
D 2.2 Function block data: Binary output allocation M_BOUT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
MM
MA
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Signal for Manual operating mode
Signal for Automatic operating mode
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
SMA
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO

Pha
INT
yes
RW
Vh
Va
Phz
Lphz
Zt1
Zt0
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
D-8
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
TEXT
TEXT
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
Processing state
Output signal
TRUE = Automatic, FALSE = Manual
Parameter Manual/Automatic
Lock manual
Lock automatic
Parameter manual value
Access manual value
Display text for status 1
Display text for status 0
Section D
Binary
D 3 Monoflop, MONO_F
Function
The function block produces a binary output signal of configurable
duration. The positive or negative edge of a binary signal serves as the
triggering signal. A reset signal RES makes it possible to prematurely
reset the output signal.
di0005.bmp
The set pulse duration can be interrogated at output TS and the elapsed
time can be interrogated at output TC in the TIME format.
A message can be generated at logic 1 signal of output OUT.
Time response
di0658uk.bmp
Display
Name, short text, the pulse duration DT (Pin TS) and the elapsed time TC
(Pin TC) as bar and numerical value, the key RESET.
Changing the pulse duration within the valid scale range and premature
abort by RESET (Output OUT is set to logic-0 signal).
D-9
Section D
Binary
D 3.1 Parameters: Monoflop MONO_F
di0613uk.bmp
Pulse
Pulse duration
Access
Scale end
Enter the time of the output pulse in TIME format (e.g. T#5m3s)
pulse duration operator-controllable
Scale end value for the display. Input in TIME format.
Trigger
trigger on + edge
trigger on positive edge
trigger on - edge
trigger on negative edge
Reset
Access
operator-controllable RESET
Message
Mess. priority
Hint
Enter hint text
Mess. text
Message output text, direct input or via selection window
D-10
Section D
Binary
D 3.2 Function block data: Monoflop MONO_F

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no
no
RO
RO
OUT
BOOL
TS
TIME
TC
TIME
Id
TIME
Ilf
BOOL
Ske
TIME
Pre
BOOL
Lre
BOOL
Sf
INT
Ptl
Pte
MP
TIME
TIME
Processing state
Output signal
Set run time
Elapsed time
Pulse duration
Access pulse duration
Scale end for pulse duration
Reset parameter
Switch flank
0 = Positive, 1 = Negative
Display parameter running time
Display parameter time
Message
D-11
Section D
Binary
D 4 Timer, Switch-on/off Delay, TONOF
di0061.bmp
Function
This block is used for time control and monitoring of certain operating
states. It limits switch-on to a configurable time.
The input signal change is relayed undelayed.
A premature reset of the output signal by the RESET signal is possible.
Activation of positive or negative edge can be configured.
The set switch-on time can be interrogated at output TS and the elapsed
Time response
di0661uk.bmp
Display
Name, short text, the switch-on time DT (Pin TS) and the elapsed time TC
(Pin TC) as bar and numerical value. The message text and the key
RESET within the display.
The state of the output OUT, on (logic-1 signal), off (logic-0 signal).
Changing the switch-on time within the valid scale range and premature
abort by means of RESET (output OUT is set to logic-0 signal).
D-12
Section D
Binary
D 4.1 Parameters: Timer, switch-on/off delay TONOF
di0616uk.bmp
Time
Switch-on time
Access
Scale end
Enter the switch-on time in TIME format (e.g. T#5m3s)

switch-on time can be changed
Trigger
trigger on + edge
trigger on - edge
Reset
Access
operator-controllable reset
Message
Mess. priority
Hint
Enter the hint text
Mess. text
D-13
Section D
Binary
D 4.2 Function block data: Timer, switch-on/off delay TONOF

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
yes
RW
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
OUT
BOOL
TS
TIME
TC
TIME
Sf
INT
Pte
Lte
Ske
Pre
Lre
Ptl
Ptw
MP
D-14
TIME
BOOL
TIME
BOOL
BOOL
TIME
TIME
Processing state
Output signal
Set run time
Elapsed time
Switch flank
Delay time
Access delay time
Scale end
Reset parameter
Message
Section D
Binary
D 5 Timer, Switch-on Delay, TON
di0006.bmp
Function
This block is used for time control and monitoring of certain operating
states. It delays switch-on by a configurable time.
Switch-off is relayed undelayed.
A premature reset of the delay time is possible with the RESET-signal
RES. The delay time is reactivated after resetting the reset signal.
The set delay time can be interrogated at output TS and the elapsed time
can be interrogated at output TC in the TIME format.
Time response
di0659uk.bmp
Display
Name, short text, the delay time DT (Pin TS) and the elapsed time TC (Pin
TC) as bar and numerical value. The message text and the key RESET
within the display.
Changing the delay time within the valid scale range and premature abort
by means of RESET (Output OUT is set to logic-0 signal).
D-15
Section D
Binary
D 5.1 Parameters: Timer, switch-on delay TON
di0614uk.bmp
Time
Delay time
Access
Scale end
Enter the delay time in TIME format (e.g. T#5m3s)

delay time can be changed
Trigger
trigger on + edge
trigger on - edge
Reset
Access
Message
Mess. priority
Hint
Enter hint text
Mess. text
D-16
Section D
Binary
D 5.2 Function block data: Timer, switch-on delay TON

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
RW
no
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no
no
RO
RO
OUT
BOOL
TS
TIME
TC
TIME
Pte
TIME
Lte
BOOL
Ske
TIME
Pre
BOOL
Lre
BOOL
Sf
INT
Ptl
Ptw
MP
TIME
TIME
Processing state
Output signal
Set run time
Elapsed time
Delay time
Access delay time
Scale end
Reset parameter
Switch flank
Message
D-17
Section D
Binary
D 6 Timer, Switch-off Delay, TOF
di0060.bmp
Function
This block is for time control and monitoring of certain operating states.
It delays switch-off by a configurable time.
The change of the input signal is relayed undelayed.
A premature reset of the delay time is possible with the RESET-signal
RES. The delay time is reactivated after resetting the reset signal.
The set delay time can be interrogated at output TS and the elapsed
Time response
di0660uk.bmp
Display
Name, short text, the delay time DT (Pin TS) and the elapsed time TC
(Pin TC) as bar and numerical value. The message text and the key
RESET within the display.
Changing the delay time within the valid scale range and premature
abort by means of RESET (Output OUT is set to logic-0 signal).
Acknowledge of message.
D-18
Section D
Binary
D 6.1 Parameters: Timer, switch-off delay TOF
di0615uk.bmp
Time
Delay time
Access
Scale end
Enter the delay time in TIME format

(e.g. T#5m3s)
delay time can be changed
Trigger
trigger on + edge
trigger on - edge
Reset
Access
Message
Mess. priority
Hint
Enter hint text
Mess. text
D-19
Section D
Binary
D 6.2 Function block data: Timer, switch-off delay TOF

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
yes
RW
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
OUT
BOOL
TS
TIME
TC
TIME
Sf
INT
Pte
Lte
Ske
Pre
Lre
Ptl
Ptw
MP
D-20
TIME
BOOL
TIME
BOOL
BOO
TIME
TIME
Processing state
Output signal
Set run time
Elapsed time
Switch flank
Delay time
Access delay time
Scale end
Reset parameter
Display variable count running time
Display variable time
Message
Section D
Binary
D 7 Timer with External Time Input, TIMER
di0747.bmp
Function
This module contains the functions of the 4 different Timer modules
MONO_F, TONOF, TON and TOF. The required function is set by a
button in the parameter definition mask. The time to be switched, switch
duration, can be specified by the operator or externally via Pin T.
Via the reset signal RES, premature interruption of the set time is possible.
Changeover, whether the internal or external time is being used, is effected via inputs MI (internal time specification mode) and ME (external
time specification mode) or by operating interventions within DigiVis. If
both inputs are set to logic-1 signal, the internal mode takes precedence.
The mode can be interlocked.
The current operating mode status is output at output SIE (logic-0 signal
= internal , logic-1 signal = external).
Activation of positive and negative edge can be configured.
The active switch duration (pulse duration, switch-on time or delay time)
can be scanned at output TS, the elapsed time at output TC in the TIME
format.
Time behavior
di0750uk.bmp
D-21
Section D
Binary
Display
Name, short text, switch-in or delay time DT (Pin TE) , the elapsed time TC (Pin TC) as bargraphs and numerical values and the TIMER type.
The buttons Reset for reset, I for internal and E for external.
Changing the switch-on and delay time via the TIME button, premature interruption via the
RESET button and operating mode changeover via the INT/EXT button.
D 7.1 Parameters: Timer with external time input TIMER
di0748uk.bmp
Time
Switch duration
Access
Scale end
Enter duration of output pulse, switch-on time or of the time delay in TIME
format (e.g.T#5m3s)
Output pulse, switch-on time and delay time operator-controllable
Trigger
trigger on + edge
trigger on - edge
D-22
Section D
Timer type
Monoflop
Switch on delay
Switch off delay
Switch on/off delay
Reset
Access
Binary
Function block MONO_F

Function block TON
Function block TOF
Function block TONOF
Reset operator-controllable.
Not operator-controllable.
di0749uk.bmp
Mode
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
Lock
Start conditions for non-assigned inputs MI/ME

Timer starts in internal mode
Timer starts in external mode
Internal or External changeover not possible
Changeover possible
Message
Mess. priority
Hint
Enter the hint text
Mess. text
Output text of the message, direct input or via selection window
D-23
Section D
Binary
D 7.2 Function block data: Timer with external input TIMER

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
T
RES
MI
ME
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
TIME
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Time for TIMER
Reset signal
Operating mode Internal
Operating mode External
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
TS
TC
SIE
BOOL
TIME
TIME
BOOL
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO

Sf
INT
yes
RW
Ske
Pre
Lre
Tv
yes
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
Pt
TIME
yes
Lpt
BOOL
yes
Ptl
TIME
no
Pte
TIME
no
Pie
INT
yes
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
Vi
Ve
MP
D-24
TIME
BOOL
BOOL
INT
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
Processing state
Output signal
Set run time
Elapsed time
Status signal Internal (FALSE), External
(TRUE)
Switch flank
Scale end for pulse length
Reset parameter
Timer type
0 = MONO_F
1 = TON
2 = TOF
3 = TONOF
Switch duration
Access switch duration
Operating mode Internal/External
Lock mode internal
Lock mode external
Message
Section D
Binary
D 8 Time Counter, CTT
di0007.bmp
Function
This block supplies a time value as an output signal CTC depending on a
binary input signal IN. The time when the input signal was switched on is
determined in milliseconds from the start of the counter.
The time value of the last completed cycle can be red at the output CTP.
The counter range is designed in such a way that maximum counting up
to 24 hours (T#24d...) is obtained.
The output CTC can be reset with a reset signal RES. The time
acquisition restarts at zero.
Up to two limit values can monitor the output.
Display
Name, short text, the current counter reading CA (Pin CTC) and the
counter reading of the last period CP (Pin CTP) as a bar and a numerical
value.
The max. two limit values L1, L2 as numerical values and markers on the
bar, the button RESET within the display.
Changing the limit values L1, L2 and RESET the time value output to 0.
D-25
Section D
Binary
D 8.1 Parameters: Time counter CTT
di0617uk.bmp
Messages
max. two limit values, see General Description and Overview.
Scale end
Scale end value for the display in TIME format

(e.g. T#24h30m)
Reset access
D-26
operator-controllable reset, i.e. manual reset possible

Section D
Binary
D 8.2 Function block data: Time counter CTT

The values for the limit values (L1, L2) are only accessible by the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
L1
L2
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
TIME
TIME
no
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
Limit variable 1
Limit variable 2
BOOL
no
RO
CTC
TIME
CTP
TIME
SL1
BOOL
SL2
BOOL
Ske
TIME
Pr
BOOL
Lr
BOOL
Pa
TIME
Pzp
TIME
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
no
yes
no
no
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
Lf1
MP1
Lf12
MP2
BOOL
yes
no Acc.
BOOL
yes
no Acc.
Processing state
Current counter reading since last period
Scale end
Reset parameter
Display parameter for running counter
Display parameter counter for the last period
Message 1
Message 2
D-27
Section D
Binary
D 9 Pulse Counter, CT_P
di0063.bmp
Function
This block counts the pulses from pulse generators (frequency < 5 Hz)
and converts them into quantity values.
After each cycle the counter reading for the current period is converted
into an analog value, taking into consideration the significance, and
outputted to output CTC.
A cycle comprises the input pulses fixed in the pulse scan-down.
The analog value of the last period can be interrogated at output CTP.
The counter is reset by means of the reset input RES or by reading the
resetting value or its highest counter reading (232-1) or the period duration
is proceeded. The output OFL is set to logic-1 signal for a
parameterizable number of cycles and subsequently canceled until the
next reset to logic-0 signal.
This can be used for cascading to a sequence counter.
If an error is ascertained in connection with internal calculation, e.g. division by zero, the module is set as an error (ERR = 1).
This function block must run in interval tasks with time controlling.
Display
Name, short text. The analog output signal of the current counter reading
CA (Pin CTC) and the counter reading of the last period CP (Pin CTP) as
numerical values and bars, the period length, the resetting value and the
limit values as numerical values. The limit values L1, L2 are also displayed as markers next to the bars. The button RESET appears only if reset was configured as accessible.
Changing the limit values L1, L2 and RESET the counter.
D-28
Section D
Binary
D 9.1 Parameters: Pulse counter CT_P
di0619uk.bmp
Messages
Period duration
Enter the count length in TIME format (e.g. T#8h)

An empty input field means: the counting period within the module is invalid (permanent run). In this state the value cannot be changed during
commissioning.
Resetting value
Fixed value for resetting the counter in connection with overflow

In the case of an empty input field the overflow value is invalid. The value
0.0 is then displayed during commissioning and cannot be changed.
Cycle count
for OFL:
After the end of the period length, reset or counter overflow, the output OFL remains set at the number of cycles (1..99) set here.
Pulse scan-down
After n input pulses the internal count is incremented by 1, range from 1

to 9999
Significance
Weighting factor for the analog output
Reset access
operator-controllable reset of counter

Output parameter
Dim.
Physical unit of the output, direct input or via selection window
Scale end
Scale end for display. Input in REAL format.
D-29
Section D
Binary
D 9.2 Function block data: Pulse counter CT_P

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
L1
L2
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
no
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
Limit variable 1
Limit variable 2
BOOL
no
RO
CTC
CTP
OFL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
yes
yes
RW
no Acc.
SL1
BOOL
SL2
BOOL
ERR
BOOL
Dim
TEXT
Zua
INT
Iu
INT
Wr
REAL
Pp
TIME
Rfw
REAL
Ske
REAL
Pr
BOOL
Lr
BOOL
Pzp
REAL
Pzl
REAL
Hy1
REAL
Lf1
BOOL
MP1
Hy2
REAL
Lf12
BOOL
MP2
D-30
Processing state
Carry signal, True for a parameterizable time,
if the counter exceeds its maximum value
Dimension
Cycles count for OFL
Pulse scale-down
Significance
Period duration
Resetting value
Scale end
Reset parameter
Display parameter counter for the last period
Message 1
Message 2
Section D
Binary
D 10 Up/down Counter, CTUD
di0064.bmp
Function
This block can be used to monitor discrete processes or quantity
measurements with pulse generators for inputs and outputs. An internal,
signed 32-bit counter contains the balance of the input and output pulses
(INU, IND) since the last reset. This counter reading taking into
consideration the significance is relayed to output CTC.
The overflow limits, both positive and negative, are monitored. If they are
exceeded, the corresponding overflow output SCP or SCN is set for a
configurable number of program cycles and the counter is reset. In this
way it is possible to cascade up/down counters.
After a reset RES, the configurable basic value PR is accepted as the initial value.
If an error is ascertained in connection with internal calculation, e.g. REAL
overflow, the module is set as an error (ERR = 1).
Display
Name, short text. The analog output signal of the current counter reading
CA (Pin CTC) as a numerical value and bar. Also the basic value BV and
the limit values L1, L2 as numerical values. The limit values are also displayed as markers next to the bar. The button RESET appears only if reset
was configured as accessible.
Changing the limit values L1, L2 and resetting the counter.
D-31
Section D
Binary
D 10.1 Parameters: Up/down counter CTUD
di0620uk.bmp
Messages
Basic value
Reset access
Output parameter
Signific.
SCS
SCE

Start value at the start of the count or after resetting. Input only possible if
no signal was applied to module input PR.
operator-controllable reset of the counter
Weighting factor for the analog output
Scale start for the display
Scale end for the display
Carry
In case of an empty input field the limits are invalid. The value 0.0 is then
displayed during commissioning and cannot be changed.
Positive
Limit for overflow in positive direction. By crossing this limit the output
SCP is set and the counter is reset.
Limits < basic value are not acceptable.
Negative
Limit for overflow in negative direction. By crossing this limie the output
SCN is set and the counter is reset.
Limits > basic value are not acceptable.
When the positive or negative limit is reached, the output SCP or SCN
remains set at the number of cycles (1..99) set here.
Active cycles
Dim.
D-32
Physical unit of the output, direct input or via selection window
Section D
Binary
D 10.2 Function block data: Up counter and down counter CTUD

The values for the basic value (PR) and the limit values (L1, L2) are only accessible by the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
INU
IND
RES
PR
L1
L2
Output
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Pulse input for counting up
Pulse input for counting down
Reset signal
Basic value
Limit variable 1
Limit variable 2
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RO
RW
no Acc.
yes
yes
RW
no Acc.
CTC
REAL
SCP
BOOL
SCN
BOOL
SL1
BOOL
SL2
BOOL
ERR
BOOL
Dim
TEXT
Zua
INT
Ska
REAL
Ske
REAL
Pr
BOOL
Lr
BOOL
Kup
REAL
Kun
REAL
Wk
REAL
Pzl
REAL
Hy1
REAL
Lf1
BOOL
MP1
Hy2
REAL
Lf12
BOOL
MP2
Processing state
State counter overflow in neg. area
State counter overflow in pos. area
Dimension
No. of cycles for transmission output
Scale start output
Scale end output
Reset parameter
Positive carry
Negative carry
Significance of counter
Message 1
Message 2
D-33
Section D
Binary
D 11 Operating Time Counter, CT_LT

Function
Dependent on a binary input signal IN, this block produces a time related
UDINT format value as output signal CTC. The counter value for the latest
completed period can be queried at output CTP.
For real counting of operating time, it is now possible to configure a time
resolution for the counter. In dependence of the time resolution the outputs CTC and CTP represents:
di0732.bmp
Second
Minute
Hour
the full seconds counted.

the full minutes counted.
the full hours counted.
The counter works in every time resolution with millisecond accuracy.

The output CTC and CTP are interpreted as seconds.
Convert explicitly to TIME data types.
The input signals switch-on time is recorded from the moment the counter
is started. The range of the counter is set up in such a way that a time (in
seconds range) in excess of 136 years can be counted
(136a 70d 6h 28m 15s).
Output CTC can be deleted by means of a Reset signal RES.
The output can be monitored by up to two limit values.
Display
Name, short text, the current counter value CA and the counter value of
the last period represented as columns and numeric values.
Up to two limit values L1, L2 represented as numeric values and as markers next to the bar.
If the Reset accessible option is selected, the RESET button appears
within the faceplate.
Operator Interventions
Changing the limit values L1, L2 and RESET the time value output to 0.
D-34
Section D
Binary
D 11.1 Parameters: Operating time counter, CT_LT
di0733uk.bmp
Messages
max. two limit values, input in UDINT format, see General Description
and Overview.
Scale range end
Input for display in UDINT format
Reset accessible
Time resolution
Second
Minute
Hour
Reset can be used, i.e. manual deletion possible

not available
The time related values are input in full seconds.

The time related values are input in full minutes.
The time related values are input in full hours.
D-35
Section D
Binary
D 11.2 Function block data: Operating time counter CT_LT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
RES
L1
L2
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
UDINT
UDINT
no
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
CTC
UDINT
CTP
UDINT
SL1
BOOL
SL2
BOOL
Ske
UDINT
Pr
BOOL
Lr
BOOL
ZA
INT
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RO
Pa
UDINT
no
RO
Pzp
UDINT
no
RO
Lf1
MP1
Lf12
MP2
BOOL
yes
no Acc.
BOOL
yes
no Acc.
D-36
Comment
Enable
Input signal
Reset signal
Limit variable 1
Limit variable 2
Processing state
True, if limit value 1 violated
True, if limit value 2 violated
Scale end
Reset parameter
Time resolution
0 = Second, 1 = Minute, 2 = Hour
Display parameter for running
counter
Display parameter counter for
last period
Message 1
Message 2
Section D
Binary
D 12 Frequency / Analog Converter, FAC_D
di0062.bmp
Function
This block converts pulse frequencies (< 5 Hz) into analog values, acting as
a frequency counter that counts the rising pulse flanks.
The (im)pulse-pause ratio must be 1.
In order to compensate for periodic phase errors with pulse trains and in
order to adapt the various frequencies of the measurement pulses, time
evaluation can be expanded to several pulse spacings, by means of pulse
scan-down.
After the counting has been completed, the counter reading is divided by
the value of the pulse scan-down and taking account of the significance, it
is converted into an analog signal. This signal is present constantly at the
output for the duration of the next counting period.
If a minimum frequency (min. frequency) is undershot, i.e. if no flank is
detected at the input during one period, a 0 appears at output OUT.
If an error is detected in the internal calculation, e.g. division by zero, the
block is set as an error (ERR = 1).
Display
Name, short text, analog output signal (Pin OUT) as numerical value with
physical unit. The function has a small faceplate.
None
D-37
Section D
Binary
D 12.1 Parameters: Frequency / Analog converter FAC_D
di0618uk.bmp
Pulse scan-down
Scan-down in range from 1 to 99
Significance
Weighting factor of a single pulse for the analog output

Example:
For a rotational-speed measurement with 40 pulses / minute the significance is to be set to 1/40 = 0.025 [ /minute ].
Min. frequency
minimum input frequency in Hz,

Enter in REAL format.
Dimension
Physical unit of the output for further processing, direct input or via selection window.
D-38
Section D
Binary
D 12.2 Function block data: Frequency / Analog converter FAC_D

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal
yes
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
Dimension
Significance
Pulse scale-down
Minimum frequency
OUT
BOOL
ERR
BOOL
Dim
TEXT
Wr
REAL
Ui
INT
Fmin
REAL
D-39
Section D
Binary
D 13 Touch Button, TOUCH
di0768d.bmp
Function
Depending on the parameters defined, the output OUT of this block delivers
a logic-1 or logic-0 signal. By means of operator interventions within DigiVis,
the binary output OUT can be set for a parameterizable time, Task cycles,
to logic-1 signal.
The logic-1 or logic-0 state is reset automatically.
A renewed touch is possible only after task cycles parameterized have been
completed. The button is always operator-controllable.
Method of operation of the button:
di0770uk.bmp
This block may only be used in default and cycle tasks.
Display
Name, short text and display text for On or Off. The function has a small
faceplate.
Operation
The output can be actuated via the button TCH or in the dialog line via the
button TOUCH.
D-40
Section D
Binary
D 13.1 Parameters: Touch button, TOUCH
di0769d.bmp
Task cycles
Number of task cycles at which output OUT should be at the logic-1

signal
Touch (IBT)
Touch facility during commissioning

If Touch (IBT) was seted in configuration mode, the output OUT
will set - corresponding to the configuration - by loading of the
function block.
Display text for

Touch
No touch
Default output
Low
High
Output text for switching logic-1 signal,

direct entry or selected via selector window.
Output text for no switching logic-0 signal,
direct entry or selected via selector window.
Signal transition logic -0/-1/-0
Signal transition logic -1/-0/-1
D-41
Section D
Binary
D 13.2 Function block data: Touch button TOUCH

Name
Input
EN
Outputs
ENO
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable
BOOL
no
RO
Processing state
Output signal
OUT
BOOL
Tt
INT
Tast
BOOL
Dout
INT
no
RO
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Ton
Toff
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
D-42
TEXT
TEXT
Number of task cycles

Touch trigger (IBT)
Default output
0 = Low, 1 = High
Text for state On
Text for state Off
Section E
Controllers
Contents
E 1
Overview Controller Functions Blocks............................................................... E-5
E 2
Functional Diagram for Controllers .................................................................... E-6
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
3
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
Continuous Controllers...................................................................................... E-11

Recurring parameter entries for continuous controllers ....................................... E-12
Continuous controller, standard, C_CS ................................................................ E-20
Parameters: Continuous controller, standard, C_CS ........................................... E-21
Function block data: Continuous controller, standard, C_CS............................... E-24
Continuous controller, universal, C_CU ............................................................... E-27
Parameters: Continuous controller, universal; C_CU........................................... E-29
Function block data: Continuous controller, universal, C_CU .............................. E-32
Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR....................................................................... E-36
Parameters: Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR .................................................. E-39
Function block data: Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR ..................................... E-45
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
4
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
Step Controllers .................................................................................................. E-49

Recurring parameter entries for step controllers .................................................. E-51
Step controller, standard, C_SS ........................................................................... E-59
Parameters: Step controller, standard, C_SS ...................................................... E-61
Function block data: Step controller, standard, C_SS.......................................... E-63
Step controller, universal, C_SU............................................................................ E-67
Parameters: Step controller, universal, C_SU...................................................... E-70
Function block data: Step controller, universal, C_SU ......................................... E-74
Step controller, ratio, C_SR.................................................................................. E-78
Parameters: Step controller, ratio C_SR .............................................................. E-82
Function block data: Step controller, ratio, C_SR ................................................ E-87
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
Two-position Controller for Off - On ................................................................. E-92

Recurring parameter entries for two-position controllers...................................... E-93
Two-position controller, standard, C_OS ........................................................... E-100
Parameters: Two-position controller, standard, C_OS....................................... E-101
Function block data: Two-position controller, standard, C_OS .......................... E-103
Two-position controller, universal, C_OU ........................................................... E-106
Parameters: Two-position controller, universal, C_OU ...................................... E-108
Function block data: Two-position controller, universal, C_OU.......................... E-112
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
6
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
Three-position Controller for Heat-Off-Cool .................................................. E-116

Recurring parameter entries for three-position controllers ................................. E-119
Three-position controller, standard, C_PS ......................................................... E-126
Parameters: Three position controller, standard, C_PS..................................... E-128
Function block data: Three-position controller, standard, C_PS ........................ E-130
Three-position controller, universal, C_PU......................................................... E-133
Parameters: Three-position controller, universal, C_PU .................................... E-135
Function block data: Three-position controller, universal, C_PU ....................... E-139
E-3
Section E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
7
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
E-4
Controllers
Controller selftune, TUNE ................................................................................E-143

Selftune process .................................................................................................E-143
Controller selftune block, TUNE .........................................................................E-144
Behavior during a warm start..............................................................................E-146
Parameters: Controller selftune, TUNE ..............................................................E-146
Specimen configuration with a controller ............................................................E-153
Function block data: Controller selftune, TUNE .................................................E-153
Section E
Continuous Controllers
E 1 Overview Controller Functions Blocks

Designation
C_CS
C_CU
Continuous controller, standard

Continuous controller, universal
C_CR
Continuous controller, ratio
C_SS
C_SU
Step controller, standard

Step controller, universal
C_SR
Step controller, ratio
C_OS
C_OU
Two-Position controller, standard

Two-Position controller, universal
C_PS
C_PU
Three-Position controller, standard

Three-Position controller, universal
TUNE
Controller selftune
E-5
Section E
E 2 Functional Diagram for Controllers
di3300uk.cgm
Symbols
Pin - Input / Output values
Displayed in overview display
Internal values
Value is accessible in
DigiVis
Displayed in faceplate
E-6
Section E
di3301uk.cgm
Symbols
Gradient limitation (Ramp function)
Absolute value limitation
Dead zone for CE

Rising/falling valve characteristic
E-7
Section E
Selector description
OM nom.
Nominal operating mode
OM act.
Actual operating mode
SPI
Internal set point (operator access)
SP1
Effective set point (internal/external)
SP2
Effective set point (synchronized, ratio controller)
SP3
Effective set point (limited)
SP4
Actual set point for time function (behind ramp)
PV1
Controlled variable with no disturbance variable feedforward
PV2
Controlled variable with disturbance variable feedforward
PV3
Effective controlled variable for display and alarm value checking
CE
Control deviation
CE1
Control deviation with feed forward
CE2
Effective control deviation for time function (behind dead zone)
CE3
Effective control deviation for display and alarm value checking
Vist
Actual ratio (ratio controller only)
OM
Output manual
OUT
Output time function
OUT1
Effective output (Manual/Auto)
OUT2
Effective output (Tracking yes/no)
OUT3
Effective output (incl. feed forward, in Auto only, without tracking)
OUT4
Effective output (limited)
OUT5
Effective output (behind ramp)
OUT6
Effective output for output function (behind manual setting characteristics)
FB sim.
Simulated (internal feedback)
E-8
Section E
Description of the function block time function

The time function of the controller blocks represents a PID algorithm based on the following
fundamental structure:
Operating point AP
(or passive I-action)
Control difference
Xd
yI
Output variable
y
+
yD
y=y + y + y
P I
D
DT1
The following are the main parameters affecting the time function:
Proportional coefficient
Reset time
Lead
Derivative gain
Operating point
KP
TN
TV
KV
AP
The associated analog differential equation is formed as follows:

P-action
yP = KP xD
yP = KP xD + AP
I-action
yI = KP / TN xD dt
D-action
yD = KP TV dxD / dt - T1 dyD / dt; T1 = TV / KV
Output variable
y = yP + yI + yD
for active I-action

for passive I-action
E-9
Section E
Algorithms
For all algorithms with an I-action an incremental control algorithm is used with an additive absolute D-action, and when there is no I-action the absolute positioning algorithm is used.
Depending on the configuration, the D-action, and similarly the P-action when the |-component
is active) can be used on the controlled variable PV or the controlled difference CE. The separate configuration options can be found in the descriptions of the corresponding controller
blocks.
Controller with no I-action (P, PD):
Operating Point
OP
+
CE
OUT
DT1
PV
Controller with I-action (I, PI, PID):
PV
P
+
CE
PV
E-10
+
+
DT1
OU-
-1
Section E
E 3 Continuous Controllers
The control algorithm of the continuous controller supplies a continuous output variable signal
OUT as a PID function of the control difference CE.
Three continuous controller function blocks are provided.
The C_CS Controller is intended for standard tasks in which no special inputs are required
for altering the state of the controller.
The C_CU Controller includes a number of additional inputs which can be used for altering
the state of the controller.
The C_CR Controller is a ratio controller. It adjusts two measured values to a set ratio. The
ratio value may be set internally or externally.
What all the controllers have in common is that an input variable PV (controlled variable) must
follow a predetermined pattern regardless of unavoidable disturbances.
The controlled variable PV should at all times be as close as possible to the set point (command
variable) SP. This is achieved by calculating the control difference CE (CE = SP - PV). This
sends to the controller an output variable OUT which influences the controlled member and
attempts to cancel out the control difference CE.
The set point may be available internally or else be introduced as an external set point SP.
Switching between the internal set point or external set point W occurs by means of two binary
inputs MI (Mode - Set point - internal) or ME (Mode - Set point - external). The operating mode
manual is provided to allow the user to influence the correcting output OUT directly by bypassing the control algorithm. For this purpose, the switch inputs for manual MM and automatic
MA are provided. In order to switch from manual to automatic modes for particular purposes, a
number of synchronization options may be selected when setting parameters.
The function blocks handle up to four limit values. These consist either of signals introduced from
external sources, or as constants which can be changed. The limit values relate to the controlled
variable PV, the control difference CE or the ratio. Apart from the output variable OUT, the analog
values of the control difference CE and the set point ASP are also provided as output values. The
binary state output SMA / SIE can be used to query whether the controller is operating in manual
or automatic mode, and whether it is using internal or external set points. Where limit values
are violated, the corresponding output SL1 ... SL4 is set to 1.
A processing error sets the output ERR to logic-1 and supplies an error code at output STA.
STA
0
1
3
9
10
Meaning
no error
input error (input signal is out of range)
internal error (range 0)
floating point overflow, correction was carried out
floating point overflow, correction failed.
The output error code applies to the most recent fault. After the fault is gone, the output STA is
reset to 0.
The controllers may only be used in cyclical tasks with fixed (equidistant) time intervals.
The control difference (XD) CE and its limit values are output as physical variables.
E-11
Section E
E 3.1 Recurring parameter entries for continuous controllers

The continuous controllers are defined in three parameter masks, the ratio controller in four.
In the first three masks certain entries recur.
The entries which are applicable to all controllers are defined in the following parameter masks.
If the pin name is given in a parameter entry, the parameter value can be provided by the pin.
Thus the lower set-point limit parameter should be entered just as a constant, but the lower
output limit OL parameter should be entered as a constant or by module input OL.
Parameter Mask 1/3
di0651uk.bmp
Range start
Of SP and PV signals - for controller-based scaling and display. Entered

as REAL numbers.
Range end
Of SP and PV signals - for controller-based scaling and display. Entered

as REAL numbers.
Physical unit of SP and PV signals used for display. Direct entry or via list
box.
Dimension
Internal
set point
Output
Access
E-12
Set point SP, processed when switching to internal set point

Output OUT, applicable when manual mode is selected
Possible to change the internal set point SP / output OUT in manual
mode
Cannot be used
Section E
Messages
The Type field can be used to determine whether the maximum of four
limit values relate to the controlled variable (L, LL, H, HH), the control difference (L_XD, LL_XD, H_XD, HH_XD) or to the dead band (LH_XD).
Direct entry or via list box.
See Section B, General description and Overview.
Parameter Mask 2/3
di0652uk.bmp
Controller branch P and/or I

P branch
P branch in control algorithm is effective,
I branch
I branch in control algorithm is effective.
D-action
on
positive
negative
off
effective with positive and negative change in control difference,

effective only with positive change in control difference,
effective only with negative change in control difference,
D branch not effective.
E-13
Section E
D-action of
PV
CE
P-action of
PV
CE
Indicates whether the D branch is calculated from the controlled variable

or control difference.
D branch based on controlled variable,
D branch based on control difference.
Indicates whether the P branch affects the controlled variable PV or the
control difference CE. Selection of PV causes attenuation of the output
variable OUT when command values change.
P branch influences controlled variable PV
P branch influences control difference CE
Derivative action
Indicates the factor by which the derivative action CD increases the complete D branch.
The effective D branch is calculated from CD D branch.
CD
CD entered as a REAL number, range 0.0 CD 20.0.
Controller Parameters
CP
Proportional correction value CP, entered as REAL number, range 0.0
CP 1000.0,
TR
Reset time TR, entered in TIME format, range TR 0 ms,
TD
Rate time, entered in TIME format, range TD 0 ms.
Tsync
Stabilizing time for PT1 action entered in TIME format, range Tsync
0 ms.
PT1 action takes effect in:
- transfer from manual to Auto with I branch inoperative
- smooth KP variation with I branch inoperative dependent on
- configuration,
- transfer from PI to P dependent on configuration.
Inverse char.
Operating point
E-14
The inverse characteristic deviation CE is processed.

Only for configurations without I branch.
Output variable OUT entered as percentage with a deviation of CE
from 0. Entered as a REAL number.
Section E
Sync. MAN to AUTO

To avoid set point conflicts a range of synchronization options can be selected for switching operating mode from manual to automatic
without
adjust to old
set point
adjust to current
set point
Set point SP remains unchanged.

In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to process value PV and in
automatic mode, it reverts to the old applicable set point SP according to a predefined gradient.
In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to process value PV. In
automatic mode, set point SP is retained when the set points are internal.
The following diagram shows the procedure:
di0689uk.bmp
E-15
Section E
Parameter Mask 3/3
di0626uk.bmp
Ramp function (time per span)

Set point rising
Set point rising.
Enter the minimum time required for running through the set point range
(start to end of span). Entered in TIME format.
Set point falling
Set point gradient

active in Manual
mode
Set point falling.

(end to start of span). Entered in TIME format.
The set-point ramp is active in both Manual and Automatic modes

The set-point ramp is active only in Automatic mode
Output rising
Enter the minimum time required for running through the output range
(0% - 100%). Entered in TIME format.
Output falling
(100% - 0%). Entered in TIME format.
E-16
Section E
Output gradient
active in Manual
The output ramp is active in both Manual and Automatic modes.

The output ramp is active only in Automatic mode.
Constants
Set point limit high/
Set point limit low
Upper / lower set point SP limit in REAL format.
The set point limits are linked with the measuring range limits through a
special algorithm:
Unless the set point limits are explicitly changed, the lower set point limit
follows the measuring range start and the upper set point limit follows the
measuring range end.
If the set point limits have been defined by the user, then they are brought
in line with the corresponding measuring range limits as long as the
measuring range end is set lower than the upper set point limit or the
measuring range start is greater than the lower set point limit.
Output limit high/
Output limit low
Dead band for CE
upper / lower output limit in REAL format.

Dead time of control difference. It is 0...25% symmetrically around
CE = 0.0; entered in REAL format.
E-17
Section E
Effectiveness of output limits

active in Man and
Auto
Output variable OUT is limited by output limits OH and OL in manual
and automatic modes.
active in AUTO
Output variable OUT is limited by output limits OH and OL in automatic mode only.
not active
No limits to output variable OUT.
The following diagram shows the procedure:
di0691uk.bmp
The way in which the output limits are either active or inactive depending on operating mode,
particularly as regards tracking, is shown again in the table below. Tracking applies only to
controllers with a TRC input (C_CU, C_CR), and is described under the corresponding module.
E-18
Section E
Auto mode
without tracking
Manual mode
without tracking
Tracking mode
(Manual or Auto)
The output limits set are

taken into account as long as
the output limits in Auto are
configured as active.

taken into account as with
the output limits in Manual
automatic mode with no
are configured as active.
tracking, whereby the values
Caution: If the output range
of the active output limits are
produced from the Manis reduced, the output will
ual/Auto operating mode in
follow the output limits, i.e.
which tracking is being perthe output can sometimes
formed and from the output
change the valve position
limit effectiveness configured
even in Manual mode. If the
(active in Manual/Auto).
output range is increased, the
current position is maintained.
Set point tracking

SPI tracks actual
set point
SPI as adjusted
The internal set point tracks the external set point SP in external
mode,
the internal set point is not altered.
The following diagram shows the procedure
di0690uk.bmp
E-19
Section E
E 3.2 Continuous controller, standard, C_CS

Function
Simple continuous standard controller without the option of external variation
of the controller parameters.
An external set point SP may be introduced.
di0043.bmp
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external mode can be

obtained by pins (MM/MA or MI/ME) as well as DigiVis. If a logic-1 signal is
present for a certain mode, the mode switch to DigiVis is inhibited. Whether
DigiVis or pin is pre-set, the active modes are available at corresponding
outputs (SMA and SIE). If both signals are present, the controller operates in
manual or internal mode.
The following tables show the signals at the binary outputs (state display) with
corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
Input
MM
Hand
0
1
1
MA
Auto
1
1
0
Output
SMA
Man./Auto
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
If none of the relevant inputs is set to logical 1, then the last operating
state remains in force.
A maximum of four limit values is permitted using constants and/or external
signals. The limits refer to the controlled variable or the control difference.
Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1 ... SL4 is set
to 1.
The other output values are the variable OUT, the deviation CE and the active set point ASP.
Display
Set point SP (Pin ASP), process value PV (Pin PV) and output variable Out
(Pin OUT) as numerical values and as bar chart. The set point bar encloses
the process value bar, with the output to the right.
Limit values L1 to L4 (Pins L1 to L4) as numeric values, and the corresponding mark on the process value bar.
E-20
Section E
Output value and set point modes are displayed as buttons with the following inscriptions:
Output value mode
Manual
Automatic
Button
H
A
Set point value mode

Internal
External
Button
I
E
The internal set point SP can be altered in automatic and manual modes.
The output variable Out can only be altered in manual mode.
The set point can be switched to internal or external mode with the INT/EXT button, and the
output variable to manual or automatic with the MANUAL/AUTO button.
The maximum of four limit values L1...L4 can also be altered.
E 3.2.1 Parameters: Continuous controller, standard, C_CS
di0624uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-12, Recurring parameter entries for Continuous Controllers, parameter mask 1/3.
E-21
Section E
di0625uk.bmp
Operating mode inhibition
SP-Intern
No switching to operating mode set point internal,
SP-Extern
No switching to operating mode set point external,
Out-Man
No switching of output to operating mode manual,
Out-Auto
No switching of output to operating mode automatic.
Operating Modes
Intern
Initial settings where no signal is present at inputs ME/MI/MA/MM

Controller starts in operating mode set point internal
Extern
Controller starts in operating mode set point external
Man
Controller starts in operating mode manual
Auto
Controller starts in operating mode automatic
E-22
Section E
di0626uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries see page E-16, Recurring parameter entries for Continuous Controllers, parameter mask 3/3.
E-23
Section E
E 3.2.2 Function block data: Continuous controller, standard, C_CS

The values for the limit values (L1... L4) are only accessible by the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
L1
L2
L3
L4
ME
MI
MA
MM
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Process variable; input variable X
External Set point W
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Mode - Set point External
Mode - Set point Internal
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Dim
TEXT
yes
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yi
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
XDbub
REAL
no
Lf1
BOOL
yes
E-24
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output / Output Variable
Deviation
Active Set Point
Status Manual (0) /Automatic (1)
Set Point Status Internal (0) / External (1)
TRUE, if limit 1 violated
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no
RO
RO
no Acc.
Dimension
Meas. range start for controlled variable
Meas. range end for controlled variable
Internal set point
Access internal set point
Internal output value
Access internal output value
Target set point
Control deviation for overview display
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
Hy1
REAL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Kp
REAL
yes
Kv
REAL
yes
Tn
TIME
yes
Tv
TIME
yes
Sy
INT
yes
Acc.
RW
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Py
INT
yes
RW
Pyh
Pya
Pwi
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Pxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Tsync
TIME
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Comment
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
P branch
I branch
Inverse characteristic curve
Operating point for controller in %
Proportional correction value
Derivative gain
Reset time
Rate time
Synchronization Manual to Auto
0 = Without
1 = Adjust to old set point
2 = Adjust to current set point
D-action of
0 = Controlled variable PV
1 = Control difference CE
D-action
0 = On, 1 = Positive, 2 = Negative, 3 = Off
Output operating mode Manual/Automatic
Inhibit mode manual
Inhibit mode automatic
Set point op. mode Internal/External
Inhibit mode internal
Inhibit mode external
P-action of
Synchronization time for compensating operations
E-25
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Pyh
REAL
yes
Pyl
REAL
yes
Wf
INT
yes
Acc.
Comment
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wh
Wl
Ygw
REAL
REAL
INT
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Xdz
REAL
yes
RW
Set point gradient rising

Set point gradient falling
Set point gradient active in manual
Output gradient rising
Output gradient falling
Output gradient active in manual
Output limit high in %
Output limit low in %
Set point tracking
0 = Internal set point tracks actual set point
1 = Internal set point as adjusted
Set point limit high in %
Set point limit low in %
0 = Active in manual and automatic
1 = Active in automatic
2 = Not active
Dead band of the control difference around 0 in
%
E-26
Section E
E 3.3 Continuous controller, universal, C_CU

Function
Complex continuous universal controller with the option of external variation
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external mode can be
obtained by pins (MM/MA or MI/ME) as well as DigiVis. If a logical 1 signal is
present for a certain mode, the mode switch in DigiVis is inhibited. The active
modes are available at corresponding outputs (SMA and SIE) whatever the
DigiVis or pin pre-setting. If both signals are present, the controller operates in
manual and internal mode.
The following tables show the signals at the binary outputs (state display) with
corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
di0042d.bmp
Input
MM
MA
Manual
Auto
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SMA
Man./Auto
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1...SL4 is set to
1. The current limit values can be queried at outputs L01...L04.
The other output values are the variable OUT, the deviation CE and the active set point ASP.
The controller parameters proportional correction value CP, reset time TR,
rate time TD, derivative action CD and output limits OH, OL can not only be
set as constants, but can also be altered and influenced by external sources.
In order to alter the controller state, it is possible to transmit a logical 1 signal
via input MDI and MDD to disable the integral function / differential function.
The transfer from PI to P is pre-set by an entry in the parameter mask.
Either the controller operating point follows the current I branch or the configured controller operating point is accepted.
E-27
Section E
A further entry allows smooth CP variation in the case of a configuration without an I branch.
The output variable passes through the PT1 state to the current value. In a configuration with
an I branch this function is always effective and entering Tsync has no effect.
With binary track input TRC the controller output can be forced onto the values at input OTM or
OTA, depending on whether the operating mode is manual or automatic.
Input TRC
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
Manual
0
1
1
0
1
Output OUT
Variable
Calculated variable
OTM
OTM
OTA
Manual variable
Automatic
1
1
0
1
0
Output STR
Status
0
1
1
1
0
Input DTB is available for effecting a disturbance feed-forward. The disturbance DTB may be
set to influence controlled variable , output variable or control difference with a range of influence of -100% to +100%. It is selected in the parameter mask of the controller. See also page
E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
A logical 1 signal at inputs DGS and DGO can be used to disable the set point / output gradient.
In the case of Valve characteristic rising , output OUT is the same as that of OV. In the case
of Valve characteristic rising , output OV = 100% - Y. It stays the same as with Valve characteristic rising
and can be used for display in free graphics.
Display
Set value SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) and output variable Out (Pin OV) as numeric
values and as bar chart. The set point bar encloses the process value bar, with the output to
the right.
Limit values L1 to L4 (Pin L1 to L4) as numeric values, and the corresponding marks on the
process value bar.
Output value and set point operating modes are displayed as buttons with the following inscriptions:
Output value operating mode
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Manual with tracking
Auto with tracking
E-28
Button
M
M
A
M
Display
--Tr
Tr
Section E
Set point operating mode

Internal
External
I
E
The set point can be altered in automatic and manual modes.
The output variable can only be altered in manual mode.
The set point can be switched to operating mode internal or external with the INT/EXT button
and the output variable to manual or automatic with the MAN/AUTO button.
The maximum of four limit values L1... L4 can also be altered.
E 3.3.1 Parameters: Continuous controller, universal; C_CU
di0621uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-12, , Recurring parameter entries for
Continuous Controllers, parameter mask 1/3.
E-29
Section E
di0622uk.bmp
Valve char. rising
Valve characteristic rising,

i.e. OUT = 0% valve closed, OUT = 100%
valve open, OV = OUT
Valve characteristic falling,
valve open, OV = 100% - OUT, OUT = 100% -internal variable.
CP var. peakless
In the case of a configuration without an I branch the output variable

passes through a PT1 state to the current value when the CP value is
altered.
In a configuration without an I branch the output variable takes on the
current value when the CP value is altered.
Disturbance feed-forward to:

PV
Disturbance DTB influences controlled variable,
Out
Disturbance DTB influences output variable,
CE
Disturbance DTB influences deviation.
E-30
Section E
Monit. disturbance
This parameter controls the effect of a disturbance variable on the display

of the variables PV (controlled variable) and CE (control difference) in the
group display (PV), in the overview display (CE) and at the block output
(CE). Furthermore, the effect of the disturbance variable on the limit value
monitoring of controlled variable PV and the control difference CE is also
fixed.
The following table shows the contexts, depending on the configuration of
parameter 2 Disturbance feedforward to (as described above) and of parameter 1 Monit. disturbance, which can take the values TRUE (
)
and FALSE (
)
Variable and its

representation
dependent on parameters 1 and 2
1 = TRUE
2....on PV
PV in the faceplate
PV for checking limit
value
effective PV for set

point synchronization
including disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
1 = FALSE
2... on PV
1 = TRUE
2... on CE
1 = FALSE
2... on CE
1 = TRUE/FALSE
2 .... on Y (OUT)
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
CE in overview display
CE for checking limit
value
CE at block output
variable DTB, resulting
from the equation CE =
SP - PV
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB

SP-Intern
No switching to operating mode set point internal,
SP-Extern
No switching to operating mode set point external,
Out-Man
No switching to operating mode manual,
Out-Auto
No switching to operating mode automatic.
Synchronization of PI behavior to P behavior
Operating point tracks integr. part
Operating point as adjusted.
Operating modes
Intern
Extern
Man
Auto
Initial settings where no signal is present at inputs ME/MI/MA/MM.

Controller starts in operating mode internal,
Controller starts in operating mode external,
Controller starts in operating mode manual,
Controller starts in operating mode automatic.
E-31
Section E
di0623uk.bmp
The effects of output limits OH and OL relate to output OV.
E 3.3.2 Function block data: Continuous controller, universal, C_CU

The values for the limit values (L1... L4), proportional correction value (CP), reset time (TR), rate
time (TD), derivative action (CD), output limit low (OL) and output limit high (OH) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
Inputs
EN
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Disturbance either on PV, OUT or CE
Upper Limit of Output Variable
Lower Limit of Output Variable
Track value OUT in Automatic mode
E-32
Section E
Name
OTM
L1
L2
L3
L4
CP
TR
TD
CD
MDI
MDD
DGS
DGO
ME
MI
MA
MM
TRC
Outputs
ENO
Data
type
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Track value OUT in Manual mode

Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Proportional Correction Value
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Disable Integral Function
Disable Differential Function
Disable Set Point Gradient
Disable Output Gradient
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
Tracking Output Variable OUT
BOOL
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output Variable for Visualization
Deviation
Active Set Point
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Status Track (0 without, 1 with Track)
no Acc.
RW
Dimension
OUT
REAL
no
OV
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
LO1
REAL
no
LO2
REAL
no
LO3
REAL
no
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL no
SIE
BOOL no
STR
BOOL no
SL1
BOOL no
SL2
BOOL no
SL3
BOOL no
SL4
BOOL no
ERR
BOOL no
STA
INT
no
Dim
TEXT
yes
Mba
REAL
yes
E-33
Section E
Name
Acc.
Comment
Mbe
yes
Wi
yes
Lwi
yes
Yi
yes
Lyi
yes
Ww
no
XDbub
no
Hy1
yes
Lf1
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL yes
Ia
BOOL yes
Knl
BOOL yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Py
INT
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.

Internal set point
Access internal output value
Target set point
Control difference for overview display
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Vyh
Vya
Sy
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
INT
yes
RW
Hkp
BOOL
yes
RW
E-34
Data
type
REAL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
Conf.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
P branch
I branch
Output-value operating mode
Inhibition mode manual
Inhibition mode automatic
Synchronization Manual/Auto
0 = Without
D-action cont. variable/cont. difference
D-action
Disturbance variable feedforward
1 = Output value OUT
Manual output characteristic positive
Section E
Name
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
Pwi
Data
type
INT
yes
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Spip
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Pxd
INT
yes
RW

Inhibition mode internal
Inhibition mode external
Synchronization PI P controller
0 = Operating point tracks Integral part
1 = Operating point as adjusted
P-action cont. variable/cont. difference
Proportional corr. value change peakless
Monitoring disturbance
Kpstoss
BOOL yes
Tsync
TIME
yes
DtbMonOn BOOL yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan
BOOL yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL yes
Wf
INT
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wh
Wl
Xdz
Ygw
RW
RW
RW
RW
REAL
REAL
REAL
INT
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW

Output-value gradient upwards
Output-value gradient downwards
Set point tracking
0 = SPI tracks actual set point
1 = SPI as adjusted
Dead zone of the control difference around 0 in %
2 = Not active
E-35
Section E
E 3.4 Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR

Function
Many control tasks have to maintain a constant relationship between two
variables, e.g. controlling the gas/air mixture of a gas jet. In this case, if the
gas supply is adjusted, the air feed should be changed correspondingly in
order to keep the air surplus at an acceptable level.
The ratio controller C_CR provides an opportunity to switch between
Constant and Ratio Control. In Constant mode the process value is adjusted
to the internally pre-set point . If Ratio mode is activated the set point for the
control is calculated as follows:
SPeffective = SPexternal RATeffective + BIA
SPexternal is the measurement signal at input SP.
RAT is the internally or externally pre-set ratio.
is the air/fuel ratio, lambda.
BIA is the internally or externally pre-set additive constant or bias.
The function of the variable is to pre-set a special basic ratio. If the Lambda
control parameter mask is marked with a cross, lambda weighting is carried
out. Otherwise the Special Ratio entry is ignored.
di0044.bmp

signals. The limits refer to the controlled variable, the actual ratio or the control
difference.
Switching between modes can be obtained by pins as well as DigiVis. If a
logic-1 signal is present for a certain mode, the mode switch to DigiVis is
disabled. The active modes are available at corresponding outputs regardless of the pre-setting of DigiVis or pin.
The following tables show the signals at the binary outputs with the corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
Input
MM
MA
Manual Automatic
0
1
1
1
1
0
E-36
Output
SMA
Man./Auto
1
0
0
Section E
Input
MSP
MR
Constant
Ratio
controller
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SR
Ratio/constant.
0
1
1
Input
MRE
MRI
ext. ratio int. ratio
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SRE
ext./int.
0
0
1
If none of the relevant inputs is set to logical 1, then the last operating state remains in
force.
Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1...SL4 is set to 1. The current
limit values can be queried at outputs L01...L04.
The other output values are the variable OUT, the deviation CE, the active set point ASP and
the actual ratio RV.
The current value for ratio and bias can be queried at outputs AR and AB.
The controller parameters proportional correction value CP, reset time TR, rate time TD, derivative action CD and output limits OH, OL may not only be set as constants, but may also be
altered and influenced by external sources.
In order to alter the controller state, it is possible to transmit a logical 1 signal via inputs MDI
and MDD to disable the integral function / differential function.
The transfer from PI to P is pre-set by an entry in the parameter mask. Either the controller operating point follows the current I branch or the configured controller operating point is accepted.
A further entry allows smooth CP variation in the case of a configuration without an I branch.
The output variable passes through the PT1 state to the current value. In a configuration with
an I branch this function is always effective and entering Tsync has no effect.
With binary track input TRC the controller output can be forced onto the input OTM or OTA,
depending on whether the operating mode is manual or automatic.
Input TRC
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
Manual
0
1
1
0
1
Automatic
1
1
0
1
0
Output OUT
Value
calculated output
value
OTM
OTM
OTA
Manual output value
Output STR
Status
0
1
1
1
0
E-37
Section E
set to influence controlled variable , output variable or control difference with a range of influence of -100% to +100%. It is selected in the parameter mask of the controller. See also page
E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
A logical 1 signal at inputs DGS and DGO can be used to disable the set point / output gradient.
Display
The controller display in the faceplate may be a media or ratio display. A yellow text field R in
the faceplate indicates when the variable ratio display is selected.
The set point SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) or ratio value R (Pin RV) and output
value Out (Pin OV) are displayed as numeric values and bargraphs.
The set point bar encloses the process value bar with the output variable to the right.
Ratio and bias as numeric values.
Limit values L1...L4 as numeric values and the corresponding mark on the process value bar.
The table shows the bar displays in the tag allocation.
Constant controller
Process value bargraph
Set point bargraph
Media display
PV
SPintern
Ratio display
R=(PV-BIA)/(SPext )
RAT
Media display
PV
SPext RAT +
Ratio display
R=(PV-BIA)/(SPext )
RAT
Ratio controller
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Auto with tracking
Fixed value controller
Ratio controller
Internal
External
E-38
Button
M
A
M
A
SP
R
RI
RE
Display
--Tr
Tr
Section E
In automatic and manual modes the SET POINT SP can be altered within the parameterized
limits.
The output variable Out can only be altered in manual mode.
Ratio, bias and the maximum four limits L1 to L4 may be changed if parameterized.
With the fixed value controller the set point can be switched to operating mode internal or external. With ratio controller it is possible to change to Ratio internal or Ratio external.
The display in the faceplate may be switched from ratio to media display with the
RATIO/ABSOLUTE button.
E 3.4.1 Parameters: Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR
di0627uk.bmp
Ratio SCS
Range start for the ratio display,
Ratio SCE
Range end for the ratio display.
Dim
Physical unit of ratio. Direct entry or via list box.
Ratio
Enter the factor RAT for the ratio set point. This is activated in the ratio
operating mode Internal. The value can be changed by the user.
E-39
Section E
Bias
Additive constant BIA of the ratio set point. In the case of a constant
(which has no BIA-Pin linked to it) the value can be changed by the user.
Access
Possible to change the parameters marked with a cross. Output can

only be changed in manual mode
Cannot be used
Lambda control
Ratio with lambda

Ratio without lambda
Spec. ratio
(lambda )
Lambda value in REAL format
Messages
The Type field can be used to determine whether the limit values relate to the controlled variable (L, LL, H, HH), the ratio (L_V, LL_V, H_V, HH_V), the control difference (L_XD, LL_XD,
H_XD, HH_XD) or to the dead band (LH_XD). Direct entry or via list box. See section B, General Description and Overview.
di0628uk.bmp
Valve char. rising
E-40

valve open, OV = OUT
Section E

valve open, OV = 100%-OUT, OUT = 100%-internal variable.
CP-var. peakless
In the case of a configuration without an I branch the variable passes

through a PT1 state to the current value when the CP value is altered.
In a configuration without an I branch the variable takes on the current
value when the CP value is altered.

PV
Disturbance DTB influences controlled variable
Out
Disturbance DTB influences output variable
CE
Disturbance DTB influences deviation
No switching to operating mode ratio internal
R-Intern
R-Extern
No switching to operating mode ratio external
R-On
No switching to operating mode Ratio
R-Off
No switching to operating mode Constant
Out-man
No switching of output to operating mode manual
Out-auto
No switching of output to operating mode automatic
Ratio operating mode
Initial settings where no signal is present at inputs MRE/MRI/MR/MSP
Intern
Controller starts in operating mode internal
Extern
Controller starts in operating mode external
On
Controller starts in operating mode Ratio
Off
Controller starts in operating mode Constant
Output operating mode
Initial settings where no signal is present at input MA/MM
Man
Auto
E-41
Section E
Monit. disturbance

of the variables PV (controlled variable), CE (control difference) and RV
(actual ratio) in the group display (PV, RV), in the overview display (CE)
and at the block output (CE, RV). Furthermore, the effect of the disturbance variable on the limit value monitoring of controlled variable PV,
control difference CE and actual ratio RV is also fixed.
)
and FALSE (
)
Variable and its

representation
PV in the
faceplate
PV for checking
limit value
effective PV for
set point synchronization
CE in overview
display
CE for checking
limit value
CE at block output
RV in the
faceplate
RV for checking
limit value
RV at block output
1 = TRUE
2....on PV
including disturbance variable

DTB

DTB

DTB
1 = FALSE
2... on PV
without disturbance variable

DTB
DTB
DTB
DTB

DTB
DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
DTB

DTB, resulting
from the equation CE = SP PV
DTB
DTB
DTB
DTB
1 = TRUE
2... on CE
1 = FALSE
2... on CE
1 = TRUE/FALSE
2 .... on Y (OUT)
E-42
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
Section E
di0629uk.bmp
E-43
Section E
di0797uk.bmp
Syn.R.EXTERN R.INTERN
RI tracks RE
For synchronization at transition from "ratio external" to "ratio internal",
"ratio internal" tracks "ratio external",
RI as adjusted
the set ratio internal-- is accepted.
Syn.R.ON R.OFF
SPI tracks act.
set point
SPI as adjusted
Syn.R.OFF R.ON
RI tracks act. ratio
RI as adjusted
Display
Ratio display
Absolute display
E-44
For synchronization at transition from "ratio on" to "constant", the internal set point tracks the external one,
the set ratio internal is accepted.
For synchronization at transition from "constant" to "ratio on", "ratio

internal" tracks "ratio external".
the set ratio internal is accepted.
Starts with the selected type.
Starts with ratio display,
starts with media display.
Section E
E 3.4.2 Function block data: Continuous controller, ratio, C_CR

The values for the limit values (L1... L4), ratio (RAT), bias (BIA), proportional correction value
(CP), reset time (TR), rate time (TD), derivative action (CD), output limit low (OL) and output limit
high (OH) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
no
RW
PV
SP
RAT
BIA
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
OTM
L1
L2
L3
L4
CP
TR
TD
CD
MDI
MDD
DGS
DGO
MRE
MRI
MR
MSP
MA
MM
TRC
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Ratio
Additive Control Constant (Bias)
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Mode - Ratio External
Mode - Ratio Internal
Mode - Ratio
Mode - Fixed value - Ratio off
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
OV
REAL
REAL
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
E-45
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
CE
REAL
no
RV
REAL
no
AR
REAL
no
AB
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
LO1
REAL
no
LO2
REAL
no
LO3
REAL
no
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SRE
BOOL
no
STR
BOOL
no
SR
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
SkaV
REAL
yes
SkeV
REAL
yes
DimV
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yi
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ri
REAL
yes
Lri
BOOL
yes
Lbi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Mbav
REAL
no
Mbev
REAL
no
SpV
REAL
yes
SpVact
BOOL
yes
XBub
REAL
no
XBubw
REAL
no
WBub
REAL
no
E-46
Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Comment
Deviation
Ratio value for visualization
Active Ratio
Active additive Control Constant (Bias)
Active Set Point
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Status Ratio External
Status Ratio (Ratio Controller with 1)
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO

Dimension
Scale start ratio
Scale end ratio
Dimension for ratio
Internal set point
Internal output
Access internal output
Internal ratio
Target set point
Measuring range start for ratio
Measuring range end for ratio
Specific ratio
Identifier: Lambda control active
Bargraph value for controlled variable
Numeric value for controlled variable
Bargraph value for set point
Section E
Name
XDbub
Vabub
Verr
Data type
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
Conf.
no
no
no
Acc.
RO
RO
RO
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Pve
INT
yes
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Vvi
Vve
Pvein
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vvein
Vvaus
Py
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vyh
Vya
Dxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
INT
yes
RW
Hkp
BOOL
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
Comment
Identifier: whether R-disp. selected
Identifier: whether RV has passed beyond the
permissible range
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
P branch
I branch
Ratio-op. mode Internal/External
Ratio-op. mode On/Off
0 = Ratio On, 1 = Ration Off
Inhibition mode Ratio On
Inhibition mode Ratio Off
D-action
Manual output characteristic positive
E-47
Section E
Name
Spip
Data type
INT
Conf.
yes
Acc.
RW
Pxd
INT
yes
RW
Kpstoss
BOOL
yes
Tsync
TIME
yes
DtbMonOn BOOL
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Wh
REAL
yes
Wl
REAL
yes
Xdz
REAL
yes
Ygw
INT
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Output-value gradient rising
Output-value gradient falling
2 = Not active

SyExIn
INT
yes
RW
SyOnOf
INT
yes
RW
SyOfOn
INT
yes
RW
Sy
INT
yes
RW
Vanz
INT
yes
RW
Synch. ratio external -> internal

0 = Internal ratio tracks external ratio
1 = Internal ratio as adjusted
Synch. ratio on -> off
Synch. ratio off -> on
0 = Internal ratio tracks actual ratio
0 = Without
Identifier for ratio display or absolute display
0 = Ratio display, 1 = Media display
E-48
RW
RW
RW
Comment
0 = Operating point tracks integration part
1 = Operating point as configured
P-action from control deviation or control difference
Proportional corr. value change peakless
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4 Step Controllers
The step controller is normally used with servomotors which operate valves, shutters, gates, etc.
by means of gear mechanisms. The control algorithm operates in the same way as in the
continuous controller, but the output variable is converted into two binary, mutually exclusive
output signals OP and ON. Depending on these binary signals and the time occupied by logical 1,
the motor, and so the actuator, moves in the direction of Open or Close. In order to prevent any
divergence of the calculated and the actual output variable, a position response input FB is
provided. Provided the parameters are set accordingly, the control algorithm can also operate
without the position response. The input FBF reports an external reset failure and switches to the
internal reset on logic-1.
Three step controller functional modules are provided.
The C_SS Controller is intended for standard tasks in which no special inputs are required
The C_SU Controller includes a number of additional inputs which can be used for altering
The C_SR Controller is a ratio controller. It adjusts two measured values to a set ratio. The
ratio value may be set internally or externally.
What all the controllers have in common is that an input variable PV (controlled variable X) must
variable) SP. This is achieved by calculating the control difference (CE = SP - DV) CE. This
sends to the controller an output variable OP and ON which influences the controlled member via
the actuator (servomotor) and attempts to cancel out the control difference.
The set point SP may be available internally or else be introduced as an external set point SP.
Switching between the internal set point or external set point SP occurs by means of two binary
manual is provided to allow the user to influence the correcting outputs OP and ON directly by
by-passing the control algorithm. For this purpose, the switch inputs for manual (MM) and
automatic (MA) are provided.
To achieve a better positioning of the step controller, it is possible to input the motor positioning
time of the coupled motor for both directions.
If the transmitter signal is inhibited by a dead time during external reset, this can be compensated
for.
The maximum run time in one direction can be defined with a parameter and can also be
monitored. It corresponds to the motor positioning time multiplied by a factor.
If it is overshot, the controller output is set to logic-0 and the output SRT is set to logic-1.
The controller outputs react again only when a counter pulse or manual intervention is
present.
E-49
Section E
Step Controllers
An external position feedback signal can be sent via the output FB. The input FBF can be used to
check this feedback signal. If a logic-1 signal is present, a changeover to internal reset is effected.
0.0 is output at the OV output, since an absolutely continuous output variable can exist outside
the 0...100% range.
The functional modules handle up to four limit values. These consist either of signals introduced
from external sources or of constants which can be changed.
The limit values relate to the controlled variable PV, the control difference CE or the ratio.
Apart from the output variable OP and ON, the analog values of the deviation CE and the set
point ASP are also provided as output values. The binary state output SMA / SIE can be used to
query whether the controller is operating in manual or automatic mode, and whether it is using
internal or external set points. Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1 ...
SL4 is set to 1.
STA
0
1
3
9
10
meaning
no error
floating point overflow, correction failed
reset to 0.
The control difference CE and its limit values are given as physical magnitudes.
E-50
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.1 Recurring parameter entries for step controllers

Continuous controllers are defined in three parameter masks and the ratio controller in four.
In the first three masks certain entries recur.
The entries which are applicable to all controllers are defined in the following parameter masks.
If the pin name for the block is specified when parameters are being entered, then the parameter
value can be supplied via the pin. Thus, the parameter lower set point limit should only be
entered as a constant, while the parameter lower output limit OL can be entered either as a
constant or through block input OL.
Parameter Mask 1/3
di0630uk.bmp
Range start
Of input signal PV - for controller-based scaling and display. Entered as a

REAL number.
Range end

REAL number.
Dimension
Physical unit of input signal PV, used for display. Direct entry or via list
box.
Internal
set point
Set point SP , processed when switching to internal set point
E-51
Section E
Output
increment
Access
Messages
Step Controllers
Incremental adjustment of output, applicable when manual mode is selected.

Range -100.0...100.0, with
-100.0 = end position closed (Tmax-Factor T-Motor closed),
+100.0 = end position open (Tmax-Factor T-Motor open ) and
0.0 = stop.
Possible to change the internal set point / output in manual mode
Cannot be used
Cf. see Section B, General Description and Overview.
Parameter Mask 2/3
di0631uk.bmp

P branch
P branch in control algorithm is effective
I branch
I branch in control algorithm is effective
E-52
Section E
Step Controllers
D-action
on
Effective with positive and negative change in control difference CE
positive
effective only with positive change in control difference CE
negative
effective only with negative change in control difference CE
off
D branch not effective.
D-action of

PV or control difference CE
PV
D branch based on controlled variable PV
CE
D branch based on control difference CE
P-action of
Indicates whether the P branch affects the controlled variable PV or the

control difference CE. Selection of PV causes attenuation of the output
variable OUT when command values change.
PV
P branch influences controlled variable PV
CE
P branch influences control difference CE
Derivative action gain

Indicates the factor by which the derivative action gain CD increases the
whole D branch. The effective D branch is calculated from CD D branch.
CD
CD entered as a REAL number, range 0.0 CD 20.0
Controller parameters
CP
CP 1000.0
TR
Reset time TR, entered in TIME format, range TR 0 ms
TD
Rate time TD, entered in TIME format, range TD 0 ms
Tsync
Stabilizing time for PT1 state entered in TIME format, range Tsync
0 ms.
The PT1 is effective at the time of:
- transition from manual to automatic without an active I branch
- smooth CP var. without an active I branch dependent on configuration
- transition from PI to P dependent on configuration.
Inverse char.
Operating point
External feed-back
The inverse control deviation CE is processed.

Only for configurations without I branch
Output variable entered as percentage with a deviation of CE from 0. Entered as a REAL number.
Control algorithm works with external feed-back signal
Control algorithm works with internal feed-back signal
E-53
Section E
Step Controllers
Sync. Man to Auto To avoid set point conflicts a range of synchronization options can be selected for switching operating mode from manual to automatic
without
adjust to old
set point
adjust to current
set point
Set point SP remains unchanged.

in manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value PV and in
In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value PV. In
automatic mode, set point SP is retained, being specified internally.
The diagram "Set point behavior... page E-15 in the general description
of continuous controllers, Parameter Mask 2/3, indicates the procedure.
Parameter Mask 3/3
di0632uk.bmp
E-54
Section E
Step Controllers
Gradient function (time per range)

Set point rising
Set point rising.
(start to end of span). Entered in TIME format
Set point falling
Active in Manual
Set point falling

(end to start of span). Entered in TIME format
The set point gradient is active in both Manual and Auto
The set point gradient is active only in Auto
Output rising
(0% - 100%). Entered in TIME format
Output falling
Active in Manual
Step Algorithm
Min.imp.duration
Min. pause
duration
Dead time
ext.reset.
Constants
Set point limit high
Set point limit low
The output gradient is active in both Manual and Auto

The output gradient is active only in Auto
Enter the output pulse duration to conform to the various characteristics of

the actuator gear mechanism. The smallest possible pulse duration corresponds to the task in which the controller is configured.
Entered in TIME format. The min. pulse duration should lie between 0 s
and 20 min and, if possible, should be a multiple of the task cycle time.
Minimum pause for output impulse transitions.
Entered in TIME format, and should lie between 0s and 20 min.
Absolute time for dead time compensation of the external reset of source
and track. Entered in TIME format. The dead time external reset should
lie between 0s and 20 min.
Upper / lower set point limit entered in REAL format.

special algorithm:
E-55
Section E
Output limit high

Output limit low
Dead band for CE
Actuator
T-Motor open
T-Motor close
Max. run
time factor
Monitoring On
Step Controllers
Upper / lower output limit entered in REAL format

The controlled system or after-running of the actuator may cause fluctuation around the set point SP. In order to counteract this effect, a fixed percentage can be entered as a dead band (0.0% - 25.0% symmetrically
around 0) for the control algorithm. Entered in REAL format
Motor positioning time for OPEN in TIME format. Value should lie between 1s and 120 min.
Motor positioning time for CLOSED in TIME format. Value should lie between 1s and 120 min.
Run time factor for determining the max. run time in one direction (motor
positioning time factor). Value range between 1.00...20.00.
The parameter is used for the switch on / off of the runtime monitoring of
the output OP and ON. In the case of an active runtime monitoring, the
controller switches off the outputs, when the configured duration is
passed over. In the case of passive runtime monitoring the outputs OP
and ON remain set in accordance with the controller functions.
Runtime monitoring active,
Runtime monitoring passive.

active in MAN
and AUTO
Output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in manual and
automatic modes.
active in AUTO
output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in automatic

mode only.
not active
no limitations for output limit .

The diagram "Effectiveness of the output limits", page E-18 in the general
description of continuous controllers, Parameter Mask 3/3 shows the procedure.
Whether or not the output limits are active also depends on the mode of output-variable feedback. This is defined by the configuration of the parameter External Feedback, and also depends on whether the output feedback is connected and available.
E-56
Section E
Step Controllers
The table below shows the connections. It should be noted that tracking mode applies only to
step controllers with tracking input (C_SU, C_SR).
Auto mode
External
feedback ac- without tracking
tive/inactive
taken into account as
external feedlong as the output limits
back available
in Auto are configured as
active.
(FB-pin
linked,
For OH = 100% or OL =
FBF-pin =
0% the active output
FALSE)
range is extended up or
and
down by one delta,
measured in such a way
external feedthat an actuating impulse
back configcan be output. As the
ured
FB-input is restricted to
(Parameter
0% - 100%, this apExternal feedproach ensures that the
back
)
end positions are controlled safely.
Manual mode
without tracking
Tracking mode
The output limits set are The output limits set are
with automatic mode with
long as the output limits
no tracking, whereby the
in Manual are configured
values of the active outas active.
Caution: If the output
put limits are produced
from the Manual/Auto
range is reduced, the
operating mode in which
output will follow the outtracking is being perput limits, i.e. the output
formed and from the outcan sometimes change
put limit effectiveness
the valve position even in
configured (active in
Manual mode. If the outManual/Auto).
put range is increased,
the current position is
maintained.
For OH = 100% or OL =
0% there are effectively
no active output limits,
i.e. when the output is
changed incrementally
every increment is permitted, with the result
that the commands
FULLY OPEN and
FULLY CLOSED are
also activated
external feed- The output limits set are The output limits set are The output limits set are
not taken into account.
back available
The active output range The active output range The active output range
is not restricted.
is not restricted.
is not restricted.
(FB-pin linked,
Special procedures for:
Any values can be
FBF-pin =
OH = OL = 0.0 %
tracked.
FALSE)
(means Block direction
and
OPEN, i.e. output OP =
FALSE ) and
external feedOH = OL = 100.0 %
back not con(means Block direction
figured
CLOSED, i.e. output ON
(Parameter
= FALSE)
External feedback
)
E-57
Section E
Effectiveness of external feedback

external feedback not
available
Step Controllers
Auto mode
without tracking
Manual mode
without tracking
The output limits set are The output limits set are
The active output range The active output range
is not restricted.
is not restricted.
Special procedures for:
(FB-pin not
OH = OL = 0.0 %
linked or FBF(means Block direction
pin = TRUE)
OPEN, i.e. output OP =
FALSE) and
OH = OL = 100.0 %
(means Block direction
CLOSED, i.e. output ON
= FALSE)
Set point tracking

SPI tracks actual
set point
as adjusted
Tracking mode

The active output range
is not restricted.
Only end positions can
be tracked
OTA, OTM = 0% or
100%
mode.
the internal set point is not altered.
The diagram "Set point behavior...", page E-19, in the general description
of continuous controllers, Parameter Mask 3/3 shows the procedure.
E-58
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.2 Step controller, standard, C_SS

Function
Simple continuous standard controller without the option of external variation
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes can be
obtained by means of module pins (MM/MA and MI/ME) as well as by
DigiVis. If a logic-1 signal is present for a certain mode, the mode switch in
DigiVis is disabled. The active modes are available at corresponding outputs
(SMA and SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting.
If both signals are present, the controller operates in manual and internal
mode.
The following tables show the signal state of the binary outputs (state display)
on corresponding switching of the binary inputs.
di0045.bmp
Input
Output
MM
MA
SMA
Manual Automatic Man./Auto
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
If none of the relevant inputs is set to logical 1, then the last operating state remains in force.
Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1...SL4 is set
to 1.
The other output values produced are the correcting variables OP and ON,
the internal correcting variable OV for visualization, the deviation CE and
the active set point ASP.
Display
Set point SP (Pin ASP), process value PV (Pin PV) and position feedback
FB (Pin FB), as numerical values and as bar chart.
The set point bar encloses the process value, with the position response to
the right. With feedback switched on, the position response signal appears
as a bar-type and numerical value. If feedback is interrupted, i.e. if the FBF
signal is 1, an empty field appears instead of the numerical value. The FB
column than also disappears.
E-59
Section E
Step Controllers
The current direction of movement of the output variable is displayed using arrows next to the
position response bar, and these arrows indicate the following:
OP active
ON active
Limit values L1 to L4 as numerical values and the corresponding mark on the process value
bar. Output value and set point operating modes are displayed as buttons with the following inscriptions:

Manual
Automatic
Internal
External
Button
M
A
I
E
The output variable can only be adjusted in the manual mode. If an external feedback has been
configured and is switched on, access can be gained to the mode via the OUTABS button in order to enter a default output variable of the valve position in absolute %. Without an effective
external feedback (
External feedback or output FBF on logic 1), only an incremental input of
the output variable can be made via the OUT INC button. The process of incrementing towards
OPEN and CLOSED can be carried out in time pulses, the duration of which can assume a
value of 1,3 or 10 times the Min. pulse duration. Button (<, <<, <<< or (>, >>, >>>).
The command buttons OPEN and CLOSE are final position commands which use the runtime
maximum factor of the motor positioning time to travel in the respective direction. The travel
can be interrupted with the STOP command.
and the output variable to manual or automatic with the MAN/AUTO button. The maximum of
four limit values L1...L4 can also be altered.
E-60
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.2.1 Parameters: Step controller, standard, C_SS
di0630uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-51, E-52, Recurring parameter entries for
Step controller, parameter masks.
E-61
Section E
Step Controllers
di0631d.bmp

SP-Intern
No switching to operating mode set point internal
SP-Extern
No switching to operating mode set point external
Out-Man
Out-Auto
Operating Modes
Intern

Extern
Man
Auto
E-62
Section E
Step Controllers
di0632d.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-54, Recurring parameter entries for Step
Controller, parameter mask 3/3.
E 4.2.2 Function block data: Step controller, standard, C_SS

The values for the limit values (L1... L4) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Data
type
Conf. Acc.
Comment
Inputs
EN
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
FB
FBF
L1
L2
L3
L4
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Position Feedback Signal
Failure of the External Position Feedback Signal
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
E-63
Section E
Name
ME
MI
MA
MM
Outputs
ENO
Step Controllers
Data
type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Conf. Acc.
Comment
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW

Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
Processing state
Step Output - Positive
Step Output - Negative
Deviation
Active Set Point
Status external Feedback Signal Active (1)
Status run time
OP
BOOL
no
ON
BOOL
no
OV
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
SFB
BOOL
no
SRT
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Dim
TEXT
yes
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yiibt
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Yri
REAL
no
Yabub
REAL
no
Yrbub
REAL
no
XDbub
REAL
no
YRerr
BOOL
no
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
E-64
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RW
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
Dimension
Internal set point
Incremental manual output value in commissioning
Access incremental manual output
Target set point (not accessible)
Position feedback signal
Absolute output value for DigiVis
Position feedback value for DigiVis
Identifier: position-feedback error
Message 1
Section E
Name
Step Controllers
Data
type
Conf. Acc.
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Pkp
REAL
yes
Ptn
TIME
yes
Ptv
TIME
yes
Rfe
BOOL
yes
Sy
INT
yes
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
RW
P branch
I branch
Proportional range
Reset time
Rate time
External feed-back
0 = Without
Derivative gain
D-Action
Output operating mode Manual/Automatic
RW
RW
RW

Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Kv
Da
REAL
INT
yes
yes
RW
RW
Pyh
INT
yes
RW
Vyh
Vya
Pwi
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Pxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Tsync
TIME
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Comment
E-65
Section E
Step Controllers
Name
Data
type
Ryh
TIME
Ryl
TIME
SloOutMan BOOL
Tmpos
TIME
Tmneg
TIME
Tlfac
REAL
Conf. Acc.
Comment
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
TlaufOn
Ill
Pll
Totrf
Ygw
BOOL
TIME
TIME
TIME
INT
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wf
INT
yes
RW
Wh
Wl
Ygh
Ygl
Xdz
Yrw
Yrbub
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Motor positioning time for open
Motor positioning time for close
Maximum multiple of motor positioning time as max.
runtime
Runtime monitoring active
Minimum impulse duration
Minimum pause length
Dead-time in ext. feedback
2 = Not active
Set point tracking
Effective feedback
Effective feedback for Bargraph
E-66
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.3 Step controller, universal, C_SU

Function
Complex step controller with the option of external variation of the controller parameters.
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes can be
obtained by means of module pins (MM/MA and MI/ME) as well as by
DigiVis. If a logic-1 signal is present for a certain mode, the mode switch in
DigiVis is disabled. Active modes are available at corresponding outputs
(SMA and SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting.
If both signals are present, the controller operates in manual and internal
mode.
The following tables show the signal state of the binary outputs (state display) on corresponding switching of the binary inputs.
Input
Output
MM
MA
SMA
Manual Automatic Man/Auto
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
di0046d.bmp
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
to 1.
The current limit values can be queried at outputs LO1...LO4.
The other output values produced are the correcting variable at OP and
ON, the deviation CE and the active set point ASP.
The controller parameters proportional correction value (KP) CP, reset
time (TN) TR, rate time (TV) TD, derivative action gain (KD) CD and output
limits OH, OL cannot only be set as constants, but can also be altered and
influenced by external sources.
In order to change the controller state its integral function or differential
function can be switched off by a logic-1 signal at binary inputs MDI and
MDD.
The transitional state from PI to P is set by an entry in the parameter mask.
Either the "controller operating point" tracks the current I branch or the
E-67
Section E
Step Controllers
configured "controller operating point" is accepted. A further entry allows smooth KP variation,
given a configuration without an I branch. The output passes through PT1 state to the current
value. In a configuration with an I branch this function is always effective and entering Tsync is
ineffective.
With binary track input TRC the controller output can be forced onto the value at the OTM or
OTA input, depending on whether the operating mode is manual or automatic.
Input TRC
Manual
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Automatic
Output OUT
output value
1
1
0
1
0
calculated variable
OTM
OTM
OTA
manual value
Output STR
State
0
1
1
1
0
Whether or not track mode is activated depends on the availability of the external feedback. A
distinction must be made between two possible situations:
External feedback is connected (FB-pin linked) and available (FBF = FALSE). Track mode
is active with no restrictions.
External feedback is either not connected (FB-pin not linked) and/or not available (FBF =
TRUE).
It is only possible to go to end position OPEN (OTM/OTA = 100.0) or end position closed
(OTM/OTA = 0.0). Track values between 0.0 and 100.0 lead to the binary outputs OP and ON
being assigned the value FALSE, and the valve position being kept as it is.
set to influence controlled variable (PV), output variable (OUT) or control difference (CE) with a
range of influence of -100% to +100%. The selection is made in the parameter mask of the
controller. See also page E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
A logical 1 signal at inputs DGS and DGO can be used to disable the parameterized set point /
output gradient.
In the case of a step controller, output OV is used to display the continuous output variable.
In Automatic operating mode it is possible to switch on the special functions Hold value,
Disable direction OPEN and Disable direction CLOSED.
When external feedback is configured and available, these functions can be accessed as follows:
Hold value:
OH = OL = OV or OTA = FB (in track mode)
Disable direction ON:
OH = OV
Disable direction CLOSED: OL = OV
E-68
Section E
Step Controllers
With (calculating) internal feedback (external feedback either not configured or not available)
the OV output is constantly 0.0 and the output limits have no effect.
In this case the special functions can be switched on as follows:
Hold value:
Disable direction CLOSED:
OTA = FB (in track mode)

OH = OL = 0.0
OH = OL = 100.0
No other combinations of OH, OL have any effect (see also Effectiveness of output limits in the
description of recurring parameter entries for step controllers, page E-54 )
Display
Set point SP (Pin ASP), process value PV (Pin PV) and position feedback FB (Pin FB), as numerical values and as bar chart.
The set point bar encloses the process value, with the position response to the right. With
feedback switched on, the position response signal appears as a bar-type and numerical value.
If feedback is interrupted, i.e. if the FBF signal is 1, an empty field appears instead of the numerical value. The FB column than also disappears.
OP active
ON active
Limit values L1 to L4 as numerical values and the corresponding mark on the process value
bar. Output value and set point operating modes are displayed as buttons with the following inscriptions:
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Auto with tracking
Internal
External
Button
M
A
M
A
Display in faceplate
--Tr
Tr
I
E
E-69
Section E
Step Controllers
external feedback (
can be interrupted with the STOP command.
four limit values L1...L4 can also be altered.
E 4.3.1 Parameters: Step controller, universal, C_SU
di0669uk.bmp
controller, parameter mask 1/3.
E-70
Section E
Step Controllers
di0670uk.bmp
CP var. peakless
In a configuration without the I branch the output passes through a

PT1 state to the current value when the CP value is changed.
In a configuration without the I branch the output takes on the current
value when the CP value is changed.

PV
Out
CE
E-71
Section E
Monit. disturbance
Step Controllers

fixed.
)
)
and FALSE (
Variable and its representation

PV in the faceplate
value

1 = TRUE
2....on PV
variable DTB
variable DTB
1 = FALSE
2... on PV
1 = TRUE
2... on CE
1 = FALSE
2... on CE
1 = TRUE/FALSE
2 .... on Y (OUT)
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
value
CE at block output
variable DTB, resulting from the equation
CE = SP - PV
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB

SP-Intern
no switching to operating mode set point internal
SP-Extern
no switching to operating mode set point external
Out-Man
no switching of output to operating mode manual
Out-Auto
no switching of output to operating mode automatic

E-72
Section E
Operating Modes
Step Controllers
Intern
Extern
Man
Auto
di0671uk.bmp
E-73
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.3.2 Function block data: Step controller, universal, C_SU

Name
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
FB
FBF
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
OTM
L1
L2
L3
L4
CP
TR
TD
CD
MDI
MDD
DGS
DGO
ME
MI
MA
MM
TRC
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OP
ON
OV
CE
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
Inputs
EN
E-74
Processing state
Deviation
Section E
Name
Data
Conf.
type
ASP
REAL
no
LO1
REAL
no
LO2
REAL
no
LO3
REAL
no
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
STR
BOOL
no
SFB
BOOL
no
SRT
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Dim
TEXT
yes
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yiibt
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Yabub
REAL
no
Yrbub
REAL
no
XDbub
REAL
no
YRerr
BOOL
no
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Step Controllers
Acc.
Comment
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Active Set Point

Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Status run time
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RW
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
Dimension
Internal set point
Incremental output value in commissioning
Access incremental output
Target set point
Absolute output value for DigiVis
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
E-75
Section E
Step Controllers
Name
Data
Conf.
type
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Py
INT
yes
Acc.
Comment
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Vyh
Vya
Sy
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
INT
yes
RW
Rfe
Pwi
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
RW
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Spip
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Pxd
INT
yes
RW
Kpstoss
Tsync
BOOL
TIME
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
P branch
I branch
0 = Without
D-action
External feedback
0 = Operating point tracks integral part
Smooth prop. coefficient change
Synchronization time for compensating
operations
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

DtbMonOn BOOL
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
E-76
Section E
Step Controllers
Name
Data
type
SloOutMan BOOL
Tmpos
TIME
Tmneg
TIME
Tlfac
REAL
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
TlaufOn
Ill
Pll
Totrf
Ygw
BOOL
TIME
TIME
TIME
INT
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wf
INT
yes
RW
Wh
Wl
Xdz
Yri
Yrw
Yrbub
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Motor positioning time
Motor positioning time
Maximum multiple of motor positioning time as
max. runtime
Dead-time feedback
2 = Not active
Set point tracking
Internal feedback
Effective feedback
Effective feedback for Bargraph
E-77
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.4 Step controller, ratio, C_SR

Function
The ratio step controller C_SR provides an opportunity to switch between
constant and ratio control. In constant mode the process value is adjusted
to the internally pre-set point. If ratio mode is activated the set point for the
control is calculated as follows:
SPeffective = SPexternal RAT + BIA
SPexternal being the measurement signal at the SP input
RAT the internally or externally pre-set ratio,
the air/fuel ratio, lambda, and
BIA the internally or externally pre-set additive constant or bias.
The function of the variable (special ratio) is to pre-set a special basic ratio.
If lambda control is marked in the parameter mask, lambda weighting is
carried out. Otherwise the special ratio entry is ignored.
Switching between modes can be obtained by means of module pins as well
as by DigiVis. If a logic-1 signal is present for a certain mode, the mode
switch in DigiVis is disabled. Active modes are available at corresponding
outputs whatever the DigiVis or pin setting.
di0047.bmp
The following tables show the signal state of the binary outputs (state display)
with corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
Input
MM
Manual
0
1
1
MA
Automatic
1
1
0
Input
MSP
MR
Constant
Ratio
controller
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SMA
Man./Auto
1
0
0
Output
SR
Ratio/constant.
0
1
1
Input
MRE
MRI
ext. Ratio int. Ratio
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SRE
ext./int.
0
0
1
E-78
Section E
Step Controllers
A maximum of four limit values is permitted using constants and/or external signals. The limits
refer to the controlled variable or the control difference.
Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1...SL4 is set to 1.
The current limit values can be queried at outputs LO1... O4.
The other output values produced are the correcting variable at OP and ON, the deviation CE,
the set point at ASP and the actual ratio at RV. The instantaneous Ratio and Bias values can
be queried at outputs AR and AB.
The controller parameters proportional correction value CP, reset time TR, rate time TD, derivative action gain CD and output limits OH, OL may not only be set as constants; they may
also be altered and influenced by external sources.
In order to change the controller state its integral function or differential function can be
switched off by a logic-1 signal at binary inputs MDI and MDD.
The transitional state from PI to P is set by an entry in the parameter mask. Either the controller
operating point follows the current I branch or the configured Operating point is accepted. A
further entry allows smooth CP variation, given a configuration without an I branch. The output
passes through PT1 state to the current value. In a configuration with an I branch this function
is always effective and entering Tsync is ineffective.
With binary track input TRC the control output can be forced onto the values at the input OTM
or OTA, depending on whether the operating mode is manual or automatic.
Input TRC
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
Manual
0
1
1
0
1
Automatic
1
1
0
1
0
Outputs OP / ON
Variable
calculated variable
OTM
OTM
OTA
manual variable
Output STR
State
0
1
1
1
0
Whether or not track mode is activated depends on the availability of the external feedback. A
distinction must be made between two possible situations:
External feedback is connected (FB-Pin linked) and available (FBF = FALSE). Track mode
is active with no restrictions.
External feedback is either not connected (FB-Pin not linked) and/or not available (FBF =
TRUE).
It is only possible to go to end position OPEN (OTM/OTA = 100.0) or end position closed
(OTM/OTA = 0.0). Track values between 0.0 and 100.0 lead to the binary outputs OP and
ON being assigned the value FALSE, and the valve position being kept as it is.
A logical 1 signal at inputs DGS and DGO can be used to disable the parameterized set point /
output gradient.
E-79
Section E
Step Controllers
set to influence controlled variable , output variable or control difference with a range of influence from -100% to +100%. The selection is made in the parameter mask of the controller. See
also page E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
A logical 1 at inputs DGS and DGO causes the set point / output gradient to be disabled.
In Automatic operating mode it is possible to switch on the special functions Hold value,
Disable direction OPEN and Disable direction CLOSED.
When external feedback is configured and available, these functions can be accessed as follows:
Hold value:
OH = OL = OV or OTA = FB (in track mode)

OH = OV
OL = OV
With (calculating) internal feedback (external feedback either not configured or not available)
the OV output is constantly 0.0 and the output limits have no effect.
In this case the special functions can be switched on as follows:
Hold value:
OTA = FB (in track mode)

OH = OL = 0.0
OH = OL = 100.0
No other combinations of OH, OL have any effect (see also Effectiveness of output limits in the
description of recurring parameter entries for step controllers, page E-18)
Display
The controller display in the faceplate may be a media or ratio display. A text field R in the
faceplate indicates when the variable ratio display is selected.
Set point SP (Pin ASP), process value PV (Pin PV) or ratio R (Pin RV) and effective position
feedback FB (Pin FB), as numerical values and as bar chart. The set point bar encloses the
process value, with the position response to the right.
With feedback switched on, the position response signal appears as a bar-type and numerical
value. If feedback is interrupted, i.e. if the FBF signal is 1, an empty field appears instead of the
numerical value. The FB column than also disappears.
OP active
ON active
Ratio R and Bias B are shown as numerical values.
Limit value L1...L4 as a numerical value and the corresponding mark on the process value bar.
E-80
Section E
Step Controllers
The table shows the bar displays in the tag allocation.

Constant controller
Actual bargraph
Value bargraph
Media display
PV
SPinternal
Ratio display
R=(PV-BIA)/(SPext )
RAT
Media display
PV
SPext RAT +
Ratio display
R=(PV-BIA)/(SPext )
RAT
Ratio controller
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Auto with tracking
Setpoint
Ratio
Ratio internal
Ratio external
Button
M
A
M
A
Display in faceplate
--Tr
Tr
SP
R
RI
RE
external feedback (
movements can be interrupted with the STOP command. The display can be switched from Ratio to Media with the DISPL button. It can be switched from Ratio internal to Ratio external in
external mode. The output variable can be switched to manual or automatic mode with the
M/A button. Ratio, Bias and the maximum of four limit values L1...L4 can also be altered.
E-81
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.4.1 Parameters: Step controller, ratio C_SR
di0672uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-51, Recurring Parameter Entries for Step
Controller, Parameter Mask 1/4.
Ratio SCS
Range start for the ratio display
Ratio SCE
Range end for the ratio display
Dim
Physical unit of ratio. Enter directly or via list box.
Ratio
Enter the factor RAT for the ratio set point. This is activated in the ratio
operating mode Internal
Bias
Additive constant BIA of the ratio set point

In the case of a constant (which has no BIA-Pin linked to it), the value can
be changed by the user.
Access
Possible to change the parameters marked. Output only in manual

mode
Cannot be used
Lambda control
Ratio with lambda

Ratio without lambda
Special ratio
(lambda )
E-82
Lambda value in REAL format.
Section E
Messages
Step Controllers
The Type field can be used to determine whether the limit values relate to
the controlled variable (L, LL, H, HH), the ratio (L_V, LL_V, H_V, HH_V),
the control difference (L_XD, LL_XD, H_XD, HH_XD) or to the dead band
(LH_XD). Direct entry or via list box. See also Section B, General description and Overview.
di0673uk.bmp
PV
Out
CE
Monit. disturbance

of the variables PV (controlled variable), CE (control difference) and RV
(actual ratio) in the group display (PV, RV), in the overview display (CE)
and at the block output (CE, RV). Furthermore, the effect of the disturbance variable on the limit value monitoring of controlled variable PV,
control difference CE and actual ratio RV is also fixed.
E-83
Section E
Step Controllers
The following table shows the contexts, depending on the configuration of parameter 2 Disturbance feedforward to (as described above) and of parameter 1 Monit. disturbance, which can
take the values TRUE (
) and FALSE (
)
Variable and its
representation
PV in the
faceplate
PV for checking
limit value
effective PV for
set point synchronization
1 = TRUE
2....on PV

DTB

DTB
1 = FALSE
2... on PV

DTB
1 = TRUE
without distur2... on CE
bance variable
DTB
1 = FALSE
without distur2... on CE
bance variable
DTB
1 = TRUE/FALSE without distur2 .... on Y (OUT) bance variable
DTB

DTB
DTB
DTB
DTB
CE in overview
display
CE for checking
limit value
CE at block output
DTB, resulting
from the equation
CE = SP - PV
DTB
DTB
DTB
DTB

R-Intern
no switching to operating mode ratio internal
R-Extern
no switching to operating mode Ratio external
R -On
no switching to operating mode Ratio On
R -Off
no switching to operating mode Ratio Off
Out-Man
Out-Auto

E-84
RV in the
faceplate
RV for checking
limit value
RV at block output
DTB

DTB
DTB
DTB
DTB
Section E
Step Controllers
Ratio operating mode

Initial settings where no signal is present at inputs MRE/MRI/MR/MSP
Intern
Extern
On
Controller starts in operating mode Ratio
Off
Controller starts in operating mode Constant
Output operating mode

Initial settings for output where no signal is present at input MA/MM
Man
Auto
di0674uk.bmp
E-85
Section E
Step Controllers
di0798uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see pages E-52 and E-54, Recurring parameter entries for Step Controller, parameter mask 2/3 and 3/3
Syn. R.EXTERN -> R.INTERN
RI tracks RE
For synchronization in transition from external to internal ratio, the internal ratio follows the external one
RI as adjusted
Syn. R.ON -> R.OFF
SPI tracks current
set point
SPI as adjusted
Syn. R.OFF -> R.ON
RI tracks
actual ratio
RI as adjusted
Display
Ratio display
Absolute display
E-86
internal ratio set is accepted
For synchronization in transition from "ratio" to "constant" internal set

point follows external one
internal set point is accepted
For synchronization in transition from "constant" to "ratio", internal ratio follows external one
internal ratio set is accepted
Starts with selected type of display
Starts with ratio display
starts with media display
Section E
Step Controllers
E 4.4.2 Function block data: Step controller, ratio, C_SR

The values for the limit values (L1 and L2), ratio (RAT), bias (BIA), proportional correction value
(CP), reset time (TR), rate time (TD), derivative action (CD), output limit low (OL) and output limit
high (OH) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
FB
FBF
RAT
BIA
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
OTM
L1
L2
CP
TR
TD
CD
MDI
MDD
DGS
DGO
MRE
MRI
MR
MSP
MA
MM
TRC
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Ratio
Additive Control Constant (Bias)
Disturbance either on PV, OUT
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Mode - Ratio External
Mode - Ratio Internal
Mode - Ratio
Mode - Fixed value - Ratio off
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OP
ON
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
E-87
Section E
Name
Data type
Conf.
OV
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
RV
REAL
no
AR
REAL
no
AB
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
LO1
REAL
no
LO2
REAL
no
LO3
REAL
no
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SRE
BOOL
no
STR
BOOL
no
SR
BOOL
no
SFB
BOOL
no
SRT
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
SkaV
REAL
yes
SkeV
REAL
yes
DimV
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yiibt
REAL
yes
Yabub
REAL
no
Yrbub
REAL
no
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ri
REAL
yes
Lri
BOOL
yes
Lbi
BOOL
yes
SpV
REAL
yes
SpVact
BOOL
yes
E-88
Step Controllers
Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Comment
Deviation
Ratio value for visualization
Active Ratio
Active additive Control Constant (Bias)
Active Set Point
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Status Ratio External
Status Ratio (Ratio Controller with 1)
Status run time
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RO
no Acc.
RW
RW
RO
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW

Dimension
Scale start ratio
Scale end ratio
Dimension for ratio
Internal set point
Target set point
Incremental output value in commissioning
Absolute Output-value for DigiVis
Access internal incremental output
Internal ratio
Specific ratio
Identifier: Lambda control active
Section E
Name
XBub
XBubw
WBub
XDbub
Vabub
Verr
Step Controllers
Data type
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
Conf.
no
no
no
no
no
no
YRerr
BOOL
no
Mbav
REAL
no
Mbev
REAL
no
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
PGw1
REAL
yes
PHy1
REAL
yes
Lf13
BOOL
yes
MP3
PGw2
REAL
yes
PHy2
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Pve
INT
yes
Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Vvi
Vve
Pvein
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vvein
Vvaus
Py
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vyh
Vya
Dxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Comment
Bargraph value for controlled variable
Numeric value for controlled variable
Bargraph value for set point
Identifier: ratio display selected
Identifier: whether ratio has passed beyond
permissible range
Measuring range start for ratio display
Measuring range end for ratio display
Message 1
Message 2
Limit value 3
Message 3
Limit value 4
Message 4
P branch
I branch
Ratio op. mode Internal/External
Ratio op. mode On/Off
0 = Ratio On, 1 = Ration Off
Inhibition mode Ratio On
Inhibition mode Ratio Off
E-89
Section E
Step Controllers
Name
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
INT
yes
RW
Rfe
Spip
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
RW
RW
Pxd
INT
yes
RW
Kpstoss
Tsync
BOOL
TIME
yes
yes
RW
RW
DtbMonOn BOOL
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Tmpos
TIME
yes
Tmneg
TIME
yes
Tlfac
REAL
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
TlaufOn
Ill
Pll
Totrf
Ygw
BOOL
TIME
TIME
TIME
INT
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wh
Wl
Xdz
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Yri
Yrw
REAL
REAL
no
no
RW
RW
E-90
Comment
D-Action
External feedback
0 = Op. pt follows current I-action
Proportional corr. change peakless
Synchronization time for
compensating operations
Motor positioning time for open
Motor positioning time for closed
Maximum multiple of motor positioning time as
max. runtime
Dead-time feedback
2 = Not active
Dead zone of the control difference around 0 in
%
Internal feedback
Effective feedback
Section E
Step Controllers
Name
Data type
Conf.
Yrbub
REAL
no
Sy
INT
yes
Acc.
RW
Comment
Effective feedback for DigiVis
RW
SyExIn
INT
yes
RW
SyOnOf
INT
yes
RW
SyOfOn
INT
yes
RW
Vanz
INT
yes
RW
0 = Without
Synchronization ratio External/Internal
0 = Internal ratio tracks external ratio
Synchronization ratio On/Off
0 Internal set point tracks actual set point
1 Internal set point as adjusted
Synchronization ratio Off/On
0 = Internal ratio tracks actual ratio
Identifier for ratio- or absolute display
0 = Ratio display, 1 = Media display
E-91
Section E
Two-position Controllers
E 5 Two-position Controller for Off - On

This controller type belongs to the group of non-continuous closed-loop controls.
The two-position controller is a switch and as such recognizes only the two output values On and
Off. No steady state condition develops during internal processing because the output variable is
constantly alternating between the two limits. The final control elements connected are activated
in a predetermined sequence and the mean time value corresponds to the controlled variable.
Various parameters are required to generate a pulse.
The minimum switch time defines the minimum period of time during which a level state should
be present at the final control element, and this operates independently of any controller
parameters. This instruction is used to maintain the final control element. The minimum cycle time
refers to the highest switching frequency which can be set with a 50% duty cycle, and should
always be at least 4 times the minimum switch time.
The maximum cycle time defines the cycle time for the output pulse sequence and should be set
to the highest value possible. If this value is exceeded, no further pulse switches can occur. In
order to achieve a control range from 1% to 99%, max. cycle time should be set to at least 25
times min. cycle time.
Two such two-position controller function modules are available.
The C_OS controller is designed for simple standard tasks which require no special inputs
to alter the controller's behavior.
The C_OU controller comprises a number of extra inputs allowing the controller's behavior
to be modified.
A feature shared by both controllers is that an input variable PV (controlled variable) should take
a predefined curve shape irrespective of any unavoidable disturbance variables.
The controlled variable PV should at all times be as close as possible in value to the set point
(reference variable) SP. This is achieved by producing the control difference (CE = SP - PV) CE.
This applies an output variable OB to the controller which acts on the control path via the final
control element and attempts to eliminate any control difference which may exist.
The set point SP may either be one which already exists internally or one which is introduced
from outside (external).
Switching between use of an internal or external set point SP is effected by means of two binary
inputs MI (internal set point operating mode) or ME (external set point operating mode). The
manual operating mode is provided to enable a precise change to the output of correcting
variable OB by by-passing the control algorithm. Thus there are switch inputs for manual (MM)
and automatic (MA) operating modes.
The output OV is the internally calculated output variable and can be brought up for display.
The function modules have up to four limit values. These comprise external signals or modifiable
constants.
The limit values relate to the controlled variable PV or the control difference CE. Apart from the
output variable OB, other values output for display OV are the analog control deviation values
CE, the current set point ASP and the internal controlled variable .
E-92
Section E
The SMA or SIE binary state outputs can be queried to ascertain whether the controller is
operating in manual or automatic mode and whether it is using an internal or external set point.
If an alarm limit is exceeded, the corresponding output SL1...SL4 is set to a logical 1 signal.
STA
0
1
3
9
10
meaning
no error
reset to 0.
E 5.1 Recurring parameter entries for two-position controllers

All the controllers are defined on three parameter masks.
Certain entries recur on the masks for the different controller types.
These entries which apply to all the controllers are defined in the following three masks.
If the pin name for the block is specified when parameters are being entered, then the parameter
value can be supplied via the pin. Thus, the parameter lower set point limit should only be
entered as a constant, while the parameter lower output limit OL can be entered either as a
constant or through block input OL.
E-93
Section E
Parameter Mask 1/3
di0743uk.bmp
Range start
Of input signal PV for controller-based scaling and display. Entered as a

REAL number.
Range end
Of input signal PV for controller-based scaling and display. Entered as a

REAL number.
Dimension
Physical unit of input signal PV used for display.

Internal set point
Set point , processed when switching to internal set point
Output
Internal set point , applicable when manual mode is selected
Access
Messages
E-94
Internal set point / output can be modified in manual mode

not accessible
limit values relates to the controlled variable (L, LL, H, HH), the control
difference (L_XD, LL_XD, H_XD, HH_XD) or to the dead band (LH_XD).
See Section B, General Description and Overview.
Section E
Parameter Mask 2/3
di0744uk.bmp

P branch
I branch
D-action
on
Effective with positive and negative change in control difference
positive
Effective only with positive change in control difference
negative
Effective only with negative change in control difference
off
D branch not effective
D-action of
PV
CE
P-action of

or control difference
D branch based on controlled variable
D branch based on control difference
Indicates whether the P branch affects the controlled variable or the control difference. Selection of PV causes attenuation of the output OUT
when reference values are changed.
PV
P branch affects controlled variable
CE
P branch affects control difference
E-95
Section E
Derivative action
Display of the factor by which the derivative gain CD raises the complete
D branch. The effective D branch is calculated from CD D branch.
CD
CD selected as a REAL number, range 0.0 CD 20.0.
CP
CD 1000.0.
TR
TD
Rate time TD, entered in TIME format, range TD 0 ms
Tsync
Stabilizing time for PT1 state entered in TIME format, range Tsync 0 ms
PT1 state becomes effective on:
- transition from manual to automatic with the I branch out of action
- smooth CP variation with the I branch out of action
- transition from PI to P.
Inverse char.
Operating point
The inverse control deviation CE is processed

Only for configurations with no I branch
Internal output variable entered as percentage when there is a control deviation CE of 0. Entered as a REAL number.

SP Internal
No switching to operating mode set point internal
SP External
No switching to operating mode set point external
Out-man
Out-auto
Setpoint operating mode

Intern
Extern
Man
Auto
E-96
Section E
Sync. MAN to AUTO

without
adjust to
old set point
Set point SP remains unchanged

In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value PV and in
automatic mode, it reverts to the old applicable set point SP with a
predefined ramp.
adjust to
current set point
In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value PV In
automatic mode, the set point SP is retained.
The diagram "Set point behavior of manual to automatic", page E-15 in
the general description of the continuous controller, parameter mask 2/3
indicates the procedure.
Parameter Mask 3/3
di0745uk.bmp
E-97
Section E

Set point rising
Set point rising
Enter the minimum time required for running through the
set point range (start to end of measuring range).
Entered in TIME format
Set point falling
Active in Manual
Set point falling

Enter the minimum time required for running through the
set point range (end to start of measuring range).
Entered in TIME-Format
Output rising
Enter the minimum time required for running through

the output range (0% - 100%). Entered in TIME format
Output falling
Enter the minimum time required for running through

the output range (100% - 0%). Entered in TIME format
Active in Manual
Pulse modulation
Min. switch time

Minimum switch-on/switch-off time which a final control element level may

be set to. Entered in TIME format.
Min. cycle time
> 4 times min. switch time, entered in TIME format
Max. cycle time
Maximum cycle time for the output pulse sequence, entered in TIME format.
Constants
Set point limit high /
Set point limit low
upper / lower set point limit in REAL format
special algorithm:
Output limit high /
Output limit low
Dead band for CE
E-98
upper / lower output limit in REAL format

The controlled system and the servodrive tracking can lead to a swing
around set point . To counteract this tendency, a fixed percentage (0.0% 25.0% symmetrically either side of zero) can be entered as a dead band
for the control algorithm. Entered as a REAL number.
Section E

active in Man
and Auto
The internal output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in
manual and automatic modes.
active in Auto
The internal output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in

manual mode only.
not active
Limits on the internal output variable set to 0 ... 100%

The diagram "Effectiveness of output limits", page E-18 in the general description of continuous controllers, parameter mask 3/3 shows the procedure.
controllers with a TRC input (C_OU), and is described under the corresponding module.
Auto mode
without tracking
Manual mode
without tracking


the output limits in Manual are
(active in Manual/Auto).
Set point tracking

SPI tracks actual
set point
SPI as adjusted
Tracking mode
(Manual or Auto)
the internal set point is tracked from the external set point SP in external mode
the internal set point is not altered
This procedure is illustrated in the diagram "Set point behavior of internal to external", page E-19 in the general description of continuous controllers, parameter mask 3/3.
E-99
Section E
E 5.2 Two-position controller, standard, C_OS

Function
Simple two-position controller without the option of external modification of
the controller parameters.
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes can
take place by means of pins (MM/MA and MI/ME) as well as by DigiVis. If a
logical 1 signal is present for a certain mode, mode switching in DigiVis is
disabled. Active modes are available at corresponding outputs (SMA and
SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting. If both signals are present the
controller will operate in manual or internal mode.
The following tables show the signal state of the binary outputs (state
display) with the corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
di0735.bmp
Input
Output
MM
MA
SMA
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
A maximum of four limit values is permitted using constants and/or external signals. The limits refer to the controlled variable or the control difference. Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output
SL1...SL4 is set to 1.
Other output values produced are output variable OB, the internally calculated output variable OV for display, the control deviation CE and the
active set value ASP.
Display
Set point SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) and internal output
variable Out (Pin OV) as numeric values and as a bargraph. The set
point bar encloses the process value bar, with the internal output variable
to the right.
The current state of the output variable is displayed using the text O.
This is displayed in conjunction with the activity of output OB:
gray O on white background, in case of passive output,
black O on yellow background, in case of active output, i.e. activated.
E-100
Section E
Limit values L1 to L4 as numeric values and as a corresponding mark on the process value
bar. The output and set point operating modes are displayed as radio buttons with the following
text:
Manual
Automatic
Internal
External
Button
M
A
I
E
The set point SP can be altered in automatic and manual modes.
In the manual operating mode, the continuous internal output variable can be altered and with it
the binary output OB in accordance with the configured pulse-width modulation.
The set point can be switched to internal or external operating mode with the INT/EXT button
E 5.2.1 Parameters: Two-position controller, standard, C_OS
di0736uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see pages E-51, E-52, E-54, Recurring Parameter Entries for Two-position Controller.
E-101
Section E
di0737uk.bmp
di0738.bmp
E-102
Section E
E 5.2.2 Function block data: Two-position controller, standard, C_OS

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf. Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
L1
L2
L3
L4
ME
MI
MA
MM
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OB
BOOL
no
OV
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Yi
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
XDbub
REAL
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Binary Output Variable
Deviation
Active Set Point
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RW
no Acc.
RO

Dimension
Internal set point
Internal output
E-103
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Pkp
REAL
yes
Pkv
REAL
yes
Ptn
TIME
yes
Ptv
TIME
yes
Sy
INT
yes
Acc.
RW
no Acc.
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Pyh
INT
yes
RW
Vyh
Vya
Pwi
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Pxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Tsync
TIME
yes
RW
E-104
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Comment
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
P branch
I branch
Proportional range
Derivative gain
Reset time
Rate time
0 = Without
D-action
Output op. mode Manual/Automatic
Synchronization time for compensating
operations
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Tmin
TIME
yes
T50
TIME
yes
Tcm
TIME
yes
Ygw
INT
yes
Acc.
Comment
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wf
INT
yes
RW
Wh
Wl
Ygh
Ygl
Xdz
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Minimum switch-on time
Min. cycle time
Max. cycle time
2 = Not active
Set point tracking
E-105
Section E
E 5.3 Two-position controller, universal, C_OU

Function
Complex two-position controller with the option of external modification of
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes can
take place by means of pins (MM/MA and MI/ME) as well as by DigiVis. If a
logical-1 signal is present for a certain mode, mode switching in DigiVis is
disabled. Active modes are available at corresponding outputs (SMA and
SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting. If both signals are present the
controller will operate in manual or internal mode.
Input
Output
MM
MA
SMA
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
di0739.bmp
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
A maximum of four limit values is permitted using constants and/or external signals. The limits refer to the controlled variable or the control difference.
to 1. The current limit values can be queried at outputs LO1...LO4.
Other output values produced are output variable OB, the internally calculated output variable OV for display, the control deviation CE and the active set value ASP.
lead time TD, derivative gain CD and output limits OH, OL may not only be
set as constants, but may also be altered and influenced by external
sources.
In order to alter the controller state, it is possible to transmit a logical 1 signal via the binary inputs MDI and MDD to disable the integral function/differential function.
The transition from PI to P is pre-set by an entry in the parameter mask.
E-106
Section E
Either the controller operating point follows the current I branch or the configured controller operating point is accepted. A further entry allows smooth CP variation in a configuration without
an I branch. The output then passes through PT1 state to the current value. In a configuration
with an I branch this function is always effective and entering Tsync has no effect.
Input TRC
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
Manual
0
1
1
0
1
Output OUT
Variable
calculated variable
OTM
OTM
OTA
manual variable
Automatic
1
1
0
1
0
Output STR
State
0
1
1
1
0
set to influence the controlled variable , the output variable or the control difference with a
range of influence from -100% to +100%. It is selected in the parameter mask of the controller.
See also page E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
The set point or output ramp can be switched off with a logical 1 signal on inputs DGS and
DGO.
Display
Set point SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) and internal output variable Out (Pin OV) as
numeric values and as a bargraph. The set point bar encloses the process value bar, with the
internal output variable to the right.
The current state of the output variable is displayed with the text O. This is displayed in conjunction with the activity of output OB:
gray O on white background, in case of passive output,
black O on yellow background, in case of active output, i.e. activated.
Limit values L1 to L4 as numeric values and as a corresponding mark on the process value
bar. The output and set point operating modes are shown as radio buttons with the following
labels:
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Auto with tracking
Internal
External
Button
M
A
M
A
Display
--Tr
Tr
I
E
E-107
Section E
the binary output OB in accordance with the configured pulse-width modulation.
E 5.3.1 Parameters: Two-position controller, universal, C_OU
di0740uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-94, Recurring parameter entries for Twoposition controller, parameter mask 1/3
E-108
Section E
di0741.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-95Recurring parameter entries for Twoposition controller, parameter mask 2/3
CP var. peakless
In a configuration without an I branch the output variable passes


PV
Disturbance variable DTB influences controlled variable
Out
Disturbance variable DTB influences internal output variable
CE
Disturbance variable DTB influences control deviation
E-109
Section E
Monit. disturbance
Variable and its

representation
1 = TRUE
2....on PV
1 = FALSE
2... on PV
1 = TRUE
2... on CE
1 = FALSE
2... on CE
1 = TRUE/FALSE
2 .... on Y (OUT)

fixed.
)
)
and FALSE (
PV in the faceplate
PV for checking
limit value

point synchronization CE for checking limit value
CE at block output

DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
including disturbance including disturbance varivariable DTB

able DTB, resulting from the
equation CE = SP - PV
including disturbance without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
including disturbance varivariable DTB
able DTB
without disturbance
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB

E-110
Section E
di0742.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-97, Recurring parameter entries for Twoposition controller, parameter mask 3/3
E-111
Section E
E 5.3.2 Function block data: Two-position controller, universal, C_OU

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
OTM
L1
L2
L3
L4
CP
TR
TD
CD
MDI
MDD
DGS
DGO
ME
MI
MA
MM
TRC
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OB
CE
ASP
LO1
LO2
LO3
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
E-112
Processing state
Binary Output Variable
Deviation
Active Set Point
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Section E
Name
Data type Conf.
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
STR
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yi
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
XDbub
REAL
no
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Py
INT
yes
Vyh
Vya
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Comment
Limit 4
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.

Dimension
Internal set point
Target set point
Message 1
RW
no Acc. Access limit value 2
Message 2
RW
Message 3
RW
Message 4
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
P branch
I branch
no Acc. Inhibition mode manual
no Acc. Inhibition mode automatic
E-113
Section E
Name
Sy
Data type Conf.

INT
yes
Dxd
INT
yes
Da
INT
yes
Az
INT
yes
Pwi
INT
yes
Vwi
Vwe
Spip
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
Pxd
INT
yes
Kpstoss
Tsync
BOOL
TIME
yes
yes
DtbMonOn BOOL
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Tmin
TIME
yes
T50
TIME
yes
Tcm
TIME
yes
Ygw
INT
yes
E-114
Acc.
RW
Comment
0 = Without
RW
RW
D-action
RW
RW
no Acc. Inhibition mode internal
no Acc. Inhibition mode external
RW
0 = Operating point tracks integral part
RW
RW
Smooth prop. coefficient change
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Min. cycle time
Max. cycle time
2 = Not active
Section E
Name
Wf
Data type Conf.

INT
yes
Acc.
RW
Wh
Wl
Xdz
REAL
REAL
REAL
RW
RW
RW
yes
yes
yes
Comment
Set point tracking
E-115
Section E
Three-position Controllers
E 6 Three-position Controller for Heat-Off-Cool

This type of controller belongs to the group of discontinuous action control systems.
The three-position controller converts the output variables produced by the controller algorithm
into a time impulse ratio with a pulse duty factor = switch duration / cycle time, and outputs it to
the two binary outputs OB1 and OB2.
These two timed output signals (OB1, OB2) influence an actuator which can only be in one of
three positions (e.g. heat-off-cool). These actuators are operated at a defined rhythm, and the
average time corresponds to the controlled variable .
A number of different parameters are required for generating the impulse.
The minimum switch time or indicates the minimum length of time the level needs to be present
at the actuator, regardless of the settings of the controller. This entry is intended to protect the
actuator.
The minimum cycle time relates to the highest switching frequency which can be set at 50%
regulation ratio, and should always be at least 4 times greater than the minimum switch time.
The maximum cycle time indicates the maximum allowable cycle time of the output impulse
sequence. If this entry is exceeded, no more impulse switches take place. In order to achieve an
operating range of 1% - 99%, the max. cycle time should be at least 25 times the min. cycle time.
Outputs OB1, OB2 are assigned output characteristics, which may be set in the parameters
either as rising and/or falling characteristics. Split points Out1 and Out2 are assigned to the
output characteristics in a fixed way:
Split point Out1 for Characteristic 1
Split point Out2 for Characteristic 2
End point for rising and falling characteristics

Start point for rising and falling characteristics
The position of the points in relation to each other can be set as required
(0% OUT1, OUT2 100%).
The following diagram illustrates the procedure for characteristics. The internal continuous output
is divided into two channels by a split range component and then mapped onto the two outputs
OB1 and OB2 by pulse width modulation, separately for each channel. The X axis shows the split
range input and the Y axis the associated split range output.
E-116
Section E
di0799uk.bmp
A further diagram illustrates the procedure for characteristics and split points, using two
examples.
di0695uk.bmp
E-117
Section E
In order to operate a three-position controller as a simple two-position controller, if output OB1 is

used, only the two characteristics OUT1, OUT2 need to be configured as rising, and the value
100% entered for split points OUT1, OUT2.
Two three-position controller functional modules are provided.
The C_PS Controller is intended for standard tasks in which no special inputs are required
The C_PU Controller includes a number of additional inputs which can be used for altering
What all the controllers have in common is that an input variable PV (controlled variable) must
variable) SP. This is achieved by calculating the control difference (CE = SP - PV) CE. This
sends to the controller an output variable OB1 and OB2 which influences the controlled member
via the actuator (servomotor) and attempts to cancel out the control difference.
The set point SP may be available internally or else be introduced as an external set point SP.
Switching between the internal set point or external set point SP occurs by means of two binary
manual is provided to allow the user to influence the outputs OB1 and OB2 directly by bypassing the control algorithm. For this purpose, the switch inputs for manual (MM) and
automatic (MA) are provided.
The functional modules handle up to four limit values. These consist either of signals introduced
from external sources, or of constants which can be changed.
The limit values relate to the controlled variable PV or the control difference CE. Apart from the
output variables OB1 and OB2, the analog values of the deviation CE, the set point ASP and the
internal controlled variable are also provided as output values for visualization OV. The binary
state output SMA / SIE can be used to query whether the controller is operating in manual or
automatic mode, and whether it is using internal or external set points. Where limit values are
violated, the corresponding output SL1 ... SL4 is set to 1.
STA
0
1
3
9
10
meaning
no error
reset to 0.
E-118
Section E
E 6.1 Recurring parameter entries for three-position controllers

All Controllers are defined in three parameter masks. In the masks of the various controller types,
certain entries recur. The entries which are applicable to all controllers are defined in the following
three parameter masks.
Parameter Mask 1/3
di0678uk.bmp
Range start

REAL number.
Range end

REAL number.
Dimension
Physical unit of input signal PV used for display. Direct entry or via list
box.
Internal set point
Set point , processed when switching to internal set point
Output
Internal output, applicable when manual mode is selected
Access
Possible to change the internal set point / output , outputs OB1, OB2
in manual mode.
Cannot be used
E-119
Section E
Messages
See also Section B, General description and Overview.
Parameter Mask 2/3
di0679uk.bmp

P branch
I branch
D-action
on
Effective with positive and negative change in control difference
positive
effective only with positive change in control difference
negative
effective only with negative change in control difference
off
D branch not effective
E-120
Section E
Control Difference
D-action of
or control difference
PV
D branch based on controlled variable
CE
D branch based on control difference
P branch
P-action of
Indicates whether the P branch influences the controlled variable or the

control difference.
Selection of PV causes attenuation of the output OUT when the command
variables jump.
PV
P branch influences controlled variable
CE
P branch influences control difference
Derivative action
Indicates the factor by which the derivative action CD increases the complete D branch. The effective D branch is calculated from
CD D branch.
CD
CD entered as REAL number, range 0.0 CD 20.0
CP
CD 1000.0
TR
TD
Rate time (TV) TD, entered in TIME format, range TD 0 ms
Tsync
Stabilizing time for PT1 state entered in TIME format, range Tsync
0 ms.
PT1 state takes effect at time of:
- transition from manual to automatic when I branch out of action
- smooth CP variation when I branch out of action, dependent on configuration
- transition from PI to P, dependent on configuration.
Inverse char.
Operating point
The inverse control deviation CE is processed

Only for configurations without I branch
Output variable entered as percentage when there is a deviation CE of 0.
Entered as a REAL format
E-121
Section E

SP-Intern
no switching to operating mode set point internal
SP-Extern
no switching to operating mode set point external
Out-Man
Out-Auto
Operating Modes
Intern

Extern
Man
Controller starts in operating mode set point mode manual
Auto
Controller starts in operating mode set point automatic
Output characteristic
Char. OUT1
:
:
Output characteristic OB1 rising

Output characteristic OB1 falling
:
:
Output characteristic OB2 rising

Output characteristic OB2 falling
Char. OUT2
Split point OUT1
Split point OUT2
Range limit between 0% ... 100%, entered in REAL format

Range limit between 0% ... 100%, entered in REAL format
Sync. Man to Auto

without
adjust to old
set point
adjust to current
set point
Set point SP remains unchanged

In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value PV and in
In manual mode, set point SP is adjusted to current value (CE) PV. In
automatic mode, set point SP is retained.
The diagram "Set point behavior of manual in automatic", page E-15 in
the general description of the continuous controller, parameter mask 2/3,
indicates the procedure.
E-122
Section E
Parameter Mask 3/3
di0680uk.bmp

Set point Rising
Set point rising.
(start to end of span).
Set point Falling
Active in Manual
Set point falling

(end to start of span).
Output rising
Output falling
Active in Manual

E-123
Section E
Pulse modulation
Min. switch time
Minimum switch two-position time for the signal state at the actuator. Entered in TIME format
Min. cycle time
> 4 times min. switch time, entered in TIME format
Max. cycle time
Max. cycle time for output impulse sequence, entered in TIME format
Constants
Set point limit high/
Set point limit low
upper / lower set point limit in REAL format
special algorithm:
Output limit high /
Output limit low
Dead band for CE
upper / lower output limit in REAL format

The controlled system or after-running of the actuator may cause fluctuation around the set point . In order to counteract this effect, a fixed percentage can be entered as a dead band (0.0% - 25.0% symmetrically
around 0) for the control algorithm. Entered in REAL format

active in Man
and Auto
the internal output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in
manual and automatic modes.
active in AUTO
the internal output variable is limited by output limits OH and OL in

manual mode only.
not active
no limits to internal output variable

The diagram "Effectiveness of Output Limits" in the general description of
continuous controllers, Parameter Mask 3/3 on page E-10 shows the procedure
E-124
Section E
controllers with a TRC input (C_PU), and is described under the corresponding module.
Auto mode
without tracking
Manual mode
without tracking
Tracking mode
(Manual or Auto)

the output limits in Manual
are configured as active.
(active in Manual / Auto).
Set point tracking

SPI tracks actual
set point
SPI as adjusted
mode.
the internal set point is not altered
The diagram "Set point behavior for internal to external", page E-19 in the
general description of continuous controllers, parameter mask 3/3 shows
the procedure.
E-125
Section E
E 6.2 Three-position controller, standard, C_PS

Function
Simple three-position controller without the option of external variation of
the controller parameters. An external set point SP may be introduced.
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes may
take place by means of pins (MM/MA or MI/ME) as well as by DigiVis. If
there is a logical 1 signal for a certain mode, the mode change in DigiVis is
disabled. The active modes are available at corresponding outputs (SMA
and SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting. If both signals are present, the
controller operates in manual and Internal mode.
di0075.bmp
Input
Output
MM
MA
SMA
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
A maximum of four limit values is permitted using constants and/or external signals. The limits refer to the controlled variable or the control difference. Where limit values are violated, the corresponding output SL1...SL4
is set to 1. Other output variables produced are 0B1 and 0B2, the internal
output variable OV for visualization, the deviation CE and the active set
point ASP.
Display
Set point SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) and internal output
variable Out (Pin OV) as numeric values and as a bargraph. The set point
bar encloses the process value bar, with the internal output variable to the
right.
The current state of the output variables (Pin OB1, OB2) are displayed
using the text O1 and O2. These displays are shown or passively illustrated in relation to the activity of the corresponding output (OB1 = O1,
OB2 = O2):
OB1 resp. OB2 active => black O1 (O2) on yellow background,
OB1 resp. OB2 passive => gray O1 (O2) on white background.
The parameterized split points are displayed as arrows ( 1, 2) between
the bargraphs. The displayed volume corresponds approximately to the
E-126
Section E
O1, O2 values and give information on the relationship and pitch of the characteristic line. Limit
values L1 to L4 as numeric values and the corresponding mark on the process value bar. Output value and set point operating modes are displayed as buttons with the following inscriptions:
Manual
Automatic
Internal
External
Button
M
A
I
E
the control of the binary outputs OB1 and OB2 in accordance with the configured split-range
characteristic and the pulse-width modulation.
The set point can be switched to operating mode internal or external with the INT/EXT button,
four limit values L1 to L4 can also be altered.
E-127
Section E
E 6.2.1 Parameters: Three position controller, standard, C_PS
di0678uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see pages E-119, E-120 and E-123, Recurring parameter entries for Three-position Controller, parameter masks.
E-128
Section E
di0679uk.bmp
di0680uk.bmp
E-129
Section E
E 6.2.2 Function block data: Three-position controller, standard, C_PS

Name
Inputs
EN
PV
SP
L1
L2
L3
L4
ME
MI
MA
MM
Outputs
ENO
Data
type
Conf.
BOOL
yes
RW
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
OB1
BOOL
no
OB2
BOOL
no
OV
REAL
no
CE
REAL
no
ASP
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
Yi
REAL
yes
E-130
Comment
Enable
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output 1
Output 2
Deviation
Active Set Point
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RW

Dimension
Internal set point
Section E
Name
Data
type
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
Conf.
Comment
Lyi
yes
XDbub
no
GyOb
no
GyIb
no
Hy1
yes
Lf1
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
Pkp
REAL
yes
Pkv
REAL
yes
Ptn
TIME
yes
Ptv
TIME
yes
Sy
INT
yes
no Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
SplI
GyO
REAL
REAL
INT
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
GyI
INT
yes
RW
Pyh
INT
yes
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Rise in char. curve 1 for DigiVis
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
P branch
I branch
Proportional range
Derivative gain
Reset time
Rate time
0 = Without
D-action
0 = On, 1 = Positive, 2 = Negative, 3 = - Off
Split point 1
Split point 2
Rise in characteristic curve 1
0 = Rising, 1 = Falling
Rise in characteristic curve 2
Output operating mode Manual / Automatic
E-131
Section E
Name
Vyh
Vya
Pwi
Data
type
BOOL
BOOL
INT
Conf.
Comment
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Pxd
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Tsync
TIME
yes
RW

Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
SloOutMan BOOL
yes
Tmin
TIME
yes
T50
TIME
yes
Tcm
TIME
yes
Ygw
INT
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Wf
INT
yes
RW
Wh
Wl
Ygh
Ygl
Xdz
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
E-132

Min. cycle time
Max. cycle time
2 = Not active
Set point tracking
Dead zone of the control difference around 0 in
%
Section E
E 6.3 Three-position controller, universal, C_PU

Function
Complex three-position controller with the option of external variation of
Switching between manual/automatic and internal/external modes may
take place by means of pins (MM/MA or MI/ME) as well as by DigiVis. If
there is a logical 1 signal for a certain mode, the mode change in DigiVis is
disabled. The active modes are available at corresponding outputs (SMA
and SIE) whatever the DigiVis or pin setting. If both signals are present, the
controller operates in manual and internal mode.
The following tables show the signal state of the binary outputs (state display) with the corresponding connection of the binary inputs.
Input
MM
MA
Manual Automatic
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SMA
Man./Auto
1
0
0
Input
MI
ME
internal
external
0
1
1
1
1
0
Output
SIE
int./ext.
1
0
0
di0074.bmp
to 1. The current limit values can be queried at outputs LO1...LO4.
Other output variables produced are the variable at 0B1 and 0B2, the internal output variable for visualization at OV, the deviation CE and the active set point ASP.
rate time TD, derivative action CD and output limits OH, OL can not only
be set as constants, but can also be altered and influenced by external
sources.
In order to alter the controller state, it is possible to transmit a logical-1 signal via input MDI and MDD to disable the integral function / differential
function.
The transition from PI to P is pre-set by means of an entry in the parameter
mask. Either the controller operating point tracks the current I branch or the
E-133
Section E
configured controller operating point is accepted. Another entry allows smooth CP variation in a
configuration without an I branch. The output variable passes via the PT1 state to the current
value. In a configuration with an I branch this function is always effective and entering Tsync
has no effect.
Input TRC
Tracking
0
1
1
1
0
Manual
0
1
1
0
1
Automatic
1
1
0
1
0
Output OUT
Value
Calculated output
OTM
OTM
OTA
Manual output
Output STR
State
0
1
1
1
0
set to influence controlled variable , output variable or control difference with a range of influence of -100% to +100%. The selection is made in the parameter mask of the controller. See
also page E-6, Functional Diagram for Controllers.
A logical-1 signal at inputs DGS and DGO can be used to disable the parameterized set point /
output gradients.
Display
Name, short text, "scale range" and physical unit.
Set point SP (Pin SP), process value PV (Pin PV) and internal output variable Out (Pin OV) as
numeric values and as a bargraph. The set point bar encloses the process value bar, with the
internal output variable to the right.
The current state of the output variables (Pin OB1, OB2) are displayed using the text O1 or O2.
These displays are shown or passively illustrated in relation to the activity of the corresponding
output (OB1 = O1, OB2 = O2):
OB1 resp. OB2 active => black O1 (O2) on yellow background,
OB1 resp. OB2 passive => gray O1 (O2) on white background.
The parameterized split points are displayed as arrows ( 1, 2) in the output value bargraphs.
The displayed volume corresponds approximately to the O1, O2 values and give information on
the relationship and pitch of the characteristic line.
Limit values L1 to L4 as numeric values and the corresponding mark on the process value bar.
Manual, no tracking
Auto, no tracking
Auto with tracking
E-134
Button
M
A
M
A
Display
--Tr
Tr
Section E

Internal
External
I
E
the control of the binary outputs OB1 and OB2 in accordance with the configured split-range
characteristic and the pulse-width modulation.
four limit values L1 to L4 can also be altered.
E 6.3.1 Parameters: Three-position controller, universal, C_PU
di0675uk.bmp
For a description of parameter entries, see page E-119, Recurring parameter entries for
Three-position Controller, parameter mask 1/3.
E-135
Section E
di0676uk.bmp
Three-position Controller, parameter mask 2/3
CP var. peakless
In a configuration without an I branch the output variable passes


PV
Disturbance DTB influences controlled variable PV
OUT
Disturbance DTB influences internal output variable OUT
CE
Disturbance DTB influences deviation CE
E-136
Section E
Monit. disturbance

fixed.
)
)
and FALSE (
Variable and its

representation
1 = TRUE
2....on PV
PV in the faceplate
value
1 = FALSE
2... on PV
1 = TRUE
2... on CE
1 = FALSE
2... on CE
1 = TRUE/FALSE
2 .... on Y (OUT)
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB

including disturbance including disturbance

variable DTB
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
value
CE at block output
variable DTB, resulting
from the equation CE =
SP - PV
without disturbance
variable DTB
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB
without disturbance
variable DTB

E-137
Section E
di0677uk.bmp
Three-position Controller, parameter mask 3/3
E-138
Section E
E 6.3.2 Function block data: Three-position controller, universal, C_PU

time (TD), derivative action (CD), output limit low (OL) and output limit high (OH) are only accessible by via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
PV
SP
DTB
OH
OL
OTA
OTM
L1
L2
L3
L4
CP
TR
TD
CD
MA
MDD
MDI
ME
MI
MM
DGO
DGS
TRC
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Disturbance either on PV, OUT
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
Reset Time TN
Rate Time TV
Derivative Gain KV
Mode - Automatic
Mode - Manual
BOOL
no
RO
OB1
OB2
OV
CE
ASP
LO1
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Inputs
EN
Processing state
Output 1
Output 2
Deviation
Active Set Point
Limit 1
E-139
Section E
Name
Data
Conf.
type
LO2
REAL
no
LO3
REAL
no
LO4
REAL
no
SMA
BOOL
no
SIE
BOOL
no
STR
BOOL
no
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Wi
REAL
yes
Lwi
BOOL
yes
Yi
REAL
yes
Lyi
BOOL
yes
Ww
REAL
no
GyOb
BOOL
no
GyIb
BOOL
no
XDbub
REAL
no
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
Pa
BOOL
yes
Ia
BOOL
yes
Knl
BOOL
yes
Ap
REAL
yes
E-140
Acc.
Comment
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
no Acc.

Dimension
Internal set point
Target set point
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
P branch
I branch
Section E
Name
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
Py
Data
type
INT
yes
RW
Vyh
Vya
Sy
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Dxd
INT
yes
RW
Da
INT
yes
RW
Az
INT
yes
RW
SplO
SplI
GyO
REAL
REAL
INT
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
GyI
INT
yes
RW
Pwi
INT
yes
RW
Vwi
Vwe
Spip
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Pxd
INT
yes
RW
Kpstoss
Tsync
BOOL
TIME
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW

0 = Without
D-action
Split point 1
Split point 2
Rise in output characteristic curve 1
Rise in output characteristic curve 2
0 = Op. pt follows current I-action
Proportional correction change peakless
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

DtbMonOn BOOL
yes
Rwh
TIME
yes
Rwl
TIME
yes
SloSpMan BOOL
yes
Ryh
TIME
yes
Ryl
TIME
yes
E-141
Section E
Name
Data
type
SloOutMan BOOL
Tmin
TIME
T50
TIME
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Tcm
Ygw
TIME
INT
yes
yes
RW
RW
Wf
INT
yes
RW
Wh
Wl
Xdz
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW

Cycle time with max. switching
frequency
Max. cycle time
2 = Not active
Set point tracking
E-142
Section E
Controller selftune
E 7 Controller selftune, TUNE

E 7.1 Selftune process
The controller selftune block TUNE is used to determine the parameters of a PID controller
during start-up for linear, time-invariant controlled members. To this end, a step to the controlled system is applied in the open control loop, and the parameters for a PID controller are
determined from characteristic values in the step response.
The calculated parameters are suitable for a continuous controller. If a step controller is required, it must be ensured that the motor positioning time is sufficiently short compared to the
system time constant. External feedback of the output variable is therefore required. A two or
three-position controller may be used if the cycle time is short enough to allow quasicontinuous behavior, i.e. the cycle time is at least 15 times shorter than the dominant system
time constant.
The TUNE function block is designed for use with the following controller blocks: C_CU, C_CR,
C_SU, C_SR, C_OU, C_PU.
The selftune method is suitable for most of the single-variable controllers (SISO) used in process engineering. In addition to nth order time-delay (resonant and non-resonant) and integralaction systems, TUNE can also be used to start a number of nth order time-delay systems connected in parallel (even those with all-pass behavior).
The controlled member must be at rest before the step response test, with no disturbance affecting the process during the test step.
Many controlled systems and actuators exhibit non-linearity, so the test should be applied at a
typical operating point.
The current noise level is determined before the step response test, and the measurement is
taken over 160 190 task cycles.
While the step response is being recorded, the process value is monitored for the point at
which it reaches certain configurable limit values. The test step is canceled if there is any risk
that these limit values will be exceeded, or when the maximum test pulse duration is reached. If
no integral-action system is present, a second, suitably adapted test step is activated once a
stationary state is reached. The process limit values, and maximum test pulse duration are not
monitored during the second test step.
For the parameter evaluation to be successful, the final stationary value must differ from the
initial value by at least five times the noise level.
Special features of integral-action controlled members
After the first test step has been canceled, the controller parameters are calculated when the
stationary state is reached, and the second test step is not activated. For integral-action systems with time-delay (e.g. IT1), in particular, it is not possible to guarantee that the configured
limits will be maintained, so it is sensible to select limit values that are far enough away from
critical values. A suitable value should be selected for the maximum test pulse duration in the
event that the configured limits are not reached.
A higher, short pulse generally gives better results than a low, long pulse. It is not necessary for
the pulse to last until the process value rises with a linear curve. The process must simply
move far enough out of the noise level band.
E-143
Section E
Controller selftune
E 7.2 Controller selftune block, TUNE
be003.bmp
Function
The function block is supplied with the same process value as the controller via input PV (X). The value present at PIV (Y) represents the output
variable actually acting upon the process. Output STR is linked to input
TRC of the associated controller in order to apply the control step to the
process. The output variable is present at output OUT, which is linked to
the controllers OTA and OTM inputs. The currently selected controller
parameters are present at outputs CP, TR, TD and CD.
If scheduling is to be related to an external variable, this variable is sent
to input SCD. Scheduling can be activated by a signal at input GS1 and
deactivated by a signal at input GS0. Scheduling will be deactivated if
there is a logical 1 signal at both inputs.
Input UP is used to select a user-defined parameter set. Input TP selects
the parameter set determined by selftuning. If both inputs are set, then
input UP has priority.
If the logical 1 signal is present at input TRC, output TRC is set, which will
switch the value at OT to OUT. This will stop the step response test if it is
running.
Outputs LH and LL are set if the upper or lower limit is violated during the
step response test.
The state of the selftune process is available at output STS. The significance of the individual states is shown in the table below.
STS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Display
OFF
Description
Selftune Off, no controller parameters have yet
been determined
NOISE
Noise level measurement
The noise level is determined over the course of
160 190 task cycles
STEP1_S Wait for movement after first test step
STEP1_M Wait for stationarity after first test step
BREAK
Stop test step, wait for stationarity
STEP2_S Wait for movement after second test step
STEP2_M Wait for stationarity after second test step
CANCEL Selftune canceled due to error. The cause of the
error is indicated by the error code
READY
Selftune complete, controller parameters have
been determined
Output ERR is set to logical 1 if an error occurs. The error code is displayed at output STA. If several errors occur during a cycle, only the most
recent error will be displayed. A description of the errors is given in the
table on page E-150.
E-144
Section E
Controller selftune
Scheduling enables the controller parameters to be modified in relation to controlled variable

PV, output variable OUT, or an external value. Up to seven operating points may be specified
for the controller parameters, with linear interpolation between these points. If the scheduling
values are outside the configured operating points, the parameters for the first or last operating
point will be used.
The TUNE block may only be used in cyclic tasks with equidistant mode, and it should
be located in the same task as the associated controller. The task cycle time must be
less than 1/15th of the system time constant.
Once selftuning has ended, the calculated controller parameters must be uploaded so that they
are stored in the project, and will not be lost if a cold start is required. The essential parameters
are marked for uploading, but it is more sensible to save all the modified parameters so that the
changed settings are stored permanently.
Display
Current process value (PV) and current process variable (OUT) in the form of numerical values,
and as a bar chart.
Current test step duration, proportional coefficient CP, reset value TR, rate time TD and derivative action gain CD in the form of numerical values. The current selftuning state, and any errors
that may have occurred, are displayed as text.
The upper and lower limits LL and LH are represented by marks on the process value column.
The PID parameter set is represented as a button with the following label:
Selftune
TP
User
UP
Parameter selftune active is represented as a button with the following label:
Stop
S
Run
R
Scheduling is represented as a button with the following label:
Off (no operating points) Off
On (with operating points) On
Operator input
Start and stop parameter selftune (stop/run).
Toggle PID parameter set between selftune and user-defined parameters.
Set controller dynamics.
Set stationarity.
Toggle scheduling.
Acknowledge messages
E-145
Section E
Controller selftune
E 7.2.1 Behavior during a warm start

Selftuning will be resumed after a warm start provided that no significant change was identified
in the process value, and the down time was sufficiently short in relation to the previously
elapsed test time. If the down time is longer than 15 minutes, selftuning will stop. Scheduling is
always resumed after a warm start.
E 7.2.2 Parameters: Controller selftune, TUNE
be004us.bmp
Range start
For input PV, and the minimum and maximum process values for internal
controller-based scaling, and display. Entered as a REAL number.
Range end
For input PV, and the minimum and maximum process values for internal
controller-based scaling, and display. Entered as a REAL number.
Dimension
Physical unit for input PV, used for display purposes. Entered directly or
selected from drop-down list.
Min. process value
Lower limit for monitoring process variables during selftuning. Entered as

a REAL number.
Max. process value Upper limit for monitoring process variables during selftuning. Entered as
a REAL number.
Test step
E-146
Magnitude of the test step, expressed as a percentage.

Permissible range from -100.0% to 100.0%. (0.0% is not permitted). Entered as a REAL number.
Section E
Max.
test step duration
Controller selftune
Maximum duration of the test step. Entered in TIME format.
Behavior after finished selftune

This setting has no effect for integral-action systems.
Keep output
The output variable is kept at the current value when selftuning has
finished.
Reset output
The output variable is reset to the initial value when selftuning has
finished.
Behavior after canceled test step

This setting has no effect for integral-action systems.
Second test step
Paramete
evaluation
A second test step is always started.

The controller parameters are calculated if sufficient data is recorded,
otherwise a second test step is activated.
be005us.bmp
Stat.:
Selftune status. The texts are listed in the table on page E-144. This value
is only displayed in start-up mode.
E-147
Section E
Controller selftune
Error:
Selftune error code. The texts are listed in the table on page E-150. This
value is only displayed in start-up mode.
PV:
Current process value. This value is only displayed in start-up mode.
PIV:
Current process variable. This value is only displayed in start-up mode.
Time:
Current test step duration. This value is only displayed in start-up mode.
PID parameters
Selftune
The parameter set determined by selftuning is displayed at the outputs.
User
The user-configured parameter set is displayed at the outputs.
Access
The selected PID parameters can be switched over.

The selected PID parameters cannot be changed.
Selftune
CP, TR, TD, CD
PI
PID
The controller parameters for the selected dynamic level determined by

selftuning. The values are only displayed in start-up mode.
Parameter evaluation settings
Determines the parameters for a PI controller.
Determines the parameters for a PID controller.
Controller dynamics Selects the controller dynamics, although this value can be changed
after selftuning. The calculated controller parameters can only be displayed in start-up mode.
low
Most controlled members approach the set point asymptotically during

a step. The recovery time is relatively long.
medium
There is usually a slight overshoot during the step to set point, although the recovery time is short.
high
The controlled variable quickly reaches set point, but the overshoot is
quite large. Suitable for recovery after a fault.
Access
The dynamic level can be selected.

The dynamic level is fixed.
User
User-defined controller parameters
CP
Proportional coefficient CP. Entered as a REAL number. Permissible

range 0.0 1000.0
TR
Reset time TR. Entered in TIME format. Permissible range >= 0 ms.
TD
Rate time TR. Entered in TIME format. Permissible range >= 0 ms.
CD
Derivative action gain CP. Entered as a REAL number. Permissible range

0.0 20.0
E-148
Section E
Selftune
Controller selftune
When selftuning is complete, the state automatically switches to "Off". If

selftuning is stopped due to an error, it remains in the "On" state. It must
be switched off and on again before it can restart.
Off
Selftune is switched off. Any errors are reset.
On
Selftune is switched on
Access
Selftune can be switched on and off.

Selftune cannot be toggled.
Stationarity
Stationary
Stationarity is reliably detected for all relevant process classes, so the integral stationarity detection places relatively high requirements on the
process value before it will be regarded as stationary. This value allows
operator intervention in the current stationarity detection process in order
to save time. The value is evaluated if the selftune block waits for stationarity after the first and second steps, or after a step break. It is reset once
more during every cycle. The value can only be modified in start-up
mode.
If this value is set too early, the controller parameters thus determined may be unsuitable because the system characteristics are
incorrect.
Access
The stationarity of the process variable can be modified.
be006us.bmp
E-149
Section E
Type
Controller selftune
The following table lists the possible messages, together with the values
for the message page, output STA and the display.
Description
Lower limit
Violation of lower limit for process value
Upper limit
Violation of upper limit for process value
Time overflow
An internal time value has
reached the maximum for the
TIME data type. Controlled
members whose step response
requires longer than
T#24d20h31m23s647ms to
reach stationarity cannot be
started with TUNE.
Noise level
The measured noise level is too
high, and should be reduced
with a filter.
Too much movement
The controlled member was not
stationary before the test
started. Selftune can be restarted once the controlled
member is stationary.
Not enough movement
The system does not respond
enough after the test step to
determine the system characteristics. Either reduce the noise
or increase the test step before
restarting the test step.
Output limited
Break for warm start
The requirements for continuing
selftuning were not fulfilled after
a warm start. Wait for stationarity before restarting the
selftune.
OK
There is no error
Prio.
E-150
Message
L
STA Faceplate Break
TIME_OV
TIME_OV
Yes
NOISE
NOISE
Yes
STAT
STAT
Yes
MOVE
MOVE
Yes
Y_LIMIT
5
6
LIMIT_Y
WSTART
Yes
OK
Priority of the message for disturbance variables (15). No message is

output if this is set to "-".
Section E
Controller selftune
Hint
Enter the hint text.
Message text
Output text for disturbance variables. Entered directly or selected from

drop-down list.
be007us.bmp
Scheduling value
PV
OUT
External
Scheduling
Off
On
Access
Operating points
Number
Varies the controller parameters in relation to the process value.

Varies the controller parameters in relation to the output value.
Varies the controller parameters in relation to the value present at input SCD.
Sets the scheduling mode.
Scheduling is switched off.
Scheduling is active.
Scheduling can be switched on and off.
Cannot be changed.
Number of active operating points. Entered as an INTEGER number.

Permissible values: 0, 2-7
CP
The parameter CP is varied in relation to the scheduling values.

The parameter selected in parameter definition mask 2. The current
value is displayed in the Default line.
TR
The parameter TR is varied in relation to the scheduling values.

E-151
Section E
Controller selftune
TD
The parameter TD is varied in relation to the scheduling values.

CD
The parameter CD is varied in relation to the scheduling values.

Op. point column
Value of the operating point at which the controller parameters listed below are active. The values between the operating points are determined
by linear interpolation. If the scheduling values are outside the configured
range, the parameters for the first or last operating point will be used. The
operating points must be entered in ascending order. The following rules
apply if the same value is set for two successive operating points:
Scheduling value <= operating point
Use the parameters for the
first operating point for interpolation
Scheduling value > operating point
Use the parameters for the
second operating point for interpolation
Entered as a REAL number.
Range of values for scheduling values:
PV:
OUT:
External:
Columns
CP, TR, TD, CD
E-152
Range start Range end.

0.0 ... 100.0.
REAL range
The rules described for controller parameters in parameter definition

mask 2 also apply when entering controller parameters for individual operating points.
Section E
Controller selftune
E 7.2.3 Specimen configuration with a controller

The following diagram shows a configuration with the controller selftune block TUNE linked to a
continuous universal controller C-CU.
be008.bmp
E 7.2.4 Function block data: Controller selftune, TUNE

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Access
Comment
BOOL
Yes
RW
PV
PIV
TRC
OT
SCV
GS0
GS1
UP
TP
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
TRUE: The function block is executed
Output variable returned by controller
Tracking of output variable Y
Output track
Parameter value
Scheduling OFF
Scheduling ON
User-defined parameters
Selftune parameters
BOOL
No
RO
OUT
CP
TR
REAL
REAL
TIME
No
No
No
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
TRUE: The function block is executed
Output
Proportional coefficient
Reset value
E-153
Section E
Controller selftune
Name
Data type Conf.
TD
TIME
No
CD
REAL
No
LH
BOOL
No
LL
BOOL
No
STS
INT
No
STR
BOOL
No
ERR
BOOL
No
STA
INT
No
Mba
REAL
Yes
Mbe
REAL
Yes
Dim
TEXT
Yes
MinXw
REAL
Yes
MaxXw
REAL
Yes
PtestY
REAL
Yes
ImpMax
TIME
Yes
ImpReset
INT
Yes
Access
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Comment
Rate time
Derivative action gain
Upper limit exceeded
Lower limit exceeded
Selftune status
Track status
TRUE if error in block
Status of block error code
RW
RW
None
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Entwurf
RW
Range start
Range end
Dimension
Minimum process value
Maximum process value
Magnitude of test step
Maximum test pulse duration
Behavior after finished selftune
0 = Keep output, 1 = Reset output
Behavior after canceled test step
0 = Second test step, 1 = Parameter evaluation
INT
Yes

PX
REAL
No
PY
REAL
No
PZeit
TIME
No
Psatz
INT
Yes
RO
RO
RO
RW
LPSatz
PKp
PTn
PTv
PKv
PPI
BOOL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
INT
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
None
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
PDynamik
INT
Yes
RW
LDynamik
KpBak
TnBak
TvBak
KvBak
PEin
BOOL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
INT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
E-154
Process value (X) during start-up

Output value (Y) during start-up
Current test step duration
PID parameter set
0 = Selftune, 1 = User
Access PID parameters
CP (selftune)
TR (selftune)
TD (selftune)
CD (selftune)
Parameter evaluation setting
0 = PI, 1 = PID
Controller dynamics
0 = low, 1 = medium, 2 = high
Access controller dynamics
CP (user)
TR (user)
TD (user)
CD (user)
Selftune
0 = Stop, 1 = Run
Section E
Controller selftune
Name
Data type Conf.
LStart
BOOL
Yes
BtnStat
BOOL
No
LBtnStat
BOOL
Yes
ZustTxt
STRING8 No
ErrTxt
STRING8 No
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
ScdVar
INT
Yes
Access
None
RW
None
RO
RO
PscdEin
INT
Yes
RW
LScdEin
ScdAnz
VKp
VTn
VTv
VKv
ScdWert1 .. 7
ScdKp1 .. 7
ScdTn1 .. 7
ScdTv1 .. 7
ScdKv1 .. 7
BOOL
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
TIME
TIME
REAL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Comment
Access selftune
Stationarity
Access stationarity
Status text for display
Error text for display
Message 1 (lower limit)
Message 2 (upper limit)
Message 3 (noise level)
Message 4 (too much movement)
Message 5 (not enough movement)
Message 6 (Y limit)
Message 7 (time overflow)
RW
Scheduling value
0 = PI, 1 = OUT, 2 = External
Scheduling
0 = Off, 1 = On
Access scheduling mode
Number of operating points
CP operating points active
TR operating points active
TD operating points active
CD operating points active
Value of operating point 1 .. 7
CP for operating point 1 .. 7
TR for operating point 1 .. 7
TD for operating point 1 .. 7
CD for operating point 1 .. 7
E-155
Acquisition Blocks
Section F
Acquisition
Contents
F 1
Overview Acquisition Blocks .............................................................................. F-5
F 2
Acquisition Blocks - General Description .......................................................... F-5
F 3
F 3.1
F 3.2
Disturbance Course Log Acquisition, DISLOG.................................................. F-6

Parameters: Disturbance course log acquisition DISLOG .................................. F-7
Function block data: Disturbance course log acquisition DISLOG ..................... F-8
F 4
F 4.1
F 4.2
Trend Acquisition, TREND................................................................................... F-9

Parameters: Trend acquisition TREND............................................................. F-12
Function block data: Trend acquisition TREND ................................................ F-12
F-3
Section F
Acquisition
F 1 Overview Acquisition Blocks

Designation
DISLOG
TREND
Disturbance course log acquisition

Trend acquisition
F 2 Acquisition Blocks - General Description

Freelance 2000 acquisition blocks permit rapid, direct recording of process data for archiving in
a DigiVis PC.
A special communication mechanism is used for reliable transfer of the recorded data to the
DigiVis PC. A corresponding archiving function block must be available on the DigiVis PC. That
function block is always allocated to a display and there is always a one to one relationship
between the acquisition function block and archiving function block. That means that in a system with several DigiVis PCs, an acquisition function block can supply data for archiving to
only one display on only one DigiVis PC.
The acquisition block inputs (IN1 to IN6) recognize the different data types automatically. All
data types to a maximum of 4 bytes in length are supported (without data type TIME).
Because their functionality can only be fulfilled in conjunction with DigiVis, acquisition blocks
should not be used in systems without a PC running DigiVis.
F-5
Section F
Acquisition
F 3 Disturbance Course Log Acquisition, DISLOG

Function
The disturbance course log acquisition block cyclically records its six input
signals (IN1 to IN6) in a ring buffer with a maximum capacity of 200 values
per signal. This block can process up to six signals.
A maximum of four disturbance logs can be set up in an operator station.
Signals of all data types (4 bytes or less) can be connected directly as inputs: BOOL, BYTE, INT, DINT, UINT, UDINT, REAL, DWORD, WORD.
di0068.bmp
The configurable signal section applies to all signal inputs. A positive transition of the TRG input controls the transfer of values (as specified in the
signal section) to DigiVis for further processing, where they are saved in a
file. They can be further logged from there.
The following signal section settings are available:
Start
Transfer the values (200 maximum) recorded following the TRG signal.
Middle
Transfer values before and after the TRG signal
(maximum of 100 before and 100 after).
End
Transfer the values (200 max.) recorded before the
TRG signal.
A configurable scan-down factor in the range 1-99 specifies that only every
n-th value is recorded in the ring buffer.
The output signal DE goes to logic 1 for one cycle when the recorded values are sent.
With a set error output ERR, the status output STA has the following values:
3
A data type at the input is not known.
11
The acquisition block has obtained no memory for the data
transfer.
13
The connection has been broken off.
14
The time-out for allocating memory for the data transfer has expired.
100
Undefined error.
A disturbance course log must be assigned to each disturbance
course log acquisition block.
Display
Output of the disturbance course log to the screen and/or to the printer.
Operator intervention
Starting and stopping of log output.
F-6
Section F
Acquisition
F 3.1 Parameters: Disturbance course log acquisition DISLOG
di0648uk.bmp
Ring memory
Size
Scan-down factor
Number of values acquisitioned per signal input

(30....200 values)
Scan-down factor (1...99)
Signal section
start
200 values max. after the trigger signal TRG
middle
100 values max. before and 100 values after the trigger signal TRG
end
200 values max. before the trigger signal TRG
Trigger selection
oldest
actual
only the oldest trigger signal during the acquisition time will be processed
only the actual trigger signal during the acquisition time will be processed
F-7
Section F
Acquisition
F 3.2 Function block data: Disturbance course log acquisition DISLOG

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
TRG
IN1
BOOL
OTHER1
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
TRUE: the function block is processed,
Trigger input
Signal input 1
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Signal input 2
Signal input 3
Signal input 4
Signal input 5
Signal input 6
BOOL
no
RO
Processing state
The acquisitioned data is transmitted at TRUE
Error in the block if the TRUE is present
Error code of the block
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
Outputs
ENO
DE
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
ELS
INT
yes
RW
IRBG
IUF
Tgt
RO
RO
RW
INT
INT
INT
yes
yes
yes
RO
RO
RO
Signal section
0 = Start, 1 = Middle, 2 = End
Storage capacity
Scan-down factor
Trigger selection
0 = Oldest, 1 = Current
1 At the signal inputs of the acquisition blocks IN1 .. IN6 may connected all data types with exception of the
data types TIME, DT, the STRING data types and the structured data types.
F-8
Section F
Acquisition
F 4 Trend Acquisition, TREND

Function
Forty two trend displays, each with up to 6 trends, i.e. up to 252 archivable
trends, can be displayed on a operator station.
di0069.bmp
To reduce the load on the operator station, each trend display has a single
corresponding trend acquisition block in the process station. Each of these
blocks record the values of up to 6 input signals (IN1-IN6) and supply data
to the trend database in the operator station, which is accessed in turn for
the trend display.
All data types (up to 32 bits) can be directly connected as inputs: BOOL,
BYTE, INT, DINT, UINT, UDINT, REAL, DWORD, WORD.
For each signal input, 200 values with time stamps are recorded in a
memory buffer (i.e. 200 x 6 signals + 200 x 1 time stamp + 200 states). If
the buffer fills past a safety threshold when archiving is active, all values
are transferred out for long-term archiving.
If the corresponding trend display has the "archive ready" mode set, then
long-term data archiving by DigiVis is turned on and off by the SEN input.
The DigiVis archiving settings are not changed or otherwise effected.
In addition to archiving, the trend acquisition module can supply data to
the trend display short-term archive. This is a ring in memory on the
DigiVis PC with a maximum of 2000 records. When the trend display is
called up, all the records (max. 200) are read from the corresponding trend
acquisition block and stored in the short-term archive. Thereafter, once a
second the 30 most recent records are read and archived. The short-term
archive is not saved when the trend display is exited.
The memory requirement for the archived trends is calculated automatically in the operator station during trend configuration as follows:
SHD = SR
where:
SHD
SR
Ad
Tz
IU
Ad
----------Tz IU
Space required on the hard disk

Record size (calculated see next page)
archiving duration
task cycle time
scan-down factor
F-9
Section F
SR
Acquisition
Record size, calculated as follows:

1 x 8 bytes Date and time stamp
+ 1 x 2 bytes Status
+ effective size of the signal inputs IN1 .. IN6
e.g. 8 byte + 2 byte + 3 1 byte (BOOL) + 4 byte (REAL) = 17 byte
A negligibly small data header of constant size is added to the calculated SHD size.
A trend archive will grow to the calculated size. Thereafter, as in a ringbuffer, the oldest value
will be overwritten by the newest and the file size will no longer change.
With a set error output ERR, the status output STA has the following values:
1
The acquisition block has obtained no memory for the data transfer.
2
The memory obtained for the data transfer is too small.
3
A data type at the input is not known.
12
Data loss has occurred during archiving as a result of an interruption in communication.
13
The connection has been broken off.
14
The time-out for allocating memory for the data transfer has expired.
100 Undefined error.
A trend display must be assigned to each trend acquisition block.
Display
The signals (max. 6) are depicted in a trend display with the current values, units of measurement, scale start and scale end values, short texts and curves.
The entire operation is performed via the respective trend display, where it is possible to:
Blank out trends
Change the time-axis for history contemplation
Zoom trends in the x- and y-direction
Change the position of trends in the trend display
Move across the trend courses with a time marker (the trend dots are displayed as numerical values)
Change the depiction of the trend display (color and time range)
Change the y-scaling, color and trend depiction (linear, steps) for each trend
Transfer trend data by means of export
F-10
Section F
Acquisition
Processing overview
di0650uk.bmp
F-11
Section F
Acquisition
F 4.1 Parameters: Trend acquisition TREND
di0649uk.bmp
Scan-down factor
Scan-down factor (1...99) for the acquisition of trend value, i.e. every n-th
value will be processed further.
F 4.2 Function block data: Trend acquisition TREND

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
SEN
BOOL
no
RW
IN1
OTHER 2
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
no
RW
Enable
If TRUE, trend archiving in archiving mode "ready"
is performed
Signal input 1
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Signal input 2
Signal input 3
Signal input 4
Signal input 5
Signal input 6
BOOL
no
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Error in the block if the TRUE is present
Error code of the block
RO
Scaling factor
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
Outputs
ENO
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
IUF
INT
yes
2 At the signal inputs of the acquisition blocks IN1 .. IN6 may connected all data types with exception of the
data types TIME, DT, the STRING data types and the structured data types.
F-12
Section G
Monitoring
Contents
G 1
Overview of Monitoring Function Blocks ......................................................G-5
G 2
G 2.1
G 2.2
Analog Monitoring, M_ANA.............................................................................G-6

Parameters: Analog monitoring M_ANA ............................................................G-7
Function block data: Analog monitoring M_ANA ...............................................G-8
G 3
G 3.1
G 3.2
Binary Monitoring, M_BIN ...............................................................................G-9

Parameters: Binary monitoring M_BIN ............................................................G-10
Function block data: Binary monitoring M_BIN................................................G-11
G 4
G 4.1
G 4.2
Binary Monitoring of Antivalence, M_BAV ..................................................G-12

Parameters: Binary monitoring of antivalence M_BAV ....................................G-13
Function block data: Binary monitoring of antivalence M_BAV .......................G-14
G 5
G 5.1
G 5.2
General Monitoring, M_GEN .........................................................................G-15

Parameters: General monitoring M_GEN ........................................................G-17
Function block data: General monitoring M_GEN ...........................................G-18
G 6
G 6.1
G 6.2
Sequence of Event Monitoring, M_SOE.......................................................G-19

Parameters: Sequence of event monitoring M_SOE .......................................G-20
Function block data: Sequence of event monitoring, M_SOE .........................G-20
G 7
G 7.1
G 7.2
Connection Monitoring, M_CONN ................................................................G-21

Parameters: Connection monitoring M_CONN................................................G-22
Function block data: Connection monitoring M_CONN ...................................G-22
G 8
G 8.1
G 8.2
Event Message, EVENT .................................................................................G-23

Parameters: Event message, EVENT..............................................................G-24
Function block data: Event message EVENT ..................................................G-25
G 9
G 9.1
G 9.2
Horn Control, HORN ......................................................................................G-26

Parameters: Horn control, HORN ....................................................................G-27
Function block data: Horn control, HORN........................................................G-27
G-3
Section G
Monitoring
G 1 Overview of Monitoring Function Blocks

Designation
M_ANA
M_BIN
M_BAV
M_GEN
M_SOE
M_CONN
EVENT
HORN
Analog monitoring
Binary monitoring
Binary monitoring of antivalence
General monitoring
Sequence of event monitoring
Connection monitoring
Event message
Horn control
G-5
Section G
Monitoring
G 2 Analog Monitoring, M_ANA
di0015.bmp
Function
Representation of an analog input signal and monitoring of this signal for
up to 4 limit values. With the input DIS (logic-1 signal) the monitoring of the
limit values can be removed from the processing. The limit values can be
fixed values or analog signals.
For each limit value various types of limit value processing can be selected
(messages). In the event that a limit value is violated, the configured
message text is outputted. A colored envelope characterizes the violation
of the limit value in the faceplate.
By using rate of change limit values, this function block must run in
interval tasks with equidistant mode.
Display
Name, short text, input signal In (Pin IN) as bar and numerical value.
Limit values L1..L4 as markers and numerical values.
Changing the limit values with the buttons L1..L4.
G-6
Section G
Monitoring
G 2.1 Parameters: Analog monitoring M_ANA
di0647uk.bmp
Scale start
Scale end
for display purposes, enter in REAL format

for display purposes, enter in REAL format
Dimension
physical unit of the input signal for display,

direct input or via selection window possible.
Messages
see Section B, General Description and Overview, max. four limit values.
Reset Messages
on DIS=1
With the limit value processing switched off (input DIS = TRUE) all
present messages are set to good state
With the limit value processing switched off (input DIS = TRUE) all
present messages remain in their current state.
G-7
Section G
Monitoring
G 2.2 Function block data: Analog monitoring M_ANA

Name
Inputs
EN
IN
DIS
L1
L2
L3
L4
Outputs
ENO
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
REAL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal
If TRUE, no limit value processing
Limit value 1
Limit value 2
Limit value 3
Limit value 4
BOOL
no
RO
SL1
BOOL
no
SL2
BOOL
no
SL3
BOOL
no
SL4
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Mba
REAL
yes
Mbe
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
ResMon
BOOL
yes
Hy1
REAL
yes
Lf1
BOOL
yes
MP1
Hy2
REAL
yes
Lf12
BOOL
yes
MP2
Hy3
REAL
yes
Lf3
BOOL
yes
MP3
Hy4
REAL
yes
Lf14
BOOL
yes
MP4
G-8
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
Processing state
TRUE if limit value 1 violated
If TRUE, error in the function block
Measuring range start of input
Measuring range end of input
Dimension
Reset messages on DIS=1
Message 1
Message 2
Message 3
Message 4
Section G
Monitoring
G 3 Binary Monitoring, M_BIN

Function
Binary monitoring is used to indicate the state of a binary input.
In the event of a change in signal from logic-0 signal to logic-1 signal or
vice-versa, a message with predefined priority and text is outputted.
The output SMO indicates the message status.
di0002.bmp
Message with
logic-1 signal
IN
SMO
Display
Name, short text and text of the current state.
The function block has a small faceplate ( display height).
G-9
Section G
Monitoring
G 3.1 Parameters: Binary monitoring M_BIN
di0633uk.bmp
Display text for

Message state 1
Message state 0
Text with message state signal 1,

Direct input or via selection window possible.
Text with message state signal 0,
Direct input or via selection window possible.
Message
Message on 1-Signal
Message on logic-1 signal
Message on logic-0 signal
Mess.priority
Priority of message 1...5

no message output if "-" is entered
Hint
Hint text can be entered
Message text
Message text,
G-10
Section G
Monitoring
G 3.2 Function block data: Binary monitoring M_BIN

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
RO
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
SMO
BOOL
Bt0
TEXT
Bt1
TEXT
Mon
BOOL
MP
Processing state
If TRUE, the monitoring has responded
Display text for message state 0
Display text for message state 1
Message on 1-signal
Message
G-11
Section G
Monitoring
G 4 Binary Monitoring of Antivalence, M_BAV

Function
This binary monitoring is used for antivalence monitoring of two binary
signals. If an antivalence of the signals is applied for longer than a
configured waiting time, an error message is produced with a configurable
text.
The output SMO indicates the message status after the waiting time has
elapsed.
di0065.bmp
IN1
IN2
SMO
1*
1*
* after waiting time
Display
Name, short text and text of the current state.
G-12
Section G
Monitoring
G 4.1 Parameters: Binary monitoring of antivalence M_BAV
di0634uk.bmp
Status text
Inputs equal
Inputs not equal
Message
Waiting time
Status text with equal input signals, direct input or via selection window
possible.
Status text with input signals not equal, after the waiting time has elapsed,
Input the permissible time during which the signals may be antivalent
(TIME format, e.g. T#5s)
Priority
Priority of message 1...5,

no message output if "-" is entered
Hint
Hint text can be entered
Message text
Message text with input signals not equal, after the waiting time has
elapsed; direct input or via selection window possible.
G-13
Section G
Monitoring
G 4.2 Function block data: Binary monitoring of antivalence M_BAV

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN1
IN2
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input signal 1
Input signal 2
BOOL
no
RO
no
RO
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
SMO
BOOL
Bt0
TEXT
Bt1
TEXT
Tw
TIME
MP
G-14
Processing state
Display text for inputs equal
Display text for inputs not equal
Waiting time
Message
Section G
Monitoring
G 5 General Monitoring, M_GEN
bg001.bmp
Function
The function of the general message block is to generate messages with a
pre-definable message value.
When the signal changes from a logic-0 signal to a logic-1 signal at input
TRG, a message with the state active is generated. When the signal
changes in the opposite direction, a message with the state inactive is generated. The message is output with a predefined priority and text.
This block can be used in user-defined blocks for generating messages. In
order to do this, a message value must be applied to the input VAL. All
data types other than DT, string data types and structured data types can
be attached to output VAL. The value at input VAL at the moment the
message is triggered is adopted in the message.
This block is also capable of generating messages from external devices.
For this purpose an external time stamp can be applied to the input TSP.
This time stamp must be in the form of system time (Greenwich Mean Time
- GMT). Local times must be converted to system time. The time stamp is
copied across into the message each time the state changes at input TRG.
Use of an external time stamp must be activated in the parameter definition
mask. If use of an external time stamp is activated but the input TSP is not
connected, then a plausibility check error will be generated.
The output SMO indicates the message status.
G-15
Section G
Monitoring
The output SAI makes available the acknowledge status of an incoming message, and the output SAO provides the same information for an outgoing message. The results at outputs SAI
and SAO are dependent on the priority configured and the acknowledge strategy that is defined.
bg003us.bmp
Output ERR is set when:

the external time stamp at input TSP is greater than 12/31/2099, output STA = 1.
the external time stamp at input TSP is equal to 1/1/1970, output STA = 2.
Display
Name, short text and text describing message state, current state with yellow background.
G-16
Section G
Monitoring
G 5.1 Parameters: General monitoring M_GEN
bg002us.bmp
Display text for

Message state
active
Message state
passive
Message
Use external time
stamp
Faceplate text with message state active,

Faceplate text with message state passive,
the time stamp on input TSP is used for the message,

the internal Freelance 2000 time is used for the message.
Message type
Selection of the message type (USER, H, L, HH, LL, LH, BINARY).

The message type is used only for displaying and not for processing.
Mess. priority
Priority of message 1...5,

no message output if "-" is entered.
Hint
Hint text can be entered.
Message text
Message text,
G-17
Section G
Monitoring
G 5.2 Function block data: General monitoring M_GEN

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
VAL
Others 1
BOOL
DT
no
RW
Enable
Message value
no
no
RW
RW
Message trigger
External time stamp for message
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Acknowledge state of coming message
Acknowledge state of going message
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
TRG
TSP
Outputs
ENO
SMO
BOOL
SAI
BOOL
SAO
BOOL
ERR
BOOL
STA
INT
Bt0
TEXT
Bt1
TEXT
TsExt
BOOL
MP
PinTyp
-
Display text for inputs equal

Display text for inputs not equal
Use external time stamp
Message of block
For internal use only
1 All data types other than DT, string data types and structured data types can be attached to output VAL.
G-18
Section G
Monitoring
G 6 Sequence of Event Monitoring, M_SOE
bg004.bmp
Function
The sequence of event monitoring can be used to transfer binary values
with a DDI 01 time stamp to a signal sequence log.
This is achieved by assigning a DDI 01 module to the sequence of event
monitoring in the parameters mask. In order for initial values to be reported, the DDI 01 module time stamps must be activated. See Engineering Manual, System Configuration, Hardware structure.
With each cycle of the user task the binary values and time stamps of the
DDI 01 module are read. The channels of the DDI 01 module for which an
initial-value message (sequence of events) is generated when the binary
signal changes can be defined in the block.
These sequence of event messages can be processed further in signal
sequence logs. See Engineering Manual, Operator Station, Configuring logs. Sequence of event messages are not displayed in the message line or message page in DigiVis.
The output ERR is set if
no timestamps can be read from module DDI 01, output STA = 5.
the assigned DDI 01 module is not accessible, output STA = 100.
Display
None
None
G-19
Section G
Monitoring
G 6.1 Parameters: Sequence of event monitoring M_SOE
bg005us.bmp
Assigned I/O device

DDI 01
device name
Tag name of assigned DDI 01 module, can be entered directly or selected
via a selection window (F2).
Monitored channels
0 .. 31
When the binary value is changed, an initial-value message is generated for the appropriate channel of the DDI 01 module.
The DDI module channel concerned does not generate any initialvalue messages.
G 6.2 Function block data: Sequence of event monitoring, M_SOE

Name
Input
EN
Outputs
ENO
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable TRUE: Function block is processed
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
TRUE: Function block is processed
TRUE, if block contains an error
yes
yes
none
RW
DDI 01 tag name

Monitored channels 0 .. 31
ERR
BOOL
STA
INT
TAGNAME
TEXT
MonChn1 .. 32 BOOL
G-20
Section G
Monitoring
G 7 Connection Monitoring, M_CONN
di0795.bmp
Function
This block monitors various different Freelance 2000 connections (station
numbers) from the process station. One block is needed for each station
number to be monitored. The number of blocks is not limited.
The station number given in the hardware structure is entered as Station
number.
The output SCD is set to logic-1 signal (TRUE) if the connection is in order.
If the logic-0 signal (FALSE) is present, the connection is interrupted.
Connection monitoring cannot be carried out for a different process

station.
Display
None
None
G-21
Section G
Monitoring
G 7.1 Parameters: Connection monitoring M_CONN
di0796uk.bmp
Station number
The resource-ID of the station to be monitored, as entered into the hardware structure.
G 7.2 Function block data: Connection monitoring M_CONN

Name
Input
EN
Outputs
ENO
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable
BOOL
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Connection state
RW
Resource-ID
SCO
BOOL
no
StatNr
INT
yes
G-22
Section G
Monitoring
G 8 Event Message, EVENT
di0076.bmp
Function
This block can be used to start/stop logs. A logic-1 signal or a logic-0
signal (which can be defined with a parameter) generates an event on the
operator stations.
The event is applied until there is a new change at input IN. The acquisition
is then stopped. The output PS is set to logic-1 signal if the event is active.
The name of the block is entered in the corresponding log parameter mask.
Processing overview
di0686uk.bmp
G-23
Section G
Monitoring
Display
Name, short text and message text of the current state.
Output of the logs with operation in DigiVis
G 8.1 Parameters: Event message, EVENT
di0681uk.bmp
Event texts
Event text 1
Event text 0
Status text with active event,

Status text with no active event,
Message
Incoming message on 1-signal
the message for log start is given with logic-0 signal.
the message for log start is given with logic-1 signal.
G-24
Section G
Monitoring
G 8.2 Function block data: Event message EVENT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal with M_ANA
BOOL
no
RO
no
RO
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
PS
BOOL
Et0
TEXT
Et1
TEXT
Mv
BOOL
MP
Processing state
Processing status. If TRUE, log started
Event text 0
Event text 1
Message with signal 1
Message
G-25
Section G
Monitoring
G 9 Horn Control, HORN
di0077.bmp
Function
The function of this module is to control field signals and to operate a field
horn from the control room. The event acquisition is handled in such a way
as to control the control-room horn by means of an event message (alarm
priority 0) generated by the horn control.
Using any function modules alarm, the central event acquisition unit
switches the module on in a manner dependent on the local alarm configuration (see Engineering Manual, Operator Station, Messages and Hints),
thereby setting the output HRN to logic-1 signal. It can be switched off
again through acknowledgment in DigiVis or by a field acknowledgment
key.
The module can also be set through input LS using any binary variable,
and switched off again through input LR. In this case the local alarm configuration makes no difference. The output HRN need not necessarily be
configured in this process.
Both inputs have latching behavior so that pulses can also switch the output on and off. If both inputs are on logic-1 signal, the output HRN is set to
logic-0 signal.
In the parameter mask for the local message configuration, the horn
modules cannot be selected with the F2 key.
Display
None
G-26
Acknowledgment via DigiVis user interface
Section G
Monitoring
G 9.1 Parameters: Horn control, HORN
di0682uk.bmp
No parameters are defined apart from general data.
G 9.2 Function block data: Horn control, HORN

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
LS
LR
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Horn switch-on
Horn switch-off
BOOL
no
RO
HRN
BOOL
no
MP
RO
Processing state
Horn terminal
Message
G-27
Section H
Open-loop Control
Contents
H 1
Overview of Open-loop Control Function Blocks.........................................H-5
H 2
H 2.1
H 2.2
Individual Drive Function for Unidirectional UnitsIDF_1 .............................H-6

Parameters: Individual drive function for unidirectional units IDF_1..................H-9
Function block data: Unidirectional individual drive function IDF_1.................H-11
H 3
H 3.1
H 3.2
Individual Drive Function for Bi-directional Units IDF_2 ...........................H-13

Parameters: Individual drive function for bi-directional units IDF_2.................H-17
Function block data: Bi-directional individual drive function IDF_2..................H-20
H 4
H 4.1
H 4.2
Individual Drive Function for Actuators, IDF_A ..........................................H-22

Parameters: Individual drive function for actuators, IDF_A .............................H-26
Function block data: Individual drive function for servodrives IDF_A ..............H-29
H 5
H 5.1
H 5.2
Dosing Circuit, DOS.......................................................................................H-31

Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS .....................................................................H-32
Function block data: Dosing circuit DOS .........................................................H-34
H 6
H 6.1
H 6.2
Dosing Circuit with Analog Input, DOS_A...................................................H-36

Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS_A.................................................................H-38
Function block data: Dosing circuit with analog input DOS_A.........................H-40
H 7
H 7.1
H 7.2
Dosing circuit DOS_E ....................................................................................H-42

Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS_E.................................................................H-45
Function block data: Dosing circuit, extended DOS_E ....................................H-48
H-3
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 1 Overview of Open-loop Control Function Blocks

Designation
IDF_1
IDF_2
IDF_A
DOS
DOS_A
DOS_E
Individual drive function for unidirectional units

Individual drive function for bi-directional units
Individual drive function for actuators
Dosing circuit
Dosing circuit with analog input
Extended dosing circuit
H-5
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 2 Individual Drive Function for Unidirectional UnitsIDF_1
di0003.bmp
Function,
The single-channel individual drive function relays a control command to
technical control equipment (e.g. electric motor with single direction of rotation, solenoid valve) in the process.
This command can come from a higher-ranking control (automatic operating mode) or take place manually (manual operating mode).
The operating mode inputs MM and MA have priority over operating mode
selection, i.e. the selection of the operating modes manual/automatic is
enabled only if both inputs are on logic-0 signal.
If both inputs are on logic-1 signal, the manual operating mode has priority
over automatic.
The output of the control command OUT can be made dependent on
safety, inhibit, local intervention and error signals. After the control command has changed, the time is monitored as run time until feedback occurs (end position reached). The feedback can be external (feedback variable available) or internal.
If the run time is exceeded an error message appears.
Arrival at end positions 0 or 1 is signaled to inputs FB0 or FB1.
Leaving the end position without control command is signaled as an error.
The respective state of the control output OUT is not changed.
End position monitoring takes places irrespective of whether or not runtime monitoring is activated. If a local signal LOC is present, this ignores
any end-position errors that there may be and resets them. Run time and
end position monitoring only takes place if feedback inputs are connected.
Inhibition inputs
Changes in the output of the control command OUT for commands 0 and
1 can be prevented separately using inputs IL0 and IL1. Inhibition applies
in manual and automatic operating modes.
Safety intervention
The inputs PR0 and PR1 act directly on the control command. If signals
are applied simultaneously PR0 has priority, i.e. the control command is
canceled.
Local intervention
If the signal LOC is applied, the control element receives its signals from a
local transmitter. In this case the function module retains its operating
mode and tracks its output OUT to the end positions (input FB0 and FB1).
H-6
Section H
Open-loop Control
Fault
The FLT signal cancels the control command and switches to operating mode manual. The
subsequent response after a fault signal has been transmitted depends on the parameters relating to Reaction after trouble. A transmitted fault is cleared by operating mode Automatic or
a control command in Manual.
The priorities of the interventions are:
1. Processing
2. Local intervention
3. Safety intervention
4. Fault
5. Inhibition
Operating modes:
Manual
Automatic
The following table describes the operation of the control, safety and local inputs:
Control
input
IN
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention Off

PR0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention On
PR1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
:
1
Local intervention
LOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
Control
command
OUT
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
x
x
x
x are corrected to the end positions
H-7
Section H
Open-loop Control
Display
Name, short text. Two state fields with the configured command texts which indicate the switch
state of the individual drive modules (Pins FB0, FB1). The text of the switch state at that moment in time is displayed on a yellow background, and the text of the non-active state on a
dark-gray background. When the control command is disabled (pin IL0, IL1 or configuration),
text is displayed in gray and the non-active switch state on a gray background
An arrow shows the current direction of motion of the control element. The direction-of-motion
arrow flashes when the control element is running. In the event of an end-position error or a
run-time error, the end position to be attained is indicated by a static direction-of-motion arrow
in the faceplate.
The monitoring time configured is indicated by RT. Operating mode manual or automatic is
indicated by buttons M and A.
A past safety intervention is indicated by black text on white background.
This display will be reset in automatic or after an operation intervention.
The following messages are displayed depending on the signals (it is possible to change the
texts within the parameter mask):
During a fault signal

When run time is exceeded
On leaving the end position without control command
During safety intervention signals
During local intervention signal
Operation Intervention
Changing the operating modes: manual and automatic with buttons M and A.
In manual operating mode the control command can be changed, buttons 0 and 1.
H-8
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 2.1 Parameters: Individual drive function for unidirectional units IDF_1
di0642uk.bmp
Command text
Text for 1
Text for 0
Display text of state field - end position 1, direct input or via selection window.
Display text for state field - end position 0, direct input or via selection
window
Run time monitoring

Max. run time
Enter run time in TIME format (e.g. T#2m)
Monitoring ON
With run time monitoring

Without run time monitoring
Reaction after trouble

MANUAL and OFF
The module is set to manual operating mode and the control command is set to 0 after a fault signal is transmitted.
previous values
After a fault signal has been transmitted, the module continues to work
with the operating mode and the set value it had before the fault.
H-9
Section H
Feedback
Feedback
variable available
Open-loop Control
with end-position feedback, i.e. the inputs FB0 and FB1 are evaluated
without end-position feedback, i.e. the allocations of inputs FB0 and
FB1 are simulated internally. In this state the direction-of-movement
arrows are not displayed.
Monitoring
end position ON
with end-position monitoring

without end-position monitoring
di0643uk.bmp
Messages
Type
Priorities, help texts and texts for displaying messages can be entered for
the various fault conditions such as fault, run time error, end position error
and safety or local intervention.
Prio
Priority of the message for the respective faults (1...5), no message if "-"
is entered.
Hint
Message text
Message text for the respective fault conditions; direct input or selectable
via selection window.
Manual start mode

The start mode when the module is in manual,
i.e. without external control input:
OFF
ON
The control output OUT is on logic-0 signal

The control output OUT is on logic-1 signal
Access
Changing the control output in manual operating mode is possible

Control output not operator-controllable
H-10
Section H
Open-loop Control
Operating mode
AUTO
MAN
The operating mode is automatic in start mode

The operating mode is manual in start mode
Lock MAN
Impossible to switch over to manual

Possible to switch over to manual
Lock AUTO
Impossible to switch over to automatic

Possible to switch over to automatic
H 2.2 Function block data: Unidirectional individual drive function IDF_1

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
MM
MA
FB1
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
FB0
BOOL
no
RW
PR1
PR0
FLT
IL1
IL0
LOC
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Control input
Signal for manual operating mode
Signal for automatic operating mode
Acknowledgment that end position 1 has
been reached
been reached
Safety intervention 1
Fault
Inhibit for command 1
Local intervention
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
BOOL
no
RO
SMA
BOOL
no
RO
FRT
BOOL
no
FEP
BOOL
no
Bt0
TEXT
yes
Bt1
TEXT
yes
Leu
BOOL
yes
MonEp
BOOL
yes
RO
RO
Processing state
Control command for unidirectional individual drive function
Operating mode state: TRUE: automatic,
False: manual
TRUE with run time error
TRUE with end position error
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
Status text 0
Status text 1
Runtime monitoring
End position monitoring
H-11
Section H
Name
Lz
Ra
Lrp
Lrn
Fb
Open-loop Control
Acc.
RW
RW
RO
RO
RW
Comment
Runtime
Feedback variable available
Positive run direction
Negative run direction
0 = Manual and Off, 1 = Previous values

Hi
INT
yes
RW
Lhi
Pha
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
Vh
Va
SQ
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
no
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
Manual input
0 = Command Off, 1 = Command On
Access manual input
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Protection acknowledgment
Message 1 (Fault)
Message 2 (Run time)
Message 3 (End position)
Message 4 (Protection)
Message 5 (Local)
H-12
Data type
TIME
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
Conf.
yes
yes
no
no
yes
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 3 Individual Drive Function for Bi-directional Units IDF_2
di0004.bmp
Function
The dual-channel individual drive function relays control commands to
technical control equipment (e.g. electric motor with two directions of
rotation; valve with stop position) in the process. The field device connected
can be configured.
The function has two separate inputs (IN0, IN1) and outputs (OU0, OU1)
for the command outputs 0 and 1.
If both inputs are deleted or are on logic-1 signal, this will be considered a
stop command. The control commands can come from a higher-ranking
control (automatic operating mode) or can take place manually (manual
operating mode).
selection, i.e. the selection of the manual/automatic operating modes is
over automatic.
The output of control commands can be made dependent on safety, inhibit, local intervention and fault signals.
After the control command has changed, the time is monitored as run
time until feedback occurs (end position reached). The feedback can be
external (feedback variable available) or internal.
If the run time is exceeded, an error message appears.
Arrival at the end positions of the two outputs is signaled to inputs FB0
and FB1. A dead time can be configured for the feedback inputs FB0 and
FB1 (default = 0 ms). This can prevent an end-position being triggered by
delayed feedback in the event of a STOP near the end position. The dead
time is included in the configured run time.
If the valve is configured, each time the end position is exited without a
control command this is reported as an error.
With an electric motor configured, the stop command sent when the end
position is reached is evaluated as a STOP control command, and runtime monitoring is activated. Within the runtime the feedback inputs must
receive the STOP feedback to avoid a runtime error. If the STOP end position is left while in an end-position-reached state, this is reported as an
end-position error.
If both feedback inputs are received, then the end-position states are portrayed as active and an end-position error reported.
End-position monitoring is carried out irrespective of whether or not runtime monitoring is activated. If a local signal LOC is present, this ignores
any end-position errors that there may be and resets them.
Run time and end position monitoring only take place if feedback inputs
are connected.
H-13
Section H
Open-loop Control
Inhibition inputs
Changes in the control command for commands 0 and 1 can be prevented separately using inputs IL0 and IL1 for the output OU0 and OU1. The inhibition applies in manual and automatic
operating modes.
Safety intervention
The inputs PR0 and PR1 act directly on the control command.
The following table shows the method of operation:
Input PR0
Input PR1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Control command
No safety
Safety OU1
Safety OU0
Safety stop
Local intervention
If the LOC signal is applied the control element receives its signals from a local transmitter. In
this case the function block retains its operating mode and tracks its outputs (OU0 and OU1) to
the end positions (inputs FB0 and FB1).
Fault
subsequent response after a fault signal has been transmitted depends on the parameters relating to Reaction after trouble. A transmitted fault is cleared by operating mode automatic or
a control command in manual.
1. Processing
4. Fault
5. Inhibition
Operating modes:
Manual
Automatic
H-14
Section H
Open-loop Control
Control
input 0
Control
input 1
IN0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
1
IN1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention
Off
PR0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention
On
PR1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
:
1
Local interControl
Control
vention
command command
0
1
OU0
OU1
LOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
OU0/OU1 are tracked to the end positions
H-15
Section H
Open-loop Control
Display
Name, short text. Three state fields with the configured command texts which indicate the
switch states of the individual drive modules (STOP and pins FB0, FB1). The text of the switch
state at that moment in time is displayed on a yellow background, and the text of the non-active
states on a dark-gray background. When the control command is disabled (pin IL0, IL1 or configuration), text is displayed in gray and the non-active switch states on a gray background
in the faceplate. In direction of movement STOP the status field for STOP flashes.
The monitoring time configured is indicated by RT. Operating mode manual or automatic is
indicated by buttons M and A.
A transmitted safety intervention is indicated by black text on a white background. This display
will be reset in automatic or after an operation intervention.
Message texts can be assigned in the course of parameter definition, depending on the following signals or states:
With a fault signal applied

If run time is exceeded
Leaving the end position without control command
With safety intervention signal applied
With local intervention signal applied
Changing the operating modes: manual and automatic, with buttons M and A.
In manual operating mode the control command for the two directions and a stop command
can be entered using buttons 0, 1 and S.
H-16
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 3.1 Parameters: Individual drive function for bi-directional units IDF_2
di0644uk.bmp
Command text
Text for 1
Display text for end position 1 state field, direct input or via selection window
Stop
Display text of stop state field,

Text for 0
Display text for end position 0 state field, direct input or via selection window
Field device
Valve
Electric motor
The end-position response is designed for process correcting equipment

with static end positions (valve). End-position monitoring is activated after
the STOP command.
The end-position response is designed for process correcting equipment
with dynamic end positions (bi-directional conveyor belt). In direction
STOP the runtime monitoring is activated. End-position monitoring is not
activated until end position STOP has been reached.
H-17
Section H
Open-loop Control
Run time monitoring

Max. run time
Enter run time in TIME format (e.g. T#2m)
Monitoring ON
With run time monitoring

Without run time monitoring

MANUAL and STOP
The block is set to manual operating mode and the control command
is set to 0 after a fault signal has been transmitted.
previous values
After a fault signal has been transmitted, the block continues to work
Feedback
Feedback
variable available
With end-position feedback, i.e. inputs FB0 and FB1 are evaluated.
Without end-position feedback, i.e. the allocations of inputs FB0 and
Monitoring
end position ON
With end-position monitoring

Without end-position monitoring.
Dead time
for feedback
Effective dead time for the feedback inputs FB1 and FB0 to compensate
the run time between the control command and feedback from the field
device.
di0645uk.bmp
H-18
Section H
Messages
Type
Open-loop Control
the various fault conditions such as fault, run time error, end position error
and safety or local intervention.
Prio.
Priority of the message for the respective fault condition (1...5), no message if "-" is entered.
Hint
Message text
Message text for the respective fault condition, selectable by direct input
or via selection window.
Manual start mode

The start mode when the module is in manual, i.e. without external control input, means:
OFF
The control output OU0 is on logic-1 signal, the control output OU1 is
on logic-0 signal
STOP
The control outputs OU0 and OU1 are on logic-0 signal
ON
on logic-0 signal
Access

Control output not operator-controllable.
Operating mode
AUTO
The operating mode is in automatic in start mode
MAN
The operating mode is in manual in start mode
Lock MAN

Lock AUTO

H-19
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 3.2 Function block data: Bi-directional individual drive function IDF_2

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN1
BOOL
no
RW
IN0
BOOL
no
RW
MM
MA
FB1
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
FB0
BOOL
no
RW
PR1
PR0
FLT
IL1
IL0
LOC
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Control input 1 for bi-directional individual
drive function
drive function
been reached
been reached
Fault
Local intervention
BOOL
no
RO
OU1
BOOL
no
RO
OU0
BOOL
no
RO
SMA
BOOL
no
RO
FRT
BOOL
no
FEP
BOOL
no
Bt0
TEXT
yes
Bts
TEXT
yes
Bt1
TEXT
yes
Leu
BOOL
yes
MonEp
BOOL
yes
Lz
TIME
yes
Ra
BOOL
yes
Lrp
BOOL
no
Lrn
BOOL
no
H-20
RO
RO
Processing state
Control command 1 for bi-directional individual drive function
Operating mode state: True: automatic,
False: manual
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RO
RO
Status text 0
Status text Stop
Status text 1
Runtime monitoring
Runtime
Section H
Open-loop Control
Name
Lrs
DvT
Data type
BOOL
INT
Conf.
no
yes
Acc.
RO
RO
TotZ
Fb
TIME
INT
yes
yes
RW
RW

Hi
INT
yes
RW
Lh
Pha
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
Vh
Va
SQ
RaS
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
no
no
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RO
Comment
Stop run direction
Field device
0 = Valve, 1 = Electric drive
Dead time for feedback
Manual input
0 = Command Closed
1 = Command Stop
2 = Command Open
Access manual input
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Feedback stop
Message 1 (Fault)
Message 5 (Local)
H-21
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 4 Individual Drive Function for Actuators, IDF_A
di0092.bmp
Function
The individual drive function for actuators relays control commands to technical
control equipment (e.g. electric motor with two directions of rotation) in the
process.
It has two separate inputs (IN0, IN1) and outputs (OU0, OU1) for the two drive
directions. The outputs OU1 and OU0 are controlled according to end-position
signals and torque signals.
If both inputs are on logic-0 signal or on logic-1 signal, this will be evaluated as
a stop command.
The control commands can come from a higher-ranking control (automatic
operating mode) or take place manually (manual operating mode).
selection, i.e. the selection of the operating modes manual/automatic is
over automatic.
The output of control commands can be made dependent on safety, inhibit,
local intervention and fault signals.
After the control command has changed, the time until feedback occurs (end
position reached) is monitored as run time. Feedback can take place externally (feedback variable available) or internally.
If the run time is exceeded an error message appears.
When the control element reaches its end positions a signal is sent to inputs
FB0 and/or FB1.
A dead time can be configured for the feedback inputs (default = 0 ms). The
dead time affects the end-position signals FB0 and FB1 and the torque signals TQ0 and TQ1. This prevents the triggering of an end-position error by
delayed feedback when there is a STOP close to the end position. The dead
time is included in the configured run time.
If both feedback signals are present, the end position states one displayed as
active and an end-position error is signaled.
Leaving the end position without a control command is reported as an error.
End position monitoring takes places irrespective of whether or not run-time
monitoring is activated. If a local signal LOC is present, this ignores any endposition errors that there may be and resets them.
Run time and end position monitoring only take place if the feedback inputs
are connected.
The behavior of the module if end position and torque signals are applied can
be defined as a parameter under reset.
With reset on end pos./torque the outputs OU0 and OU1 are immediately
deleted when end position or torque signals are applied.
With reset on torque the outputs OU0 and OU1 remain set when end position
signals FO0 and FO1 are applied in order to drive the control element to the
end position with a given power. The outputs OU0 and OU1 are not reset un-
H-22
Section H
Open-loop Control
til torque signals TQ0 and TQ1 are applied.

In both cases, responding to the torque signal before the end position signal is reported as an
actuator blockage.
If an actuator only has torque switches, these can be connected as end position switches.
Inhibition inputs
Changes in the outputs of the control commend OU0 and OU1 for commands 0 and 1 can be
prevented separately using inputs IL0 and IL1. The inhibition applies in both manual and
automatic operating modes.
Safety intervention
The inputs PR0 and PR1 act directly on the control command.
The following table shows the method of operation:
Input
PR0
0
0
1
1
Input
PR1
0
1
0
1
Control
command
No safety
Safety OU1
Safety OU0
Safety stop
Local intervention
If the LOC signal is applied, the control element receives its signals from a local transmitter. In
this case the function module retains its operating mode and tracks the end positions (inputs
FB0 and FB1) with its outputs (OU0 and OU1).
Fault
subsequent response after an fault signal has been transmitted depends on the Response following a fault parameters. A transmitted fault is cleared by operating mode Automatic or a
control command in Manual.
1. Processing
4. Fault
5. Inhibition
Operating modes:
Manual
Automatic
H-23
Section H
Open-loop Control
Control
input 0
Control
input 1
IN0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
:
1
IN1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention
Off
PR0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
:
1
Safety intervention
On
PR1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
:
1
OU0 and OU1 are tracked to the end positions
H-24
Local interControl
Control
vention
command 0 command 1
LOC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
OU0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
OU1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
Section H
Open-loop Control
The following table describes the operation of reset, for which parameters can be defined depending on the end position and torque signals:
Torque
signal
TQ0 / 1
End position
signal
FO0 / 1
Reset on
torque
yes
OU0 / 1
1
no
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
Output
Blockage
Message
Display
Name, short text. Three state fields with the configured command texts which indicate the
switch states of the individual drive modules (STOP and pins FB0, FB1). The text of the switch
state at that moment in time is displayed on a yellow background, and the text of the non-active
states on a dark-gray background. When the control command is disabled (pin IL0, IL1 or configuration), text is displayed in gray and the non-active switch states on a gray background.
in the faceplate.
The monitoring time configured is indicated by LZ. Operating mode manual or automatic is indicated by buttons M and A. A transmitted safety intervention is indicated by black text on a
white background. This display will be reset in automatic or after an operation intervention.
Message texts can be assigned in the course of parameter definition, depending on the following signals or states:
During fault signal

If run time is exceeded
On leaving the end position without control command
During safety intervention signals
During local intervention signal
During blockage
Changing the manual and automatic operating modes, buttons M and A.
In the manual operating mode the control command for the two directions and one stop command can be entered, buttons 0, 1 and S.
H-25
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 4.1 Parameters: Individual drive function for actuators, IDF_A
di0687uk.bmp
Command text
Text for 1
Display text for end position 1 state field, direct input or via selection window.
Stop
Display text for stop state field, direct input or via selection window.
Text for 0
Display text for end position 0 state field, direct input or via selection window.
Reset
on end pos/torque.
on torque
H-26
Outputs OU0 and OU1 are set immediately to logical 0 on endposition signal or torque signal
Outputs OU0 and OU1 are only set to logical 0 on torque signal
Section H
active on error
Open-loop Control
After reset and transmitted end-position- and/or torque signals both

outputs OU0 and OU1 remain at logical 0.
The outputs can only be set by manual intervention.
After reset and transmitted end-position- and/or torque signals both
outputs OU0 and OU1 are set to correspond to the input signals.
Run time monitoring

Max. run time
Enter run time in TIME format (e.g. T#2m),
Monitoring ON
With run time monitoring,

Without run time monitoring.

MANUAL and
STOP
The block is set to manual operating mode and the control commands
are set to logic-0, i.e. to stop, after a fault signal is transmitted.
previous values
Feedback
Feedback
variable available
Monitoring
end position ON
Dead time
for feedback
After a fault signal has been transmitted, the block continues to work
with end-position feedback, i.e. the inputs FB0 and FB1 are evaluated
without end-position feedback, i.e. the allocations of inputs FB0 and
with end-position monitoring
without end-position monitoring
Effective dead time for the feedback inputs FB1, FB0, TQ1 and TQ0 to
compensate the run time between the control command and feedback
from the field device.
H-27
Section H
Open-loop Control
di0688uk.bmp
Messages
Type
the various fault conditions such as fault, run time error, end position error, blockage, safety or local intervention.
Prio.
Priority of the message for the respective fault conditions (1...5), no message if "-" is entered.
Hint
Message text
Output text for the respective fault condition, selectable by direct input or
via selection window.
Manual start mode

The start mode when block is in manual, i.e. without external control input, means:
OFF
on logic-0 signal
STOP
The control outputs OU0 and OU1 are on logic-0 signal
ON
on logic-0 signal
Access

Control output not operator-controllable
Operating mode
AUTO
MAN
Lock MAN

Lock AUTO

H-28
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 4.2 Function block data: Individual drive function for servodrives IDF_A
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN1
BOOL
no
RW
IN0
BOOL
no
RW
MM
MA
TQ1
TQ0
FB1
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
FB0
BOOL
no
RW
PR1
PR0
FLT
IL1
IL0
LOC
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
drive function
drive function
Torque signal 1
Torque signal 0
been reached
been reached
Fault
Local intervention
BOOL
no
RO
OU1
BOOL
no
RO
OU0
BOOL
no
RO
SMA
BOOL
no
RO
FRT
BOOL
no
FEP
BOOL
no
FTQ
BOOL
no
Bt0
TEXT
yes
Bts
TEXT
yes
Bt1
TEXT
yes
Leu
BOOL
yes
MonEp
BOOL
yes
Lz
TIME
yes
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
False: manual
Torque error
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
Status text 0
Status text Stop
Status text 1
Runtime monitoring
Runtime
H-29
Section H
Open-loop Control
Name
Ra
Lrp
Lrn
Fb
Data type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
Conf.
yes
no
no
yes
Acc.
RW
RO
RO
RW
Abs
XaO
XaI
RaS
TotZ
Abs
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
TIME
INT
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
RW
RO
RO
RW
RW
RW
AbsV
BOOL
yes
Hi
INT
yes
RW
RW
Lh
Pha
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
Vh
Va
SQ
RaS
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
yes
yes
no
no
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RO
H-30
Comment
Reset
Flag output 0
Flag output 1
Feedback stop
Dead time for feedback
Reset
0 = on end position/torque, 1 = on torque
Reset action (on error)
Manual input
0 = Command Closed
1 = Command Stop
2 = Command Open
Access manual input
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Feedback stop
Message 1 (Fault)
Message 5 (Local)
Message 6 (Torque)
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 5 Dosing Circuit, DOS
di0078.bmp
Function
This function is used for dosing quantities of materials and controls one or
two valves via binary signals.
The dosed quantity is recorded in an internal pulse counter.
After the reset signal RES, which sets the Base value BV is cleared, the
quantity count begins.
From this time and until the Pre-threshold value PTV is reached, both outputs SCD (coarse dosing) and SFD (fine dosing) are set.
With a counter reading greater than or the same as the Pre-threshold
value PTV, but less than the Shut-off value SOV, a logic-1 signal is only
applied to the fine dosing output SFD.
With a counter reading greater than the Shut-off value SOV, both outputs
SCD and SFD are at logic-0 signal and the output SSO is at logic-1 signal.
With a logic-1 signal at the run/stop input MRS, a logic-0 signal is outputted to outputs SCD and SFD. The counter reading is not rested. It is following the input impulse. The current state "run/stop" can be queried at
output SRS (logic-1 signal = stop).
The reset key and the run/stop key can be operated in automatic operating mode.
The MRS input and the run/stop key do not effect each other. A STOP
command always has higher priority.
It is possible to switch to manual or automatic operating modes via the
inputs MM and MA. The current operating mode is available at output
SMA (logic-0 = manual, logic-1 = automatic).
By changing to manual operating mode the dosing circuit is no longer
controlled by the run/stop signal and the inputs Shut-off value (SOV) and
Pre-threshold value (PTV), but by manual intervention using the operator
dialog.
The current dosing mode can be queried at output SSO. A logic-1 signal
means that the dosing has been completed.
The output CTC indicates the current counter reading and the output CTP
shows that of the last period. The error output ERR is set when one of the
analog inputs SOV, PTV or BV falls below the permissible range.
The following assignments apply to the operating states:
Operating state
Valve closed
Fine dosing
Coarse dosing
Outputs
Valve display in faceplate
SCD
SFD
lower
0
0
1
0
1
1
flooded
middle
upper
flooded
flooded
flooded
H-31
Section H
Open-loop Control
Display
Actual counter reading CA (pin CTC) and shut-off value S (pin SOV) as numeric values and as
a bar graph. As further numeric values the counter value for the last period CP (pin CTP), the
pre-threshold value (pin PTV) and the basic value (pin BV). The basic value also as a mark
immediately to the left of the bargraph.
Buttons M and A for manual and automatic operating modes, R/S for the run/stop operating
modes and RESET for reset.
The dosing mode coarse/fine dosing or valve CLOSED symbols are displayed beside the columns.
Input of shut-off value, pre-threshold value and basic value. Changing the operating modes
manual and automatic, buttons M and A. The dosing circuit can be stopped, buttons R/S. The
counter actual value is set to basic value with the RESET key.
In manual, dosing can take place with coarse and fine dosing or dosing off, DOS button.
H 5.1 Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS
di0683uk.bmp
Scale range
Dimension
Physical unit for display, direct input or via selection window
Scale end
Parameter for the display in REAL format
Significance
The scale of the counted input impulse
H-32
Section H
Open-loop Control
Dosing constants
Shut-off value
Threshold at which the dosing is terminated. Input in REAL format.
Pre-thresholdvalue
Threshold at which coarse dosing is ended. Input in REAL format.
Basis value
Start value of the dosing circuit after a reset. Input in REAL format
Access
Value operator-controllable
Value not operator-controllable
di0684uk.bmp
Operating mode
AUTO
MAN

Lock MAN

Lock AUTO

MANUAL dosing
off
Start operating state in manual, dosing off.
fine
Start operating state in manual, fine dosing.
coarse
Start operating state in manual, coarse dosing.
Access
Operating options: dosing off, fine dosing, coarse dosing

No operating options available
H-33
Section H
Open-loop Control
Operating status
Start status Stop
Start state dosing at stop

Start state dependent on inputs
Access
Selection of start state Stop possible

No operator intervention possible
Reset access
Selection of reset possible

No operator intervention possible
H 5.2 Function block data: Dosing circuit DOS

The values for basic value (BV), pre threshold value (PTV) and shut off value (SOV) are only accessible by the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
MM
MA
MRS
SOV
PTV
BV
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Counter input
Run/Stop input (FALSE/TRUE)
Shut-off value
Pre threshold value
Basic value
Reset input
BOOL
no
RO
SSO
BOOL
no
RO
SCD
SFD
SMA
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
SRS
BOOL
no
CTC
REAL
no
CTP
REAL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Ske
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
H-34
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Shut off state reached (value reached at
TRUE)
Coarse dosing
Fine dosing
False: manual
Run/stop state, (FALSE/TRUE)
Current counter reading
Last period counter reading
RW
no Acc.
Scale end
Dimension
Section H
Open-loop Control
Name
Data type Conf.
Wt
REAL
yes
Lgw
BOOL
yes
Lvw
BOOL
yes
Law
BOOL
yes
Xi
REAL
no
Pzl
REAL
no
PawV
REAL
no
Pha
INT
yes
Acc.
RW
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RO
RO
Comment
Significance
Access basic value
Access pre threshold value
Access shut-off value
Actual value internal counter
Display parameter counter
Display parameter shut-off value
RW
Vh
Va
Prs
Lrs
Pls
Lls
Pd
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
Ld
Pbs
BOOL
BOOL
yes
no
no Acc.
RO
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Reset parameter
Operating status parameter
Access operating status parameter
Dosing parameter
0 = Stop, 1 = Fine, 2 = Coarse
Access dosing parameter
Display variable stop state
H-35
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 6 Dosing Circuit with Analog Input, DOS_A

Function
This function is used for dosing quantities of materials and controls one or
two valves via binary signals.
The dosed quantity is recorded in an internal counter with analog input via
the IN input. To improve accuracy the counter works internally with 64-bit
REAL precision.
Integration takes place according to the equation:
di0078.bmp
CT = CTn-1 + IN x
CT
CTn-1
IN
tz
ZB
tz
ZB
Counter reading
Counter reading for previous cycle
Input
Task cycle
Time basis
After clearing the reset signal RES, which sets the Basic value BV, the
quantity count begins.
From this time and until the Pre-threshold value PTV is reached, both outputs SCD (coarse dosing) and SFD (fine dosing) are set.
With a counter reading greater than or the same as the Pre-threshold
value PTV, but less than the shut-off value SOV, a logic-1 signal is only
applied to the fine dosing output SFD.
With a counter reading greater than the shut-off value SOV, both outputs
SCD and SFD are at logic-0 signal and the output SSO is at logic-1 signal.
The base value BV, the pre-shut-off value PTV and the shut-off value SOV
can be preset as parameters with operator access if necessary or as external variables.
With a logic-1 signal at the run/stop input MRS, a logic-0 signal is output to
outputs SCD and SFD. The counter reading is not reset. It is following the
input impulse. The current state "run/stop" can be queried at output SRS
(logic-1 signal = stop).
In automatic operating mode the RESET button and the R/S key (Run/Stop)
can be utilized.
The MRS input and the run/stop key do not effect each other. A STOP
command always has higher priority.
It is possible to switch to manual or automatic operating modes via the inputs MM and MA. The current operating mode is available at output SMA
(logic-0 = manual, logic-1 = automatic).
By switching into manual operating mode the dosing circuit is no longer
H-36
Section H
Open-loop Control
controlled by the run/stop signals and the preset shut-off value (SOV) and Pre-threshold value
(PTV) values, but by manual intervention using the operator dialog.
The RESET key and the R/S keys (Run/Stop) can be used in manual or automatic operating
modes.
The current dosing state can be queried at output SSO. A logic-1 signal means the dosing is
complete.
The output CTC gives the current counter reading and the output CTP gives that of the last period. Error output ERR is set if one of the analog inputs SOV, PTV or BV exceeds the permitted
range.
The following assignments apply to the operating states:
Operating state
Outputs
SCD
SFD
lower
middle
Valve closed
flooded
Fine dosing
flooded
Coarse dosing
flooded
upper
flooded
Display
Actual counter reading CA (Pin CTC) and shut-off value S (Pin SOV) shown as numerical values and as bars. Other values are the counter reading for the last period CP (Pin CTP), the
pre-threshold value (PTV) and the basic value BV (Pin BV). The basic value is also represented as a mark to the left of the bar graph.
Buttons M and A for manual or automatic operating modes, R/S for the run/stop operating
modes and RESET for reset.
The dosing mode coarse/fine dosing or valve CLOSED symbols are displayed beside the
columns.
Operation
Input of shut-off value, pre-off value and basic value.
Changing the operating modes manual and automatic, buttons M and A.
The dosing circuit can be stopped, buttons R/S.
The preset value is set with the RESET key.
In manual operating mode, dosing can take place with coarse dosing, fine dosing and dosing
off, DOS button.
H-37
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 6.1 Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS_A
bh001uk.bmp
Scale range
Dimension
Physical unit for display, direct input or via selection window
Scale end
Time base
Time base for the integration of the input,

seconds, minutes, hours or day
Dosing constants
Shut-off value
Value at which the dosing is terminated. Input in REAL format.
Pre-threshold value Threshold at which coarse dosing is ended. Input in REAL format.
Basis value
Access
H-38
Start value of the dosing circuit after a reset. Input in REAL format
Value operator-controllable
Value not operator-controllable
Section H
Open-loop Control
di0776uk.bmp
Operating mode
AUTO
Readiness to start after loading

Starts in automatic operating mode
MANUAL
Starts in manual operating mode
Lock MAN

Lock AUTO

MANUAL dosing
off
Start dosing if dosing circuit in manual operating mode.

Dosing off
fine
Fine dosing
coarse
Coarse dosing
Access
Operating options: dosing off, fine dosing, coarse dosing

No operating options available
Operating status
Start status stop
Start mode dosing at stop

Start mode dependent on inputs
Access
Operation of run state Stop possible

Not possible
Reset access
Operation of reset possible

Not possible
H-39
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 6.2 Function block data: Dosing circuit with analog input DOS_A
The values for basic value (BV), pre threshold value (PTV) and shut off value (SOV) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
MM
MA
MRS
SOV
PTV
BV
RES
Outputs
ENO
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
SSO
BOOL
no
RO
SCD
SFD
SMA
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
SRS
BOOL
no
CTC
REAL
no
CTP
REAL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Ske
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Zb
INT
yes
RO
RO
RO
RO
Lgw
Lvw
Law
Xi
Pzl
PawV
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
RO
RO
H-40
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
RW
no Acc.
RW
Enable
Counter input
Run/Stop input (FALSE/TRUE)
Shut-off threshold
Pre threshold value
Basic value
Reset input
Processing state
True)
Coarse dosing
Fine dosing
False: manual
Scale end
Dimension
Time base
Access basic value
Actual value internal counter
Section H
Open-loop Control
Name
Data type
Conf.
Pha
INT
yes
Comment
RW
Vh
Va
Prs
Lrs
Pls
Lls
Pd
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
Ld
Pbs
BOOL
BOOL
yes
no
no Acc.
RO
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Reset parameter
Acces reset parameter
Dosing parameter
H-41
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 7 Dosing circuit DOS_E

Function
This function is used in the dosing of quantities of materials, controlling one or two valves by means of binary signals.
The dosed quantity is captured internally, with a choice between an
analog and a pulse counter. The counter used depends on the data
type of input IN. For data type REAL the dosing circuit operates with
an analog counter, while for data type BOOL it operates with a pulse
counter. No other data types are accepted.
The analog counter is integrated in accordance with the following
equation:
CT = CTn-1 + IN x
bh004.bmp
CT
CTn-1
IN
tz
ZB
tz
ZB
Counter value
Counter value from previous cycle
Input
Task cycle
Time base
After clearing the reset signal RES, which sets the basic value BV,
and after Start Dosing, quantity counting begins. From this point in
time until the pre-threshold value PTV is attained both the outputs
SCD (coarse dosing) and SFD (fine dosing) are set.
When the counter value is greater than or equal to the pre-threshold
value PTV but less than the shut-off value SOV there is a logical 1
signal only at the fine-dosing output SFD.
If the counter value is greater than the shut-off value SOV, both outputs SCD and SFD are set to logical 0 signal and output SSO is set to
logical 1 signal. When the shut-off value is reached, the dosing circuit
is set to the state STOP.
When there is a logical 1 signal at input MS, a logical 0 signal is output on outputs SCD and SFD. The counter value is not reset and follows the input pulse present. When there is a logical 1 signal at input
MR the outputs are activated again. At output SRS the current status
Run or Stop can be queried (logical 1 signal corresponds to Stop).
It is possible to switch between the operating modes Manual and
Automatic via inputs MM and MA. The current operating mode is
available at output SMA (logical 0 signal = Manual, logical 1 signal =
Automatic).
H-42
Section H
Open-loop Control
Only in Automatic operating mode can the Run/Stop key be used.

At output SSO the current dosing status can be queried. A logical 1 signal signifies that dosing
is finished.
The output CTC shows the current counter value, while output CTP shows the counter value in
the last period .
The outputs OSO, OPT and OBV hold the current effective values of the shut-off value, prethreshold value and basic value respectively.
If the dosing circuit is set to the state Run, the dosing outputs will only be activated in the following circumstances:
shut-off value is greater than the current counter value,
Fault input FLT is not set.
The way in which the counter is reset can be configured. If Reset possible while dosing, the
counter may be reset at any time, otherwise the counter may only be reset in the Stop state.
If a logical 1 signal occurs on fault input FLT in the course of dosing, the dosing block will show
the status Stop. While the fault persists, the dosing circuit cannot be restarted. When the fault
is rectified, the block remains at Stop and can be re-activated with the RUN button.
Once the pre-defined shut-off value has been reached, the dosing block switches to Stop. If
the shut-off value is increased, the dosing block remains in Stop mode. Only the operator is in
a position to reactivate the dosing block by means of the RUN button.
By switching to Manual operating mode the dosing circuit is no longer controlled by the
Run/Stop signal and the parameters shut-off value SOV and pre-threshold value PTV, but
rather through manual interventions in the operation dialog.
A special feature of this dosing block is its leakage monitoring. If a configurable leakage
quantity is dosed in addition after a configurable valve run time, then a message can be generated. The occurrence of a leakage error is indicated on output FL.
If the error output ERR is set, the status output STA can assume the following values:
STA = 0
No problems detected.
STA = 1
One of the analog inputs shut-off value SOV, pre-threshold value PTV basic value
BV has exceeded the permissible range.
STA = 9
The internal counter has violated the valid range of values.
The following assignments apply to the operating status:
Operating status
Valve closed
Fine dosing
Coarse dosing
Outputs
SCD
SFD
lower
0
0
1
0
1
1
flooded
middle
upper
flooded
flooded
flooded
H-43
Section H
Open-loop Control
Display
Actual counter reading CA (pin CTC) and shut-off value S (pin SOV) as numeric values and as
a bar graph. As further numeric values the counter value for the last period CP (pin CTP), the
pre-threshold value (pin PTV) and the basic value BV (pin BV). The basic value also as a mark
immediately to the left of the bargraph.
Buttons M and A for the operating modes Manual and Automatic
R and S for the operating status Run/Stop and RESET for reset.
The dosing mode coarse/fine dosing or valve CLOSED are displayed in symbol form alongside the columns.
Operation
Enter basic-, pre-threshold- and/or shut-off value.
Change operating modes Manual and Automatic with buttons M and A
In Automatic mode the dosing circuit can be stopped with button ST and reactivated with button R. The RESET button can be used to reset the counter to the basic value.
In Manual mode coarse dosing, fine dosing or dosing off can be performed via button DOS.
H-44
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 7.1 Parameters: Dosing circuit, DOS_E
bh002uk.bmp
Scale range
Dimension
Physical unit for the display,

can be entered directly or selected through a selection window..
Scale end
Significance
Scaling of the input pulses counted.

The significance can only be configured if data type BOOL is present at
input IN (pulse counter).
Time base
Time base for the integration of the analog input,

second, minute, hour or day.
The time base can only be configured if data type REAL is present at input IN (analog counter).
Dosing constants
Shut off
Value at which dosing is shut off,

entered in REAL format.
Pre-threshold off
Value at which coarse dosing is shut off,

Basic value
Initial value of dosing circuit after a reset,

Access
Value accessible,
Value not accessible.
H-45
Section H
Open-loop Control
bh003uk.bmp
Operating mode
Manual
Initial operating mode Manual,
Auto
Initial operating mode Automatic.
Lock Manual
Cannot be switched to Manual,

Can be switched to Manual.
Lock Auto
Cannot be switched to Automatic,

Can be switched to Automatic.
MANUAL dosing
off
Initial operating status in Manual is Dosing off,
fine
Initial operating status in Manual is Fine dosing,
coarse
Initial operating status in Manual is Coarse dosing.
Access
H-46
Dosing off, fine dosing and coarse dosing can be used,

cannot be used.
Section H
Open-loop Control
Operating status
Run
Initial status of dosing running,
Stop
Initial status of dosing stopped.
Access
Run/Stop can be used,

cannot be used.
Reset
Reset access
Reset can be used in Stop

Reset cannot be used.
Reset possible
at dosing
Counter can be reset at any time,
Counter can only be reset in Stop state.
Leakage monitoring
Valve run time
Max. permissible valve run time in which additional dosing may be performed. Entered in TIME format.
Leakage value
Max. permissible leakage quantity after the end of valve run time, entered
in REAL format.
Message
Mess.priority
Enter priority 1...5 or "-" for no message.
Hint text
Enter a hint text.
Mess.text
Message output text, enter directly or select via selection window.
H-47
Section H
Open-loop Control
H 7.2 Function block data: Dosing circuit, extended DOS_E

The values for basic value (BV), pre threshold value (PTV) and shut off value (SOV) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
BOOL/
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
REAL
BOOL
BOOL
no
RW
Enable
Counter input
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW

Activates Stop operating mode
Activates Run operating mode
Shut-off threshold
Pre threshold value
Basic value
Fault
Reset input
BOOL
no
RO
SSO
BOOL
no
RO
SCD
SFD
SMA
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
True)
Coarse dosing
Fine dosing
False: manual
Output Shut Off value
Output Pre Threshold value
Output Basic Value
Failure Leakage
MM
MA
MS
MR
SOV
PTV
BV
FLT
RES
Outputs
ENO
SRS
BOOL
no
CTC
REAL
no
CTP
REAL
no
OSO
REAL
no
OPT
REAL
no
OBV
REAL
no
FL
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
STA
INT
no
Ske
REAL
yes
Dim
TEXT
yes
Zb
INT
yes
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Wt
RW
H-48
REAL
yes
RW
no Acc.
RW
Scale end
Dimension
Time base
Significance
Section H
Open-loop Control
Name
Data type Conf.
Lgw
BOOL
yes
Lvw
BOOL
yes
Law
BOOL
yes
Pzl
REAL
no
PawV
REAL
no
PinTyp
Pha
INT
yes
Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
no Acc.
RO
RO
-
Comment
Access basic value
For internal use only
RW
Vh
Va
Prs
Lrs
Rwd
Pls
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
no Acc.
no Acc.
RW
no Acc.
RW
RW
Lls
Pd
BOOL
INT
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
Ld
Pbs
Lcm
Rtv
MP
Pbs
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
TIME
yes
no
yes
yes
no Acc.
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
Manual - Automatic
Lock mode manual
Lock mode automatic
Reset parameter
Acces reset parameter
Reset possible at dosing
0 = Run
1 = Stop
2 = command finished
Dosing parameter
Parameter dosing stop
Leakage value
Valve run time
Message (Leakage)
H-49
Standard Function Blocks
Section J
Standard
Contents
J 1
Overview Standard ................................................................................................ J-5
J
J
J
J
J
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Standard / Logic Functions .................................................................................. J-6

Logic And, AND ........................................................................................................J-6
Logic Or, OR .............................................................................................................J-6
Logic EXOR, XOR ....................................................................................................J-7
Negation, NOT..........................................................................................................J-7
J 3
J 3.1
J 3.2
Standard / Bit-String Functions............................................................................ J-8

Shift left, shift right, SHL, SHR..................................................................................J-8
Rotate left, rotate right, ROL, ROR...........................................................................J-8
J
J
J
J
Standard / Statistic Functions .............................................................................. J-9

Minimum, MIN...........................................................................................................J-9
Maximum, MAX ......................................................................................................J-10
Average, AVER.......................................................................................................J-10
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
J 5
Standard / Comparator Functions...................................................................... J-11
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
Standard / Binary Switch Blocks........................................................................ J-12

Binary switch, SEL..................................................................................................J-12
Multiplexer, MUX ....................................................................................................J-12
Flipflop, FF ..............................................................................................................J-13
Parameters: Flipflop, FF .........................................................................................J-13
Function block data: Flip-Flop, FF ..........................................................................J-14
Trigger, TR..............................................................................................................J-14
Parameters: Trigger, TR .........................................................................................J-15
Function block data: Trigger, TR ............................................................................J-15
J
J
J
J
7
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
Standard / Edge Detection Blocks ..................................................................... J-16

Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG..........................................................................J-16
Parameters: Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG .....................................................J-16
Function block data: Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG ........................................J-17
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
Standard / Basic Functions ................................................................................ J-18

Integrator, INTEG ...................................................................................................J-18
Parameters: Integrator, INTEG...............................................................................J-19
Function block data: Integrator, INTEG ..................................................................J-20
Differentiator, DIFF .................................................................................................J-21
Parameters: Differentiator, DIFF.............................................................................J-22
Function block data: Differentiator, DIFF ................................................................J-23
Dead zone, DEADB ................................................................................................J-24
Parameters: Dead zone, DEADB ...........................................................................J-25
Function block data: Dead zone, DEADB...............................................................J-25
J-3
Section J
Standard / Logic
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
Split range, SPLIT.................................................................................................. J-26

Parameters: Split range, SPLIT ............................................................................. J-27
Function block data: Split range, SPLIT ................................................................ J-28
Hysteresis, HYST................................................................................................... J-29
Parameters: Hysteresis, HYST .............................................................................. J-30
Function block data: Hysteresis, HYST ................................................................. J-30
Sample & Hold, S_H .............................................................................................. J-31
Parameters: Sample & hold, S_H .......................................................................... J-32
Function block data: Sample & Hold, S_H............................................................. J-32
Selection of three, OF3 .......................................................................................... J-33
Parameters: Selection of three, OF3 ..................................................................... J-34
Function block data: Selection of three, OF3......................................................... J-34
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Standard / String Functions................................................................................ J-35

String length, S_LEN ............................................................................................. J-35
Reading left string part, S_LEFT............................................................................ J-35
Reading right string part, S_RIGHT ....................................................................... J-36
Reading a string part, S_MID................................................................................. J-36
Concatenation of strings, S_CONCAT .................................................................. J-37
Inserting string variable, S_INS ............................................................................. J-37
Deleting characters in a string variable, S_DEL .................................................... J-38
Overwriting characters in string variables, S_REPL .............................................. J-38
Searching for characters in string variables, S_FIND............................................ J-39
J-4
Section J
Standard / Logic
J 1 Overview Standard
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
SHL
SHR
ROL
ROR
MIN
MAX
AVER
EQ
GE
GT
LT
LE
NE
SEL
MUX
FF
TR
R_TRIG
F_TRIG
INTEG
DIFF
DEADB
SPLIT
HYST
S_H
OF3
S_LEN
S_LEFT
S_RIGHT
S_MID
S_CONCAT
S_INS
S_DEL
S_REPL
S_FIND
Logic And
Logic Or
Logic EXOR
Negation
Shift left
Shift right
Rotate left
Rotate right
Minimum
Maximum
Average
Inputs equal, =
First input greater than or equal to second input, >=
First input greater than second input, >
First input less than second input , <
First input less than or equal to second input , <=
Inputs not equal, <>
Binary switch
Multiplexer
Flipflop
Trigger
Edge detection, rising
Edge detection, falling
Integrator
Differentiator
Dead zone
Split-range
Hysteresis
Sample & hold
Selection from three
String length
Left string part
Right string part
Middle string part
Concatenate strings
Extend strings
Delete string part
Replace string part
Find string part
Logic functions
Logic functions
Logic functions
Logic functions
Bit-string functions
Statistic functions
Statistic functions
Statistic functions
Comparator fuctions
Comparator fuctions
Comparator fuctions
Comparator fuctions
Comparator fuctions
Comparator fuctions
Binary switch blocks
Edge detection
Edge detection
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
String functions
J-5
Section J
Standard / Logic
J 2 Standard / Logic Functions

J 2.1 Logic And, AND
Function
This function performs a bit-by-bit AND interconnection of the inputs and
passes on the result to the output.
The data types BOOL and DWORD are permitted as inputs and outputs.
The input and output data types are set via the menu option
Edit Change data type.
The max. number of inputs is 10.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
di0008.bmp
J 2.2 Logic Or, OR

Function
This function performs bit-by-bit OR interconnection of the inputs and
passes on the result to the output.
di0010.bmp
J-6
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
Section J
Standard / Logic
J 2.3 Logic EXOR, XOR

Function
This function performs bit-by-bit exclusive OR interconnection of the inputs
and passes on the result to the output.
di0009.bmp
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 2.4 Negation, NOT
di0012.bmp
Function
The input signal of data type BOOL, BYTE, WORD or DWORD is negated
and passed on to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-7
Section J
Standard / Bit-String
J 3 Standard / Bit-String Functions

J 3.1 Shift left, shift right, SHL, SHR
Function
These functions shift the input signal from data type DWORD, WORD or
BYTE by one position to the left (SHL) or to the right (SHR). Any bits
released are filled in with 0.
di0016.bmp
The result is passed on to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 3.2 Rotate left, rotate right, ROL, ROR

Function
These functions rotate the input signal of data type DWORD, WORD or
BYTE by one position to the left (ROL) or right (ROR). The furthermost left
bit is ejected from the bit chain and reinserted as the furthermost right bit.
Shifting is carried out inversely for ROR.
di0017.bmp
Edit Change data type".
The result is passed on to the output.
Display
None
J-8
None
Parameters
None
Section J
Standard /Statistic
J 4 Standard / Statistic Functions

J 4.1 Minimum, MIN
di0018.bmp
Function
The smallest respective input value is passed on to the output.
All input and output signals are of the same data type REAL, UDINT,
DINT, INT, DT or the string data types STR8..STR256.
The comparison of string data types is done from left to right based on the
numerical values of the characters according to the code table ISO646. If
both strings are of different lengths the shortest one is considered as
having been padded out with zero.
Example:
"A" is smaller than "a",
"AU" is smaller than "AZ",
"abc" is smaller than "ac".
The maximum number of inputs is 10.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-9
Section J
Standard / Statistic
J 4.2 Maximum, MAX
di0019.bmp
Function
The greatest respective input value is passed on to the output.
All input and output signals are of the same data type REAL, UDINT,
DINT, INT, DT or the string data types STR8..STR256.
numerical values of the characters according to code table ISO646. If
both strings are of different lengths the shortest one is considered as
having been padded out with zeros.
Example:
"a" is greater than "A",
"au" is greater than "aU",
"ac" is greater than "abc".
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 4.3 Average, AVER

Function
The average value of the input values is calculated and passed on to the
output. All input and output values are of the same data type REAL,
UDINT, DINT, INT or TIME.
di0020.bmp
The sum of all inputs values must not be greater than the maximum
value of the choosen data type. if the sum exceeds this maximum
value, an automatic fault correction starts, see Engineering Manual, Process Station, Automatic error handling at task level.
Display
None
J-10
None
Parameters
None
Section J
Standard / Comparator
J 5 Standard / Comparator Functions
di0021.bmp
Function
Inputs equal, greater or equal, greater than,less than,less or equal, not
equal.The first input is compared with the second input. If the condition is
fulfilled, the output is at logic-1 signal, otherwise at logic-0 signal.
The two input values are of the same data type REAL, BOOL, UDINT, DINT,
INT, DT, TIME or the string data types STR8..STR256.
numerical values of the characters according to code table ISO646. If both
strings are of different lengths the shortest one is considered as having been
padded out with zero.
Example:
"a" is greater than "A",
"au" is greater than "aU".
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-11
Section J
Standard / Binary Switch
J 6 Standard / Binary Switch Blocks

J 6.1 Binary switch, SEL
di0022.bmp
Function
This function has 3 inputs. The upper input is always of the BOOL data type.
Using it, one of the two following inputs can be passed on to the output,
depending on the signal present. If the logic-0 signal is present the middle
input is outputted and if the logic-1 signal is present the lower input is
outputted.
The inputs to be connected and the output are of the same data type REAL,
BOOL, WORD, UINT, UDINT, DINT, INT, TIME DT or the string data types
STR8 ... STR256.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 6.2 Multiplexer, MUX

Function
The upper input is always of the INT data type. Using it, one of the following
inputs can be passed on to the output, depending on the signal present. In
the case of integer value 1, the second input (first switching value) is
switched through, if the value is 10 the last input is switched through.
Outside the range (1-10) the output is set to 0. For the character sting data
types STR8 .. STR256 the first switching value in thi scase is set to the
output.
di0023.bmp
Display
None
J-12
The inputs to be switched and the output are of the same data type REAL,
BOOL, WORD, UINT, UDINT, DINT, INT, TIME, DT or the string data types
STR8 ... STR256.
The max. number of inputs to be swiched is 10.
None
Parameters
None
Section J
J 6.3 Flipflop, FF
di0070.bmp
Function
The flip-flop is used for storing logical binary states.
A logical-1 signal at input S sets output Q, while a logical-1 signal at input R
sets output Q back again. A reset or set priority (RS or SR flip flop) when
inputs S and R are both present at the same time can be set within the
parameter mask. The logical state is available at output Q and the inverse
state at output QN. All inputs and outputs are of data type BOOL.
The following tables show the mode of operation:
RS Flipflop
Input
Output
S
R
Q
0
0
x
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
SR Flipflop
Input
Output
S
R
Q
0
0
x
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
x - Output Q unchanged
Display
None
None
J 6.3.1 Parameters: Flipflop, FF
di0662uk.bmp
RS Flipflop
SR Flipflop
The reset signal R has priority

The set signal S has priority.
J-13
Section J
J 6.3.2 Function block data: Flip-Flop, FF

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
BOOL
yes
RW
R
S
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
Q
BOOL
no
QN
BOOL
no
RS
INT
yes
Comment
RO
RO
RW
Enable
Reset
Set
Processing state
Output
Negated output
RS-FlipFlop
0 = RS-Flip Flop, 1 = SR-Flip Flop
J 6.4 Trigger, TR
di0071.bmp
Function
This function produces a signal at output Q with the binary states 1 and 0.
Changeover is effected in the task cycle.
Scanning down is possible.
If a logic-1 signal is present at the input DIS, the output function is
interrupted and the state of output Q is held, a logic-0 signal or a logic-1
signal is outputted. Selection is made in the parameter definition mask.
di0800uk.bmp
Display
None
J-14
None
Section J
J 6.4.1 Parameters: Trigger, TR
di0663uk.bmp
Pulse scan-down
Scan-down factor in the range (1... 32)
Reaction on DISABLE
hold previous output
The current signal state Q is retained
output low
Logic-0 signal at output Q
output high
Logic-1 signal at output Q
J 6.4.2 Function block data: Trigger, TR

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
BOOL
yes
RW
DIS
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
no
RW
BOOL
no
RO
Q
BOOL
no
Iu
INT
yes
Vdis
INT
yes
Comment
RO
RW
RW
Enable
Disable the output function
Processing state
Output
Pulse scale-down
Response on DISABLE
0 = Hold previous value
1 = Output low
2 = Output high
J-15
Section J
Standard / Flank Detection
J 7 Standard / Edge Detection Blocks

J 7.1 Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG
Function
If a positive edge appears at input CLK for the function RTRIG and a negative edge for the function FTRIG, output Q is set to logic-1 signal. Output Q
remains set to logic-1 signal either for a configurable number of cycles or
permanently until reset.
The data formats of the inputs and outputs of these functions are BOOL
types.
di0024.bmp
Display
None
None
J 7.1.1 Parameters: Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG
di0664uk.bmp
Cycle count for

output
Reset output
automatically
J-16
Output Q remains set to logic-1 signal for n cycles,

range 1...99
A logic-1 signal at output Q is set to logic-0 signal
only via the Reset input RES
The output Q is set to logic-0 signal after n cycles.
Section J
Standard / Flank Detection
J 7.1.2 Function block data: Edge detection, R_TRIG, F_TRIG

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
CLK
RES
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Input
Reset of the output Q
BOOL
no
RO
Q
BOOL
no
Zza
INT
yes
Qr
BOOL
yes
RO
Processing state
Output
RW
RW
Cycle count for output

Output after reset no. of cycles
J-17
Section J
Standard / Basic Function
J 8 Standard / Basic Functions

J 8.1 Integrator, INTEG
di0762.bmp
Function
This function integrates an analog value with respect to time. The integration
period can be entered as a fixed value in the parameter mask, integration
time, or it can be preset via input T. It is also possible to add a constant to
the integrated result. To increase accuracy, the integrator operates internally
with 64-bit REAL resolution.
Limitation of the integration can be done using the parameter value lower
limit, or upper Limit. The integrator runs without saturation. The output OUT
is reset to the configured constant with the input RES.
The error output ERR is set to logic-1 signal if an error occurs in the REAL
calculation.
Integration takes place according to the equation:
IntVar (i = 0 ) = 0
IntVar (t ) = IntVar (t 1) + IN (t )
tz
T
OUT (t ) = C + IntVar (t )
IntVar
IN
tz
T
C
Internal variable
Input IN
Task cycle time
Integration time
Constant
This function can only be used in cyclic tasks.

Display
None
J-18
None
Section J
J 8.1.1 Parameters: Integrator, INTEG
di0763uk.bmp
Integration time
Input of integration period in time format

(e.g. T#20m),
Constant
Input of the additive constant in REAL format.
Integration limits
Upper limit
Upper integration limit, input in REAL format,
Lower limit
Lower integration limit, input in REAL format.
J-19
Section J
J 8.1.2 Function block data: Integrator, INTEG

The value for the integration time (T) is only accessible via the corresponding input pin.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
T
RES
Outputs
ENO
REAL
TIME
BOOL
no
yes
no
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input
Integration time
Reset signal
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Constant
Lower limit value
Upper limit value
OUT
REAL
ERR
BOOL
C
REAL
Ll
REAL
Lh
REAL
J-20
Section J
J 8.2 Differentiator, DIFF
di0764.bmp
Function
This function provides the configurable D- or DT1-action of an analog input
value IN at output OUT.
Processing of DT1 realises a transfer function of a differential element with a
1st order delay.
The differentiation time (lead time) and the differentiation action can be
preset as fixed values in the parameter mask or changed via pins TD or CD.
It is similarly determined in the parameter mask whether changes to a calculation should take place only if positive (positive) or only if negative (negative) or in the case of both (bipolar).
Input, output and differentiation action IN, OUT, CD are of the REAL type of
data, the differentiation time TD is of TIME type.
It can be established via output SD whether the input IN is differentiated (SD
logic-1) or not (SD logic-0).
The error output ERR is set to logic-1 signal if an error should occur during
calculation (e.g. overflow REAL).
The OUT output is calculated according to the following equation:
di0766.bmp
D-Action:
OUT tn =
I N tn - I N tn - 1
* TD
tz
J-21
Section J
DT1-Action:
OUT tn =
1
TD
* (TD * (I N tn - I N tn -1 )) +
* OUT tn -1
TD
CD
tz +
CD
Differentiation action KV,0.0 CD 20.0
Input signal
Output signal
Lead time TV,
TD 0 ms
Task cycle
CD
IN
OUT
TD
tz
This function can only be used in cycle tasks.

Display
None
None
J 8.2.1 Parameters: Differentiator, DIFF
di0765uk.bmp
Differentiation type
D-Output
OUT output shows D action
DT1-Output
OUT output shows DT1 action.
J-22
Section J
Dynamics
Differentiation time
Input of differentiation time (lead time TD) in TIME format,
Coefficient
derivative
Input of differentiation action CD in REAL format.
Differentiation direction
bipolar
Calculation when signal changes
positive
Calculation only in the case of positive signal change.
negative
Calculation only in the case of negative signal change.
J 8.2.2 Function block data: Differentiator, DIFF

The values for differentiation time (TD) and coefficient derivative (CD) are only accessible via the
corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
TD
CD
Outputs
ENO
REAL
TIME
REAL
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input
Differentiation time
Coefficient derivative
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
SD
BOOL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Dart.
INT
yes
RW
Dv.
RW
INT
yes
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal
Differentiation status
Differentiation mode
0 = D output, 1 = DT1 output
Differentiation response
0 = Bipolar, 1 = Positive, 2 = Negative
J-23
Section J
J 8.3 Dead zone, DEADB

Function
A dead zone can be configured with this function.
The operating point, at which the dead zone should become effective, and
the dead zone can be preset as values in the parameter mask or via pin
OP (operating point) or DB (dead zone).
Error output ERR is at logic-1 signal if the dead zone input signal is less
than 0.0 or if an error occurs in the REAL calculation.
di0751.bmp
The function is effected according to the following Algorithm:

IN
OUT
within (OPDB)
OP
outside (OPDB)
INDB
Operating method
di0753uk.bmp
Display
None
J-24
None
Section J
J 8.3.1 Parameters: Dead zone, DEADB
di0752.bmp
Dead zone
Input of dead zone in REAL format,
Operating point
Input of operating point of dead zone in REAL format.
J 8.3.2 Function block data: Dead zone, DEADB

The values for dead zone (DB) and operating point (OP) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
DB
OP
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
ERR
REAL
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO
Enable
Signal input
Dead band
Operating point
Processing state
Output signal
J-25
Section J
J 8.4 Split range, SPLIT
di0771.bmp
Function
With this function it is possible to segment the IN input into the two output
signals OU1 and OU2 and thus to provide a split range for analog signals.
Descriptions of the output characteristics are given in the parameter mask.
The measuring range, the gradient of the two curves via the split point and
the type of characteristic, falling or rising, are established here.
The split points can also be changed as desired via inputs SP1 and SP2.
The measuring range given in the parameter mask is valid for both input IN
and outputs OU1 und OU2.
If the whole measuring range is given as split range, a changeover of
characteristic will be carried out by this function.
The IN input signal is limited to the measuring range. In the case of overranging/underrranging, the error output ERR and output STA are set to 1. In
the case of an internal REAL calculation error the error output is set to 1, the
output STA is set to 9.
In the following diagrams the split range input IN is shown on the X axis and
the respective split range outputs OU1 and OU2 on the Y axis. Curves
marked 1 represent the increasing and curves 2 the falling characteristic.
di0773uk.bmp
Display
None
J-26
None
Section J
J 8.4.1 Parameters: Split range, SPLIT
di0772uk.bmp
Measuring range
Start
Enter lower limit in REAL format,
End
Enter upper limit in REAL format.
Char.1
Description of characteristic 1 for output OU1,
Split point
Enter split point 1 within measurement range in REAL format,
Falling
Characteristic 1 falling,
Rising
Characteristic 1 rising.
Char.2
Description of characteristic 2 for output OU2,
Split point
Enter split point 2 within measurement range in REAL format,
Falling
Characteristic 2 falling
Rising
Characteristic 2 falling
J-27
Section J
J 8.4.2 Function block data: Split range, SPLIT

The values for the split points (SR1, SR2) are only accessible viathe corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
SR1
SR2
Output
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input
Split point 1
Split point 2
BOOL
no
RO
OUT1
REAL
OUT2
REAL
ERR
BOOL
STA
BOOL
Mba
REAL
Mbe
REAL
Knl0
INT
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Knl1
yes
RW
J-28
INT
Processing state
Output signal 1
Output signal 2
Measuring range end
Characteristic curve 1
Characteristic curve 2
Section J
J 8.5 Hysteresis, HYST
di0754.bmp
Function
This function block delivers a hysteresis signal for an analog input signal. It
signals through the binary output OUT whether the input signal IN lies above
or below the hysteresis range. Within the hysteresis range the output OUT
retains its value until it passes beyond one of the hysteresis limits. The
hysteresis range can be defined as a numeric value in the parameters mask
via Start and End or through the inputs HYL (lower hysteresis value) or HYH
(upper hysteresis value).
If the input signal lies above the upper hysteresis limit then the output OUT
emits a logical-1 signal. This logical-1 signal is maintained until the input
signal has dropped to below the lower hysteresis level. Only then is the
output OUT set to logical-0 signal. In the opposite direction the hysteresis
works the other way round.
Output action of the hysteresis:
di0756uk.bmp
Display
None
None
J-29
Section J
J 8.5.1 Parameters: Hysteresis, HYST
di0755uk.bmp
Hysteresis range
Start
Start of hysteresis range. Enter in REAL format,
End
End of hysteresis range. Enter in REAL format.
J 8.5.2 Function block data: Hysteresis, HYST

The values for hysteresis start (HYL) and hysteresis end (HYH) are only accessible via the corresponding input pins.
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
HYL
HYH
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
yes
yes
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input
Lower hysteresis value
Upper hysteresis value
BOOL
no
yes
OUT
REAL
no
yes
J-30
Processing state
Output signal
Section J
J 8.6 Sample & Hold, S_H

Function
With this function when input SH is set, the output OUT follows the input IN.
If a logic-0 signal is present at the input SH, then output OUT remains at its
last value.
di0757.bmp
Output action of sample & hold:
di0759uk.bmp
Display
None
None
J-31
Section J
J 8.6.1 Parameters: Sample & hold, S_H
di0758uk.bmp
J 8.6.2 Function block data: Sample & Hold, S_H

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
SH
Outputs
ENO
REAL
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input
Sample & hold
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
RO
J-32
Processing state
Output signal
Section J
J 8.7 Selection of three, OF3
di0760.bmp
Function
This function forms one output signal OUT from three input signals IN1, IN2,
IN3. The three input signals are monitored for tolerances among one
another. This absolute value is entered in the parameter mask, Maximum
tolerance.
Inputs which are above the maximum tolerance are identified at the outputs
S1, S2, S3 with a logic-1 signal.
The type of processing for the output OUT is established in the parameter
mask.
Either the average value of the signals, which are within the maximum tolerance (two-from-three selection), or the middle value of the three input signals (One-from-three selection) is passed to the OUT output.
Example of operating method with a max. deviation of 2.0
IN1
13.0
10.0
10.0
14.0
Inputs
IN2 IN3
14.0
15.0
14.0
14.0
Display
None
15.0
14.0
17.0
14.0
Average signal value

OUT S1
S2
S3
Average signal value

OUT S1
S2
S3
14.0
14.5
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
None
J-33
Section J
J 8.7.1 Parameters: Selection of three, OF3
di0761uk.bmp
Maximum tolerance Maximum tolerance of the individual signals,

Input in REAL format, range 0.0 ... 999 999.9
Two of three
selection
Output OUT is the average value of the "good" signals,
One of three
selection
Output OUT is the middle value of the good signals.
J 8.7.2 Function block data: Selection of three, OF3

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN1
IN2
IN3
Outputs
ENO
REAL
REAL
REAL
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Signal input 1
Signal input 2
Signal input 3
BOOL
no
RO
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
yes
yes
RW
RW
OUT
REAL
S1
BOOL
S2
BOOL
S3
BOOL
MAbw
REAL
Ausw
INT
J-34
Processing state
Output signal
Input 1 status
Input 2 status
Input 3 status
Max. tolerance
Output choice
0 Two out of three (average)
1 One out of three
Section J
Standard / String
J 9 Standard / String Functions

J 9.1 String length, S_LEN
di0785.bmp
Function
The number of characters in a string variable is established with this
function.
The input signal is of data type STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64, STR128 or
STR256, the output is of data type: INT.
Example:
The length of "abcdef" is 6.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 9.2 Reading left string part, S_LEFT
di0786.bmp
Function
A part string from a string variable can be read with this function.
The preset number of characters (second input) from the string input (upper
input), counting from the left, is sent to the output. If the second input = 0, an
empty is sent to the ouput. If the second input is greater than the number of
signs of the first input, the input string is sent to the output completely. The
upper input and the output is of the same data type STR8, STR16, STR32,
STR64, STR128 or STR256. The data type of the string input and the string
output can be set via the menu option
The lower input is of data type INT.
Example:
The left string part of "abcdef" ( 2 characters) is "ab"
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-35
Section J
Standard / String
J 9.3 Reading right string part, S_RIGHT
di0787.bmp
Function
A part string can be read from a string variable with this function.
The preset number of characters (second input) from the string input (upper
input), counting from the right, is sent to the output. If the second input is 0,
an empty is sent to the ouput. If the second input is greater than the number
of signs of the first input, the input string is sent to the output completely.
The upper input and the output are of the same data type STR8, STR16,
STR32, STR64, STR128 or STR256. The data type of the string input and
the string output can be set using the menu option
The lower input is of data type: INT.
Example:
The right string part of "abcdef" (2 characters) is "ef"
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 9.4 Reading a string part, S_MID
di0788.bmp
Function
A part string can be read from a string variable with this function.
A preset number (middle input) of characters from the string input (upper
input), is sent from the start position (lower input) to the output. If the middle
or second output is 0, then the output is set to a empty string.
The upper input and the output are of the same data type STR8, STR16,
STR32, STR64, STR128 or STR256. The data type of the string input and
the string output can be set using the menu option
The middle and lower inputs are of data type: INT.
Example:
The string part of "abcdef" (3 characters, start position
2) is "bcd".
Display
None
J-36
None
Parameters
None
Section J
Standard / String
J 9.5 Concatenation of strings, S_CONCAT
di0789.bmp
Function
Several string variables can be concatenated into one common string
variable with this function.
The inputs are all of the same data type STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64,
STR128 or STR256. The output is always of data type STR256. If the range
of 256 characters is exceeded the last characters are cut off.
The string input data types can be set using the menu option Edit Change
data type.
The block can be extended to 10 string inputs.
Example:
With the input strings "abcdef", "xyz" and "klm", the
string "abcdefxyzklm" is sent to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 9.6 Inserting string variable, S_INS
di0790.bmp
Function
One string variable can be inserted into another string variable with this
function.
The string variable of the second input is inserted into the string variable at
the upper input in the given position (lower input). The upper input and the
output is always of data type STR256.
The second input is of data type STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64, STR128 or
STR256. The data type of the second input can be set via menu option
If the range of 256 characters is exceeded the last characters are cut off.
If the lower input (position) is greater than the length of the upper input
string, an empty string is sent to the output.
The lower input is of data type: INT.
Example:
With upper input = "abcdef", middle input = "xyz" and
lower input = 2 , the string "abxyzcdef" is sent to the
output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-37
Section J
Standard / String
J 9.7 Deleting characters in a string variable, S_DEL
di0791.bmp
Function
Characters within a string variable can be deleted with this function.
The number of characters (middle input) are deleted from the string
variables at the upper input from the desired position (lower input). The
number of characters in the output string is limited to the number of deleted
characters. If the desired position (lower input) is 0 or is greater than the
length of the upper insput string, the upper input string is sent to the output
unchanged.
The first input (string variable) and the output are of the same data type
STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64, STR128 or STR256.
The data type of the first input and the outputs can be set using the menu
option: Edit Change data type.
The middle and lower inputs are of data type: INT.
Example:
with upper input "abcdef", middle input = 3 and lower
input = 2, the string "aef" is sent to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J 9.8 Overwriting characters in string variables, S_REPL
di0792.bmp
Function
Single characters or several characters can be replaced in a string variable
with this function.
The string variable at the second input replaces part of the string variable at
the upper input. The position, from which the respective character number
should be replaced in the upper input, is given at the last input. The
penultimate input contains the number of to be replaced in the first string.
Thereby 1 is the first character on the left.
The first input (string variable) and the output are of the same data type
STR256.The second input is of data type: STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64,
STR128 or STR256. The data type of this string input can be set using the
menu option: Edit Change data type.
The penultimate and lower input is of data type: INT.
Example:
with "abcdef" at the first (upper) input, "klmn" at the
second input, 3 at the third input and 2 at the lower input, the string "aklmef" is sent to the output.
Display
None
J-38
None
Parameters
None
Section J
Standard / String
J 9.9 Searching for characters in string variables, S_FIND
di0793.bmp
Function
Single or concatenated characters in a string variable can be searched for
with this function.
The preset characters of the string variables at the lower input are sought in
the string variables at the upper input. If they agree the position of the first
character found is outputted at the output. If the character is not present in
the string a 0 is outputted.
The first input (string variable) is of data type: STR8, STR16, STR32,
STR64, STR128 or STR256.
The second output is the same or a smaller string data type than the first input STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64, STR128 or STR256. The data types of
these inputs can be set using the menu option: Edit Change data
type.The output is of data type: INT.
Example:
with "abcdef" at the first input and "cde" at the second
input, a 3 is sent to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
J-39
Arithmetic Blocks
Section K
Arithmetic
Contents
K 1
Overview Arithmetic .............................................................................................K-5
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Arithmetic / Basic Functions ...............................................................................K-6

Addition, ADD ......................................................................................................... K-6
Multiplication, MUL ................................................................................................. K-7
Subtraction, SUB .................................................................................................... K-7
Division, DIV ........................................................................................................... K-8
Modulo, MOD ......................................................................................................... K-8
Power, POW ........................................................................................................... K-8
K
K
K
K
K
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Arithmetic / Numeric Functions ..........................................................................K-9

Absolute value, ABS............................................................................................... K-9
Square root, SQRT................................................................................................. K-9
Numeric root, NRT................................................................................................ K-10
Sign, SGN............................................................................................................. K-10
K
K
K
K
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
Arithmetic / Logarithm Functions .....................................................................K-11

Natural logarithm, LN............................................................................................ K-11
Common logarithm, LOG...................................................................................... K-11
Exponent, EXP ..................................................................................................... K-11
K 5
K 5.1
K 5.2
Arithmetic / Trigonometry Functions................................................................K-12

Sine, cosine and tangent, SIN, COS, TAN ........................................................... K-12
Arcussinus, -cosinus, -tanges, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN ............................................ K-12
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
Arithmetic / Limiter Functions...........................................................................K-13

Analog limiter, LIMIT............................................................................................. K-13
Parameters: Analog limiter, LIMIT ........................................................................ K-14
Function block data: Analog limiter LIMIT ............................................................ K-15
Time limiter, TLIMIT.............................................................................................. K-16
Parameters: Time limiter, TLIMIT ......................................................................... K-17
Function block data: Time limiter TLIMIT ............................................................. K-18
Rate of change limiter, RLIMIT............................................................................. K-19
Parameters: Rate of change limiter, RLIMIT ........................................................ K-20
Function block data: Rate of change limiter RLIMIT ............................................ K-21
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
K-3
Section K
Arithmetic
K 1 Overview Arithmetic
ADD
MUL
SUB
DIV
MOD
POW
Addition
Multiplication
Subtraction
Division
Modulo
Power
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
Basic functions
ABS
SQRT
NRT
SGN
Absolute value
Square root
N-th root
Sign of an input
Numeric functions
Numeric functions
Numeric functions
Numeric functions
LN
LOG
EXP
Natural logarithm
Common logarithm
Exponential
Logarithm functions
Logarithm functions
Logarithm functions
SIN
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arc sine
Arc cosine
Arc tangent
Trigonometry functions
LIMIT
TLIMIT
RLIMIT
Analog limiter
Time limiter
Rate of change limiter
Limiter functions
Limiter functions
Limiter functions
K-5
Section K
Arithmetic / Basic
K 2 Arithmetic / Basic Functions

Error correction
All arithmetic blocks can be calculated either with or without automatic error correction. See
Engineering Manual, Process Station, Commissioning, Automatic error handling in the
task.
If an error occurs with automatic error correction the function returns a valid limit value (maximum valid value). Without the automatic error correction facility, processing of the task stops at
the point where the error occurred.
In any case, pre-defined variables for the task error are set (xxxx.ErrorNo, xxxxErrorProgram,
xxxx.ErrorTask).
K 2.1 Addition, ADD
di0028.bmp
Function
This function adds the inputs with the correct sign and returns the result at
the output.
All input and output values are of the same data type REAL, INT, UDINT,
DINT or TIME.
The addition of the data type TIME is an exception. Here the 1st input and
the output are of data type DT, all other inputs are of data type TIME. The
input and output data types are set via the menu item Edit Change data
type.
The keeping of the value range for the used data type must intercepted outside of the function. See page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
K-6
None
Parameters
None
Section K
Arithmetic / Basic
K 2.2 Multiplication, MUL
di0030.bmp
Function
This function multiplies the inputs with the correct sign and returns the
result at the output. All input and output values are of the same data type
REAL, INT, UDINT or DINT.
The multiplication of the data type TIME is an exception. Here the 1st input
and the output are of data type TIME, all other inputs are of data type
UINT. The input and output data types are set via the menu item Edit
Change data type.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 2.3 Subtraction, SUB
di0029.bmp
Function
This function subtracts with the correct sign the second input from the first
one and returns the result to the output.
All input and output values are of the same data type REAL, INT, UDINT,
DINT or TIME.
The subtraction of data types TIME and DT are exceptions. In the first
case, a data item of type TIME is subtracted from a data item of type DT,
and is assigned as data type DT to the output. In the second case, two
data items of type DT are subtracted and the results are returned at the
output in a data item of type TIME.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K-7
Section K
Arithmetic / Basic
K 2.4 Division, DIV
di0031.bmp
Function
This function divides with the correct sign the first input by the second and
returns the result to the output. All input and output values are of the same
data type REAL, INT, UDINT or DINT.
The division of the data type TIME is an exception. In one case, the first
input and the output are of data type TIME, and the divisor is of data type
UINT. Another case allows to calculate a ratio of times. Both inputs are of
data type TIME. The output is of data type DINT.
Division by zero must be intercepted outside the function. See
chapter page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 2.5 Modulo, MOD
di0032.bmp
Function
This function divides the first input by the second and returns the
remainder of the division as a result to the output. All input and output
values are of the same data type UDINT, DINT or INT.
Division by 0 returns 0 to the output.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 2.6 Power, POW
di0033.bmp
Function
This function calculates from the inputs xY and returns the result to the
output.
The first input denotes the x and the second the y.
The input and output values are of the same data type REAL.
The keeping of the value range must intercepted outside of the function. page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
K-8
None
Parameters
None
Section K
Arithmetic / Numeric
K 3 Arithmetic / Numeric Functions

K 3.1 Absolute value, ABS
di0034.bmp
Function
The input value is output as an absolute value i.e. with a positive sign, at
the output.
All input and output values are of the same data type REAL, DINT or INT.
If the maximum negative value is converted with the function, see

chapter page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 3.2 Square root, SQRT
di0035.bmp
Function
This function calculates the square root from the input signal and returns
the result to the output.
Input and output values are of the same data type REAL.
The function is permitted only for positive values. For negative numbers see page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K-9
Section K
K 3.3 Numeric root, NRT
di0767.bmp
Function
This function calculates the n-th. root from the input signal and passes the
result to the output. The upper input represents the root factor and the
lower input represents the exponent. Both inputs and the output are of
data type REAL.
The function is permitted only for positive values. For negative numbers page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 3.4 Sign, SGN
di0036.bmp
Function
The sign of the input value is displayed at the output. The input value is of
data type REAL, DINT or INT, the output value is always of data type INT.
-1 is obtained as output value for negative numbers and +1 for positive
numbers and 0 for the number zero.
Display
None
K-10
None
Parameters
None
Section K
Arithmetic / Logarithm
K 4 Arithmetic / Logarithm Functions

K 4.1 Natural logarithm, LN
di0037.bmp
Function
This function defines the natural logarithm for base e in accordance with
the input, and returns the result to the output. The function is permitted
only for positive values. Input and output values are of the same data type
REAL.
For negative numbers see page K-6, Error correction.

Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 4.2 Common logarithm, LOG
di0038.bmp
Function
This function defines the logarithm for base 10 in accordance with the
input, and returns the result to the output. The function is permitted only for
positive values. Input and output values are of the same data type REAL.
For negative numbers see page K-6, Error correction.

Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 4.3 Exponent, EXP
di0039.bmp
Function
This function calculates the power for base e = 2.71828 of the natural
logarithm in accordance with the input, and returns the result to the output.
Input and output values are of data type REAL.
The keeping of the value range must intercepted outside of the

function. See page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K-11
Section K
Arithmetic / Trigonometry
K 5 Arithmetic / Trigonometry Functions

K 5.1 Sine, cosine and tangent, SIN, COS, TAN
Function
The respective function calculates the sine, cosine or tangent from an
input value in the radian measure.
Inputs and output values are of data type REAL.
The radian measure is calculated by multiplying the angular degree with
PI/180 (PI = 3.141593...).
di0040.bmp
The keeping of the value range for the tangent must intercepted
outside of the function. See page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
K 5.2 Arcussinus, -cosinus, -tanges, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN

Function
The respective function calculates the arc sine, arc cosine or arc tangent
from an input value and returns this value to the output.
Input and output values are of data type REAL.
Numerical ranges of the input and results at the output:
di0041.bmp
Arc sine
Arc cosine
Arc tangent
Input
between -1 and +1
between -1 and +1
total numerical range
Output
-PI/2 to +PI/2
0 to PI
-PI/2 to +PI/2
The keeping of the value range for arc sine and arc cosine must intercepted outside of the function. See page K-6, Error correction.
Display
None
K-12
None
Parameters
None
Section K
Arithmetic / Limiter
K 6 Arithmetic / Limiter Functions

K 6.1 Analog limiter, LIMIT
Function
The analog input signal IN is checked for configurable upper and/ or lower
limit, and limited if necessary.
The following limitation conditions apply:
di0066.bmp
Input IN
Output OUT
Upper limit HI
IN < HI
IN HI
IN
HI
Lower limit LO
IN > LO
IN LO
IN
LO
IN HI
LO < IN < HI
IN LO
HI
IN
LO
Upper and lower limit
If the input signal overshoots or undershoots the permitted limits, the error
signal ERR is set to logic-1 signal.
Display
None
None
K-13
Section K
K 6.1.1 Parameters: Analog limiter, LIMIT
di0640uk.bmp
Limit to
lower limit
Check lower signal limit,
upper limit
Check upper signal limit,
both limits
Check lower and upper signal limits.
Limits
Lower limit
Enter lower signal limit in the REAL format,
Upper limit
Enter upper signal limit in the REAL format.
K-14
Section K
K 6.1.2 Function block data: Analog limiter LIMIT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal for
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Lim
INT
yes
RW
Lo
Hi
RW
RW
REAL
REAL
yes
yes
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal for
Limitation
0 = Upper limit
1 = Lower limit
2 = Both limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
K-15
Section K
K 6.2 Time limiter, TLIMIT

Function
The input signal IN in the time format is checked for a configurable upper
and / or lower limit and limited if necessary.
di0067.bmp
Input IN
Output OUT
Upper limit HI
IN < HI
IN HI
IN
HI
Lower limit LO
IN > LO
IN LO
IN
LO
IN HI
LO < IN < HI
IN LO
HI
IN
LO
Upper and lower limit
signal ERR is set to logic-1 signal.
Display
None
K-16
None
Section K
K 6.2.1 Parameters: Time limiter, TLIMIT
di0641uk.bmp
Limit to
lower limit
Check lower signal limit,
upper limit
Check upper signal limit,
both limits
Check lower and upper signal limits.
Limits
Lower limit
Enter lower signal limit in the time format,
Upper limit
Enter upper signal limit in the time format.
K-17
Section K
K 6.2.2 Function block data: Time limiter TLIMIT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
TIME
no
RW
Enable
Input signal for TLIMIT
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
TIME
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Lim
INT
yes
RW
Lo
Hi
RW
RW
K-18
TIME
TIME
yes
yes
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal for TLIMIT
Limitation
0 Upper limit
1 Lower limit
2 Both limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Section K
K 6.3 Rate of change limiter, RLIMIT

Function
The analog input signal is checked for configurable upper and / or lower
rate of change, and is limited if necessary.
di0073.bmp
Input IN
Output OUT
Upper limit HI
(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta HI
(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta < HI
OUTt-1+HI ta/ZB
IN
Lower limit LO
(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta > LO

(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta LO
IN
OUTt-1-LO ta/ZB
(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta HI
LO<(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta < HI
(INt-INt-1) ZB/ta LO
OUTt-1+HI ta/ZB
IN
OUTt-1-LO ta/ZB
Upper and lower

limit
INt
INt-1
ZB
ta
OUTt-1
HI
LO
current input
input last task cycle
time base (parameter mask)
task cycle
output last task cycle
upper limit (parameter mask)
lower limit (parameter mask)
signal ERR is set to the logic-1 signal.
Display
None
None
K-19
Section K
K 6.3.1 Parameters: Rate of change limiter, RLIMIT
di0667uk.bmp
Limit to
faling limit
Check the rate of change downwards
rising limit
Check the rate of change upwards
both limits
Check the rate of change upwards and downwards
Time base
The rate of change relates to seconds, minutes, hours or days
Limits
Falling limit
Enter the rate of change downwards in REAL format (value > 0.0).
Rising limit
Enter the rate of change upwards in REAL format (value > 0.0).
K-20
Section K
K 6.3.2 Function block data: Rate of change limiter RLIMIT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
REAL
no
RW
Enable
Input signal for
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
REAL
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Lim
INT
yes
RW
Lo
Hi
Zb
RW
RW
RW
REAL
REAL
INT
yes
yes
yes
RO
RO
Processing state
Output signal for
Limitation
0 = Upper limit
1 = Lower limit
2 = Both limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Time-base
K-21
Converter Blocks
Section L
Converter
Contents
L 1
Overview Converter.............................................................................................. L-5
L 2
L 2.1
L 2.2
Converter / Data Types Blocks............................................................................ L-6

Conversion of Data Types, TO_xx ......................................................................... L-7
Conversion of REAL to INTEGER data types, TRUNC........................................ L-14
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Converter / Binary Functions Blocks ............................................................... L-15

Binary Conversion INT to CODE, INT_TO_CO.................................................... L-15
Parameters: Binary conversion, INT_TO_CO ...................................................... L-19
Function block data: Binary conversion, INT_TO_CO ......................................... L-20
Binary Conversion CODE to INT, CO_TO_INT.................................................... L-21
Parameters: Binary conversion, CO_TO_INT ...................................................... L-22
Function block data: Binary conversion, CO_TO_INT ......................................... L-23
Pack functions, PBOBY, PBOWO, PBODW, PBYWO, PBYDW, PBWODW....... L-24
Extract type to type, EXTCT ................................................................................. L-25
Unpack functions, UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY, UPDWBY, UPDWWO ....... L-26
Parameters: Unpack functions UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY, UPDWBY,
UPDWWO............................................................................................................. L-27
Function block data: Unpack functions UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY,
UPDWBY, UPDWWO........................................................................................... L-27
3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
L 3.5.2
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
Converter / Date + Time Blocks ........................................................................ L-28

Pack Function for Data Type DT, P_DT ............................................................... L-28
Parameters: Pack function for data type DT, P_DT ............................................. L-29
Function block data: Pack function for data type DT, P_DT................................. L-29
Unpack Function for Data Type DT, UP_DT ........................................................ L-30
Parameters: Unpack function for data type DT, UP_DT ...................................... L-31
Function block data: Unpack function for data type DT, UP_DT.......................... L-31
Local Time to Summer Time, LT_TO_DST .......................................................... L-32
Parameters: Local time to summer time, LT_TO_DST ........................................ L-33
Function block data: Local time to summer time, LT_TO_DST............................ L-33
Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT.............................................................. L-34
Parameters: Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT......................................... L-35
Function block data: Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT ............................ L-35
L-3
Section L
Converter
L 1 Overview Converter
TO_BO
TO_BY
TO_IN
TO_UI
TO_DI
TO_UD
TO_WO
TO_DW
TO_RE
TO_TI
TO_DT
TO_STR8
TO_STR16
TO_STR32
TO_STR64
TO_STR128
TO_STR256
TRUNC
INT_TO_CO
CO_TO_INT
PBOBY
PBOWO
PBODW
PBYWO
PBYDW
PWODW
EXTCT
UPBYBO
UPWOBO
UPWOBY
UPDWBY
UPDWWO
P_DT
UP_DT
LT_TO_DST
DST_TO_LT
Data type x to data type BOOL

Data type x to data type BYTE
Data type x to data type INT
Data type x to data type UINT
Data type x to data type DINT
Data type x to data type UDINT
Data type x to data type WORD
Data type x to data type DWORD
Data type x to data type REAL
Data type x to data type TIME
Data type x to data type DT
Data type x to string type STR8
REAL to INTEGER data types
Data type INT to BCD, Gray or Aiken code
BCD, Gray or Aiken code to data type INT
Pack BOOL to BYTE
Pack BOOL to WORD
Pack BOOL to DWORD
Pack BYTE to WORD
Pack BYTE to DWORD
Pack WORD to DWORD
Extract type to type
Unpack BYTE to BOOL
Unpack WORD to BOOL
Unpack WORD to BYTE
Unpack DWORD to BYTE
Unpack DWORD to WORD
Pack to data type DT
Unpack data type DT
Local time to summer time
Summer time to local time
Data type blocks

Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Data type blocks
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Binary functions
Date + time blocks
Date + time blocks
Date + time blocks
Date + time blocks
L-5
Section L
Converter / Data Type
L 2 Converter / Data Types Blocks

Matrix showing possible data combinations Data combinations
Input
Output
I
U
N
I
T
N
T
D
I
N
T
U
D
I
N
T
B
Y
T
E
W
O
R
D
D
W
O
R
D
B
O
O
L
R
E
A
L
T
I
M
E
D
T
S
T
R
8
S
T
R
1
6
S
T
R
3
2
S
T
R
6
4
S
T
R
1
2
8
S
T
R
2
5
6
INT
UINT
DINT
UDINT
BYTE
WORD
DWORD
BOOL
REAL
TIME
DT
- TO - TO TO TO
- TO - TO - TO TO
- TO - TO TO
TO TO - TO TO
- TO - TO TO
PA PA EX TO TO
EX
PA EX
- TO TO EX EX
EX TO TO
- PA PA PA
- TO TO TO TO TO - TO TO - TO -
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
STR8
STR16
STR32
STR64
STR128
STR256
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO TO
TO
TO
TO TO
TO TO
TO TO
Modules:
L-6
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO = TO_xx
PA = PACK
EX = EXTRACT
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO
TO TO TO
TO TO TO
TO TO TO
TO TO
TO
TO
TO TO
Section L
Converter /Data Type
L 2.1 Conversion of Data Types, TO_xx

Function
With the TO_xx functions it is possible to convert one data type into
another.
There are several conversion blocks because the data type combinations
are too large for one block and setting the input and output types would be
a very onerous task.
The blocks are structured so that the data output types are defined and the
data input types can be modified. Attention should be paid here to direct
conversion of data types of the same size (word width in bits) and the
same type (e.g. INT to DINT). The possible combinations are shown in the
table and list:
di0705.bmp
Block
TO_BO
TO_BY
TO_IN
TO_UI
TO_DI
TO_UD
TO_WO
TO_DW
TO_RE
TO_TI
TO_DT
TO_STR8
TO_STR16
TO_STR32
TO_STR64
TO_STR128
TO_STR256
Input
STRx
STRx
UINT, DINT, WORD, REAL, STRx
INT, UDINT, WORD, REAL, STRx
INT, UDINT, DWORD, REAL, TIME, STRx
UINT, DINT, DWORD, REAL, TIME, STRx
INT, UINT, STRx
DINT, UDINT, REAL, TIME, STRx
INT, UINT, DINT, UDINT, DWORD, STRx
DINT, UDINT, DWORD, STRx
STRx
all, except STR8
all, except STR16
all, except STR32
all, except STR64
all, except STR128
all, except STR256
Output
BOOL
BYTE
INT
UINT
INT
DINT
WORD
DWORD
REAL
TIME
DT
STR8
STR16
STR32
STR64
STR128
STR256
(STRx corresponds with: STR8, STR16, STR32, STR64, STR128,

STR256).
The input data types are set using the menu option:
Edit change data type.
The rounding procedure ensures that when converting REAL values to
values with or without a sign (INT, DINT, UINT, UDINT) digits after the
decimal point 0.5 are rounded up and all others are rounded down.
L-7
Section L
In general for input data type STRx, the leading and following blank characters are permitted. If
following ones are present no further characters may follow them.
If an error occurs during conversion of a string, i.e. an invalid string for the respective
function, the output of a 0 takes place in the corresponding data format.
During conversion of a data type to a string data type a longer string can be generated
than is provided for by the output string. In such a case the output string is completely
filled with # characters.
Because during conversion of the different data widths various value infringements may occur
the behavior of the TO_xx functions is described in the following section.
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
STRx
TO_BO
The "TRUE" string, "T" or "1" supplies logic-1 (TRUE). Upper/lower cases are ignored.
All other strings are interpreted as logic-0 i.e. FALSE.
STRx
TO_BY
Character string to 8-bit string.

Character strings in decimal, dual, octal or hexadecimal form
are possible. The character strings 4, 2#100, 8#04 or
16#04 supplies a decimal 4.
DINT
TO_IN
32-bit with sign to 16-bit with sign.

Boundary cases:
- DINT value > INTmax value, then Task-error message
error code 1 and INT value = INTmax value.1)
- DINT value < INTmin value, then Task-error message
error code 2 and INT value = INTmin value.1)
REAL
TO_IN
Floating point to 16-bit with sign.

Boundary cases:
- REAL value > INTmax value, then Task-error message
error code 6 and INT value = INmax value.1)
- REAL value < INTmin value, then Task-error message
error code 7 and INT value = INTmin value.1)
STRx
TO_IN
Character string to 16-bit with sign.

1) see Engineering Manual, Process Station, Error handling at task level
L-8
Section L
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
UINT
TO_IN
16-bit without sign to 16-bit with sign.

Boundary case:
- UINT value > INTmax value, then
Task-error message error code 1
and INT value = INTmax value.1)
WORD
TO_IN
16-bit string to 16-bit with sign.

If the highest-value bit is set in the WORD value, the INT
value is negative.
INT
TO_UI
16-bit with sign to 16-bit without sign.

Here a negative INT value becomes a greater value without a sign, e.g. -500 to 65036.
REAL
TO_UI
Floating point to 16-bit without sign.

Boundary cases:
- REAL value > UINTmax value, then
Task-error message error code 6 and
UINT value = UINTmax value.1)
- REAL value < 0.0, then
Task-error message error code 7 and UINT value = 0.1)
STRx
TO_UI
Character string to 16-bit without sign.

UDINT
TO_UI
32-bit without sign to 16-bit without sign.

Boundary case:
- UDINT value > UINTmax value, then
Task-error message error code 1 and
UINT value = UINTmax value.1)
WORD
TO_UI
16-bit string to 16-bit without sign.
DWORD
TO_DI
32-bit string to 32-bit with sign.

If the highest value bit is set in the DWORD value the DINT
value becomes negative.
INT
TO_DI
16-bit string with to 32-bit with sign.
L-9
Section L
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
REAL
TO_DI
Floating point to 32-bit with sign.

Boundary cases:
- REAL value >DINTmax value, then
and DINT value = DINTmax value.1)
- REAL value < DINTmin value, then
and UINT value = UINTmax value.1)
STRx
TO_DI
Character string to 32-bit with sign

TIME
TO_DI
ms value for a time difference to 32-bit with sign. Internal formation of data types is identical.
UDINT
TO_DI
32-bit without sign to 32-bit with sign.

Boundary case:
- UDINT value > DINTmax value, then
and DINT value = DINTmax value.1)
DINT
TO_UD
32-bit with sign to binary display.

Here, a negative DINT value becomes a greater value
without a sign, e.g. -500 to 65036.
DWORD
TO_UD
32-bit string to 32-bit without sign.
REAL
TO_UD
Floating point to 32-bit without sign.

Boundary cases:
- REAL value >UDINTmax value, then
and UDINT value = UDINTmax value.1)
- REAL value < 0.0, then Task-error message
error code 7 and UDINT value = 0.1)
STRx
TO_UD
Character string to 32-bit without sign

L-10
Section L
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
TIME
TO_UD
ms value for a time difference to 32-bit without sign.

Here, a negative TIME value becomes a larger value
without sign, e.g. -500 to 65036.
UINT
TO_UD
16-bit without to 32-bit without sign.
INT
TO_WO
16-bit with sign to 16-bit string.

Here, a negative INT value becomes a larger bit string,
e.g. -500 to 65036.
STRx
TO_WO
Character string to 16-bit string

are possible. The character strings 4, 2#100, 8#04, or
UINT
TO_WO
16-bit without sign to 16-bit string.
DINT
TO_DW
16-bit with sign to 32-bit string.

Here, a negative DINT value becomes a larger value
without sign, e.g. -500 to 65036.
REAL
TO_DW
Floating point to 32-bit string. No conversation, output in REAL

bit pattern.
STRx
TO_DW
Character string to 32-bit string

are possible. The character strings 4, 2#100, 8#04, or
TIME
TO_DW
ms value to 32-bit string.

Thereby a negative TIME value becomes a larger bit
string, e.g. -500 ms to 65036.
UDINT
TO_DW
32-bit without sign to 32-bit string.
DINT
TO_RE
32-bit with sign to floating point.
L-11
Section L
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
DWORD
TO_RE
32-bit string to floating point. Hereby test whether a bit pattern

represents a valid floating point value
Boundary case:
- If DWORT value is not a REAL value, then Task-error
message error code 7 and REAL value = 0.0.1)
INT
TO_RE
16-bit with sign to floating point.
STRx
TO_RE
Character string to floating point.

Character strings with decimal point, with or without exponential data. e.g. 12.02, 5E-3 are possible.
UDINT
TO_RE
32-bit without sign to floating point.
UINT
TO_RE
16-bit without sign to floating point.
DINT
TO_TI
32-bit with sign to ms value for a time distance.
DWORD
TO_TI
32-bit string to ms value for a time distance. The internal arrangement corresponds to DINT.
If the highest value bit in the DWORD value is set the ms
value is negative.
STRx
TO_TI
Character string to ms value for a time distance.

Character strings of IEC-TIME format e.g. T#1d12h34m30s
Abbreviated entries are possible e.g. T#12d, the rest is taken
as 0. Upper/lower cases are ignored.
UDINT
TO_TI
32-bit without sign to ms value for a time distance. The internal

arrangement corresponds to DINT.
Boundary case:
- If UDINT value >TIME max. value, then task-error
message is error code 1 and TIME value = max. TIME
value.1)
STRx
TO_DT
Character string to DT data type.

Character string of IEC-TIME format e.g. DT#1995-06-2714:32:22:00.000. Complete strings are essential, only the millisecond data can be left out. This is then taken to be 0. Upper/lower cases are ignored.
BOOL
TO_STRx
Logic-0 is evaluated as FALSE, logic-1 as TRUE.
L-12
Section L
Input
data type
Module
Conversion
BYTE
TO_STRx
The output is a hexadecimal value acc. to IEC, i.e. 16#00.
DINT
TO_STRx
The output is a decimal value. If positive without sign and if

negative with sign. The length is up to 10 characters plus signs
according to value.
DT
TO_STRx
The output is a date with a time (DT) acc. to IEC in its full
length, i.e. DT#0000-00-00-00:00:00.000.
At least an STR32 is necessary as target string.
DWORD
TO_STRx
The output is a
i.e.16#00000000.
INT
TO_STRx
The output is a decimal value. If positive without sign and if

negative with sign. The length is up to 5 digits and any signs
according to value.
REAL
TO_STRx
The output is a floating point number in the form 123.0 or

1.4587E10. Output takes place in the respectively shorter
form. The necessary string length is accordingly dependent on
the value and the type of display.
hexadecimal
value
acc.
to
IEC,
The output to a STR8 may lead at special REAL values to

an overflow ########.
STRx
TO_STRx
The conversion can be used for any string type into another. If
the output string has insufficient space the input string is cut
down.
TIME
TO_STRx
The output is a time (TIME) acc. to IEC in its full length, i.e.
T#00d00h00m00s000ms. At least an STR32 is necessary for
this as a target string.
UDINT
TO_STRx
The output is a decimal value without sign. The length is up to

10 digits according to value.
UINT
TO_STRx
The output is a decimal value without sign. The length is up to

5 digits depending on the value.
WORD
TO_STRx
The output is a hexadecimal value acc. to IEC, i.e.16#0000.
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
L-13
Section L
L 2.2 Conversion of REAL to INTEGER data types, TRUNC
di0025.bmp
Function
The TRUNC function converts a REAL floating-point value into a fixed
point value (INT, DINT, UINT, UDINT).
Rounding is not done, i.e. digits after the decimal point > 0 are truncated.
Since the numerical range of the REAL data type is greater than that of
the fixed-point numbers, value infringements may occur during conversion. The behavior of TRUNC functions in such cases is described below.
Output
data type
INT
Conversion
Floating point value to 16-bit value with sign.
Boundary cases:
- If REAL value > INTmax value, then Task-error message error code 1 and INT value = INTmax value.1)
- If REAL value < INTmin value, then Task-error message error code 2 and INT value = INTmin value.1)
DINT
Floating-point value to 32-bit value with sign.

Boundary cases:
- If REAL value > DINTmax value, then Task-error message error code 1 and DINT value = DINTmax value.1)
- If REAL value < DINTmin value, then Task-error message error code 2 and DINT value = DINTmin value.1)
UINT
Floating-point value to 16-bit value without sign.

Boundary cases:
- If REAL value > UINTmax value, then Task-error message error code 1 and UINT value = UINTmax value.1)
- If REAL value < UINTmin value, then Task-error message error code 2 and UINT value = 0.1)
UDINT
Floating-point value to 32-bit value without sign.

Boundary cases:
- If REAL value > UDINTmax value, then Task-error
message error code 1 and UDINT value = UDINTmax
value.1)
- If REAL value < UDINTmin value, then Task-error
message error code 2 and UDINT value = 0.1)
Display
None
None
Parameters
None
1) see Engineering Manual, Process Station, Error handling at task

level
L-14
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3 Converter / Binary Functions Blocks

L 3.1 Binary Conversion INT to CODE, INT_TO_CO
di0777.bmp
Function
This function converts the IN input alternatively to a BCD code, a Gray
code or an Aiken code and passes the result to the OUT output.
The IN input is always of the DINT data type i.e. 32 bit and the output OUT
is of data type DWORD.
Selection of the desired code and its value range is done in the parameter
setting mask.
The ERR output is set to a logic-1 signal if the number range to be converted is infringed.
Numbers with and without signs are supported for the BCD and Aiken
codes. These are the number formats:
3 decades with signs, value range -999 ... +999,
7 decades with signs, value range- 9 999 999 ... + 9 999 999,
4 decades without sign, value range 0 ... +9 999,
8 decades without signs, value range 0 .... +99 999 999.
BCD code
A decimal character is coded as a BCD number with 4 bits of value 8-4-2-1
(Tetrade = four-line binary). These tetrades are packed and filed in data
type DWORD.
Decimal-
character
BCD number 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001
The characters for the amount of the BCD coded number are contained in
the decades:
Decade 1 = One corresps. with n100,
1
Decade 2 = Ten corresps. with m10 ,
2
Decade 3 = Hundreds corresps. with o10 , etc.
L-15
Section L
Converter / Binary
Structure of decades in number format "3 decades with signs"

Bits
31...28
27...24
23...20
19...16
15...12
11...8
7...4
3...0
Tetrade
---------
---------
--------
---------
Decade
---------
---------
--------
---------
The sign () is coded in tetrade 3 (bit 15..12).

In the case of negative sign the conversion INT_TO_GO sets all bits of tetrade 3 to logic-1. Bits
16...31 are not occupied.
Conversion CO_To_INT decides on the sign by means of the leading bit in tetrade 3 (bit 15). If
this bit is logic 1, a negative sign is returned.
Example: 581 (DINT) corresponds to BCD 1111 0101 1000 0001
Structure of decades in number format "7 decades with signs"

Bits
31...28
27...24
23...20
19...16
15...12
11...8
7...4
3...0
Tetrade
Decade
The sign () is coded in tetrade 7 (bit 31....28).

In the case of negative sign the conversion INT_TO_GO sets all bits of tetrade 3 to logic-1. Bits
16...31 are not occupied.
Conversion CO_To_INT decides on the sign by means of the leading bit in tetrade 3 (bit 15). If
this bit is logic 1, a negative sign is returned.
Example: + 6 826 581 (DINT) corresponds to BCD 0000 0110 1000 0010 0110 0101 1000
0001
Structure of decades in number format "4 decades without signs"

Bits
31...28
27...24
23...20
19...16
15...12
11....8
7...4
3...0
Tetrade
---------
---------
--------
---------
Decade
---------
---------
--------
---------
Bits 16 ... 31 are not occupied.

Example: 7 581 (DINT) corresps. with BCD 0111 0101 1000 0001
L-16
Section L
Converter / Binary
Structure of decades in number format "8 decades without signs"

Bits
31...28
27...24
23...20
19...16
15...12
11...8
7...4
3...0
Tetrade
Decade
Example: 16 826 581 (DINT) corresponds to

BCD 0001 0110 1000 0010 0110 0101 1000 0001
Aiken code
A decimal character is coded as the Aiken number (also called 2.4.2.1 BCD code) with 4 bits of
significance 2-4-2-1 (Tetrade).
These tetrades are packed and filed in the data type DWORD.
Decimal
character
Aiken
number
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 1100 1101 1110 1111
For the number range the same conversions are valid as for the BCD codes
L-17
Section L
Converter / Binary
Gray code
The Gray code is a single-step binary code (reflecting code). The neighboring numbers are
differentiated only by one bit position respectively. The bits of a Gray coded number possess
no significance like those of natural binary codes. Due to the properties of the single-step arrangement it is often used for angle position transmitters or length coders. Bit 31 is used to
provide data on the direction (prefixed sign).
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
:
Binary code
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
0001 0010
0001 0011
:
Gray code
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0011
0000 0010
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 0101
0000 0100
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1111
0000 1110
0000 1010
0000 1001
0000 1001
0000 1000
0001 1000
0001 1001
0001 1011
0001 1010
:
Signed number up to 32 bit one supported.

Value range: -2 147 483 647
... +2 147 483 647
Example:
Display
None
L-18
Gray 0000 0000 0001 1001 correspds. to Decimal +17

Gray 1000 0000 0001 1001 correspds. to Decimal - 17
None
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.1.1 Parameters: Binary conversion, INT_TO_CO
di0778uk.bmp
convert to
BCD
Gray
Aiken
BCD- and
Aiken-Code
Specification of the output code

OUT output in BDC code
OUT output in Gray code
OUT output in Aiken code
Specification of BCD and Aiken code, whether with or without signs and
the number of outputted decades.
3 decades with sign,
4 decades without sign,
7 decades with sign,
8 decades without sign.
L-19
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.1.2 Function block data: Binary conversion, INT_TO_CO

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
DINT
no
RW
Enable
Signal input
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
DWORD
ERR
BOOL
no
Wcd
INT
yes
RW
Wtp
RW
L-20
INT
yes
RO
Processing state
Signal output
convert to
0 = BCD, 1 = Gray, 2 = Aiken
Tetrad
0 = 3 Tetrads with preceding sign
1 = 4 Tetrads with no preceding sign
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.2 Binary Conversion CODE to INT, CO_TO_INT
di0779.bmp
Function
This block converts alternatively the BCD, Gray or Aiken-code at the IN
input into an integer value and outputs the result to the OUT output.
The IN input is always of data type DWORD i.e. 32 bit and the OUT output
is of data type DINT.
Details of the input code (BCD, Gray, Aiken) and its value range
(3, 4, 7 or 8 decades, with or without sign) are defined in the parameter
setting mask.
The ERR output is set to a logic-1 signal if the number range to be converted is infringed.
Numbers with and without signs are supported for the BCD and Aiken
codes. These are the number formats:
3 decades with signs, value range -999 ... +999,
7 decades with signs, value range -9 999 999 ... +9 999 999,
4 decades without sign, value range 0 ... +9 999,
8 decades without signs, value range 0 .... +99 999 999.
BCD code
See function block INT_TO_CO.
Aiken code
Gray code
Display
None
None
L-21
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.2.1 Parameters: Binary conversion, CO_TO_INT
di0780uk.bmp
convert from
BCD
Gray
Aiken
BCD- and
Aiken-Code
L-22
Specification of the input code

IN input in BDC code
IN input in Gray code
IN input in Aiken code
Specification of BCD and Aiken code, whether with or without signs and
the number of outputted decades.
3 decades with sign
4 decades without sign
7 decades with sign
8 decades without sign
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.2.2 Function block data: Binary conversion, CO_TO_INT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
IN
Outputs
ENO
DWORD
no
RW
Enable
Signal input of
BOOL
no
RO
OUT
DINT
no
ERR
BOOL
no
Wcd
INT
yes
RW
Wtp
RW
INT
yes
RO
RO
Processing state
Signal output of
convert from
0 = BCD, 1 = Gray, 2 = Aiken
Tetrads
L-23
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.3 Pack functions, PBOBY, PBOWO, PBODW, PBYWO, PBYDW, PBWODW

Function
The six packing functions convert several small magnitude bit string
variables into higher magnitude bit string variables.
The modules can be varied in the number of their inputs according to the
output variables.
Packed string variables can be decoded again with the Extract and
Unpack functions.
di0706.bmp
Module
PBOBY
PBOWO
PBODW
PBYWO
PBYDW
PBWODW
Description
Packing of up to 8 BOOL variables into one BYTE variable.
Pack max. 16 BOOL variables into one WORD variable.
Pack max. 32 BOOL variables into one DWORD variable.
Pack max. 2 BYTE variables into one WORD variable.
Pack max. 4 BYTE variables into one DWORD variable.
Pack max. 2 WORD variables into one DWORD variable.
Unoccupied inputs are weighted as bit string value 0 within the module.
Display
None
L-24
None
Parameters
None
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.4 Extract type to type, EXTCT
di0711.bmp
Function
The Extract function extracts a bit string variable of a smaller magnitude
from a bit-string variable of a greater magnitude.
The data types of the input and output can be switched so that the various
bit string formats can be extracted.
A further input of the INT data type determines which part bit string is to
send information from the input variable to the output. Entry of 1 denotes
the first part bit string and 2 the second part bit string etc.
In the event of value-range undershooting the first partial-bit string is
passed on and the last partial-bit string in the case of overshooting.
The following functions are available:
Data type
Input
BYTE
WORD
Output
BOOL
BYTE
WORD
DWORD
BOOL
WORD
DWORD
BYTE
DWORD
BOOL
Display
None
Description
Extract a BOOL from a BYTE variable.
Extract a BYTE bit string from a WORD
variable.
Extract a BOOL from a WORD variable.
Extract a WORD bit string from a WORD
variable.
Extract a BYTE bit string from a DWORD
variable.
Extract a BOOL from a DWORD variable.
None
Parameters
None
L-25
Section L
Converter / Binary
L 3.5 Unpack functions, UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY, UPDWBY, UPDWWO

Function
These unpack functions convert bit string variables into bit data types with
a short bit width. For example, the bit string variable generated with pack
functions PBOBY, PBOWO, etc. can be resolved into its bits again.
Five blocks are available with which all combinations can be covered, or if
necessary two function blocks can be used one after the other.
The IN inputs are dependent on the function block of data type BYTE,
WORD or DWORD, and the outputs O00 ... O15 are dependent on data
type BOOL, BYTE or WORD.
The following functions are available:
Function
di0781.bmp
UPBYBO
UPWOBO
UPWOBY
UPDWBY
UPDWWO
Conversion
Data type
IN
from BYTE to BOOL
BYTE
from WORD to BOOL
WORD
from WORD to BYTE
WORD
from DWORD to BYTE DWORD
from DWORD to WORD DWORD
Oxx
BOOL
BOOL
BYTE
BYTE
WORD
The function UPWOBO is displayed and described on behalf of the five

functions.
Only the name and if necessary short and long texts have to be entered in
the respective parameter setting masks.
Display
None
L-26
None
Section L
L 3.5.1
Converter / Binary
Parameters: Unpack functions UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY, UPDWBY,

UPDWWO
di0782uk.bmp
No parameter entries apart from header data.
L 3.5.2
Function block data: Unpack functions UPBYBO, UPWOBO, UPWOBY,

UPDWBY, UPDWWO
Name
Inputs
EN
IN
Outputs
ENO
O00 ... O(01,03)15
Data
type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable
Signal input
DWORD/ no
DINT/
BYTE/
WORD
RW
BOOL
no
RO
BOOL/
BYTE/
WORD
no
RO
Processing state
Signal output
L-27
Section L
Converter / Date + Time
L 4 Converter / Date + Time Blocks

L 4.1 Pack Function for Data Type DT, P_DT
Function
This function converts the individual components of date and time (year,
month, day, hour, minute, second, millisecond) into DT data type. The range
of conversion is from 01.01.1984 to 31.12.2099.
The inputs are of the INT data type and have the following ranges:
di0707.bmp
Input
YEA
MON
DAY
HOU
MIN
SEC
MS
1984
1
1
0
0
0
0
Range
year
month
day
hour
minute
second
millisec.
2099
12
28/29/30/31
23
59
59
999
The minimum value is presumed in the case of unoccupied inputs and if a

value range is infringed the minimum or maximum value is limited.
Display
None
L-28
None
Section L
L 4.1.1 Parameters: Pack function for data type DT, P_DT
di0708uk.bmp
No parameter entries apart from the header data.
L 4.1.2 Function block data: Pack function for data type DT, P_DT
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
YEA
MON
DAY
HOU
MIN
SEC
MS
Outputs
ENO
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Enable
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Millisecond
BOOL
no
RO
DT
DT
no
RO
Processing state
Date/time
L-29
Section L
L 4.2 Unpack Function for Data Type DT, UP_DT

Function
This function converts the value of data type DT into its individual
components (year, month, day, hour, minute, second, millisecond).
Additionally, the corresponding weekday of the input variable is outputted at
output DOW. Thereby INT value 0 denotes Sunday and value 6 Saturday.
The input variables value range is not undershot; the value 0 returns the value 01.01.1970 to the outputs.
di0709.bmp
The respective maximum values are outputted in the event of overshooting.

YEA
MON
DAY
HOU
MIN
SEC
MS
Display
None
L-30
1984
12
31
23
59
59
999
None
Section L
L 4.2.1 Parameters: Unpack function for data type DT, UP_DT
di0710uk.bmp
L 4.2.2 Function block data: Unpack function for data type DT, UP_DT
Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
DT
Outputs
ENO
DT
no
RW
Enable
Date/time
BOOL
no
RO
YEA
MON
DOW
DAY
HOU
MIN
SEC
MS
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
Processing state
Year
Month
Weekday (0 = Sunday,..., 6 = Saturday)
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Millisecond
L-31
Section L
L 4.3 Local Time to Summer Time, LT_TO_DST

Function
The DT variable of LocalTime (standard time) at input LT is converted to
DaylightSavingTime (summer time). The conversion is based on the
configured Daylight Saving Time (see Engineering Manual, Process
Station, Summer and Winter time Daylight Saving Time).
di0712.bmp
The summer time is outputted as the result at output DST. It can be seen
from output DSO whether summer time applies, the output is at the logic-1
signal if this is the case.
The output ERR is logic 1, if the configured Daylight Saving Time is incorrect or if input LT is larger than the last entry.
Display
None
L-32
None
Section L
L 4.3.1 Parameters: Local time to summer time, LT_TO_DST
di0713uk.bmp
L 4.3.2 Function block data: Local time to summer time, LT_TO_DST

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
LT
Outputs
ENO
DT
no
RW
Enable
LocalTime
BOOL
no
RO
DST
DSO
DT
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO
ERR
BOOL
no
RO
Processing state
Summer time (DaylightSavingTime)
Summer time active (DaylightSavingTime
On)
L-33
Section L
L 4.4 Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT
di0714.bmp
Function
This function converts a date variable in summer-time format to local time
and makes it available to output LT. The conversion of the DT variables
residing at input DST is carried out in conjunction with the configured
summer time (see Engineering Manual, Process Station, Commissioning, Summer time). This conversion is automatically performed in the
correct time range.
At the transition time from summer time to winter time (one hour time difference) the DSO input determines whether the DT variable at the DST input is still summer time or already winter time.
Example: End of summer time

DSO input
Logical 1 signal
Logical 1 signal
Logical 0 signal
Logical 0 signal
Logical 0 signal
DST input
02:00
02:30
02:00
02:30
03:00
LT output
01:00
01:30
02:00
02:30
03:00
The output ERR will be set to logical 1 signal if:

the configured summer-time contains errors internally,
the time to be converted lies beyond the end of the summer-time (last entry), or if the time of the DT variable at the DST input does not correspond
to the value at the DSO input.
Display
None
L-34
None
Section L
L 4.4.1 Parameters: Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT
di0715uk.bmp
L 4.4.2 Function block data: Summer time to local time, DST_TO_LT

Name
Inputs
EN
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
DST
DSO
DT
BOOL
no
no
RW
RW
Enable
Summer time (DaylightSavingTime)
Summer time active (DaylightSavingTime
On)
Outputs
ENO
BOOL
no
RO
LT
ERR
DT
BOOL
no
no
RO
RO
Processing state
LocalTime
L-35
Constants
Section M
Constants
Contents
M 1
Overview of Function Block Constants ........................................................ M-5
M
M
M
M
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
Constants, CSTBO, ...... , CSTWO.................................................................. M-6

Parameters: Constants without scaling............................................................. M-7
Parameters: Constants with scaling.................................................................. M-8
Function block data: Constants, CSTBO, ..... , CSTWO................................... M-9
M 3
M 3.1
String Constants, CSTSTR8, ...... , CSTSTR256 ......................................... M-10

Parameters: String constants, String constants,
CSTSTR8, ..... , CSTSTR256 ......................................................................... M-11
Function block data: String constants, CSTSTR8, ..... , CSTSTR256 ............ M-12
M 3.2
M-3
Section M
Constants
M 1 Overview of Function Block Constants

CSTBO
CSTBY
CSTDI
CSTDT
CSTDW
CSTIN
CSTRE
CSTTI
CSTUD
CSTUI
CSTWO
CSTSTR8
CSTSTR16
CSTSTR32
CSTSTR64
CSTSTR128
CSTSTR256
BOOL constant
BYTE constant
DINT constant
DT constant
DWORD constant
INT constant
REAL constant
TIME constant
UDINT constant
UINT constant
WORD constant
STR8 constant
STR16 constant
STR32 constant
STR64 constant
STR128 constant
STR256 constant
M-5
Section M
Constants
M 2 Constants, CSTBO, ...... , CSTWO

Function
The blocks are used for entering constants which can be modified via
DigiVis.
An assigned block is available for each data type.
The constant blocks for numerical value inputs feature scaling.
di0072.bmp
CSTBO
CSTBY
CSTDI
CSTDT
CSTDW
CSTIN
CSTRE
CSTTI
CSTUD
CSTUI
CSTWO
Enter false or true

Enter a byte
Enter dual integer with sign
Enter date and time
Enter dual-word value
Enter integer
Enter floating point value
Enter time value
Enter dual integer value without sign
Enter integer value without sign
Enter word value
Scaling
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
Display
Name, short text and value of the constants.
The function has a small faceplate ( display height).
Change the constant value per entry. For the blocks CSTDI, CSTIN,
CSTRE, CSTTI, CSTUD and CSTUI entry can also be effected via sliders.
M-6
Section M
Constants
M 2.1 Parameters: Constants without scaling
di0666uk.bmp
Data type
Constant
Access
for BOOL data False or True,

otherwise numerical value in the respective data format
Numerical value cannot be modified via DigiVis
Numerical value can be modified via DigiVis
M-7
Section M
Constants
M 2.2 Parameters: Constants with scaling
di0794uk.bmp
Data type
Constant
Access
Numerical value in the resp. data format,

Numerical value cannot be modified via DigiVis
Numerical value can be modified via DigiVis.
Scale
Scale start
Scale start, enter in the respective format,
Scale end
Scale end, enter in the respective format.
M-8
Section M
Constants
M 2.3 Function block data: Constants, CSTBO, ..... , CSTWO

Name
Input
EN
Outputs
ENO
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable
BOOL
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Output
RW
no Acc.
Constant value
Access constant
RW
RW
Scale start
Scale end
OUT
Acc. to type
no
KVal
Acc. to type yes
Lk
BOOL
yes
Only for Constants with scaling
Ska
Acc. to type yes
Ske
Acc. to type yes
M-9
Section M
Constants
M 3 String Constants, CSTSTR8, ...... , CSTSTR256

Function
The blocks are used to display and enter character strings. These strings
can be visualized in a one- or several-line format.
Since the blocks differ only with respect to the output data types and the
number of characters, only block CSTSTR8 is described.
The following string constants are available:
di0783.bmp
Block
Data type
CSTSTR8
CSTSTR16
CSTSTR32
CSTSTR64
CSTSTR128
CSTSTR256
STRING8
STRING16
STRING32
STRING64
STRING128
STRING256
max. number of characters

8
16
32
64
128
256
The outputs of these blocks together with their string data formats can
be processed with other blocks (e.g. comparator functions, selector
functions, convert functions).
These character strings can be used e.g.:
- to supply coupled alphanumeric input/output units,
- to output alphanumeric displays in the free graphic under DigiVis
- to enter alphanumeric text within DigiVis,
- for logging alphanumeric data in the operating log.
The IEC character set is supported. This includes all characters from
the ISO646 Table 1 "Basic Code Table", columns 3 to 7. Also lowercase letters.
Non-printing characters such as e.g. line feed are denoted by the dollar
sign $ and are entered as hexadecimal characters.
Example:
$0D$0A
corresponds to 2 characters,
0D = carriage return and
0A = line feed.
Other examples of the non-printing characters acc. to IEC are:

$$
$
$P or $p
$L or $l
$R or $r
$N or $n
M-10
Dollar sign,
Superscript,
Form feed,
Line feed or $0A
Carriage return or $0D,
New line, end current line, begin at start of next
line,
Section M
$T or $t
Constants
Tab,
With non-proportional script, forwarding is effected to the column that can
be divided by 8, and to the next 2 cm limit with proportional script.
Characters denoted by $ are not interpreted in the faceplates but are displayed in the form entered, e.g. $AB for .
The characters known from IEC are abbreviated acc. e.g. $0A is displayed as $L.
Display
Name, short text and text of the constants. The block CSTSTR8 is displayed in a small
faceplate ( display height). For the blocks CSTSTR16, CSTSTR32, CSTSTR128 and
CSTSTR256, one faceplate is required in each case.
Entry and modification of texts.
M 3.1 Parameters: String constants, String constants, CSTSTR8, ..... , CSTSTR256
di0784uk.bmp
Data type: STRING8

Constant
Enter the character, max. 8 characters in the STR8 format.
Access
Entry in DigiVis is possible,

no entry in DigiVis.
M-11
Section M
Constants
M 3.2 Function block data: String constants, CSTSTR8, ..... , CSTSTR256

Name
Input
EN
Outputs
ENO
Data type
Conf.
Acc.
Comment
BOOL
yes
RW
Enable
BOOL
no
RO
RO
Processing state
Output
RW
no Acc.
Constant
Access constant
OUT
Acc. to type
no
KVal
Acc. to type yes
Lk
BOOL
yes
M-12
System Functions
Section N
System Functions
Contents
N 1
Overview of System Functions ...........................................................................N-5
N 2
Force cold start, FCS............................................................................................N-5
N 3
Force redundancy toggle, PRIM/SEC .................................................................N-6
N-3
Section N
System Functions
N 1 Overview of System Functions

FCS
PRIM/SEC
Force cold start

Force redundancy toggle
Block inputs and outputs are not named.
N 2 Force cold start, FCS
di0801.bmp
Function
When there is a logical 1 signal at the input, this function performs a cold start
of the process station. The output is not involved. Both the input and the output are of data type BOOL.
This function can be used in the warm start task to execute a cold start under
circumstances that can be specified by the user.
Display
none
Operator actions
none
N-5
Section N
System Functions
N 3 Force redundancy toggle, PRIM/SEC
bo001.bmp
Function
On a redundant process station this function performs a redundancy toggle of
the process station when there is a logical 1 signal at the input. This functions mode of operation is level-driven, i.e. the trigger variable must be reset
after the redundancy has been transferred. Otherwise, every computation
performed by the system will trigger a redundancy toggle.
On a process station with no redundancy this function will not have any effect.
The output is not involved here, and remains constantly set to 0.
Both the input and the output are of data type BOOL.
Display
none
Operator actions
none
N-6
Abbreviations
Section V
Abbreviations
Contents
V 1
Function and Function Blocks ............................................................................ V-5
V 2
Functionblock Inputs and Outputs ................................................................... V-11
V 3
Message Types / Limit Types ............................................................................ V-19
V-3
Section V
Abbreviations
V 1 Function and Function Blocks

Name
Comment
Blocks
A
ABS
ABSolute value function
ACOS
trigonometric funktion Arc COSine
ADD
ADDition function
Arithmetic / Basic arithmetic
AI_TR
Analog Input TRansformation
Analog
AI_TRT
Analog Input TRansformation Transient
Analog
AND
logic AND function
Standard / Logic
AO_TR
Analog Output TRansformation
Analog
ASIN
trigonometric function Arc SINe
ATAN
trigonometric function Arc TANgent
AVER
delivers AVERage of up to 10 analogs signals
C_ANA
set point Controller ANAlog function
Analog
C_CR
Controller, Continuous Ratio
Controller
C_CS
Controller, Continuous Standard
Controller
C_CU
Controller, Continuous Universal
Controller
C_OS
Controller, On/off Standard
Controller
C_OU
Controller, On/off Universal
Controller
C_PS
Controller, Position Standard
Controller
C_PU
Controller, Position Universal
Controller
C_SR
Controller, Step Ratio
Controller
C_SS
Controller, Step Standard
Controller
C_SU
Controller, Step Universal
Controller
CO_TO_INT
COde TO INTger
Converter / Binary conversion
COS
trigonometric function COSine
CSTBO
input of ConSTant BOOL
Constant
CSTBY
input of ConSTant BYTE
Constant
CSTDI
input of ConSTant DINT
Constant
CSTDW
input of ConSTant DWORD
Constant
CSTDT
input of ConSTant DATEandTIME
Constant
CSTIN
input of ConSTant INT
Constant
V-5
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
CSTRE
input of ConSTant REAL
Constant
CSTSTR8
input of ConSTant STR8
Constant
CSTSTR16
Constant
CSTSTR32
Constant
CSTSTR64
Constant
CSTSTR128
Constant
CSTSTR256
Constant
CSTTI
input of ConSTant TIME
Constant
CSTUD
input of ConSTant UDINT
Constant
CSTUI
input of ConSTant UINT
Constant
CSTWO
input of ConSTant WORD
Constant
CT_ANA
CounTer with ANAlog input
Analog
CT_LT
CounTer of operating Long Time
Binary
CT_P
CounTer of Pulse input
Binary
CTT
CounTer of Time
Binary
CTUD
CounTer Up and Down
Binary
DEADB
DEAD Band
Standard / Basic functions
DELAY
DELAY function
Analog
DIFF
DIFFerentiation
DISLOG
DISturbance course LOG acquisition Acquisition
DIV
DIVision function
DOS
DOSing circuit
Open-loop control
DOS_A
DOSing circuit with Analog input
Open-loop control
DOS_E
Extended DOSing circuit
Open-loop control
DST_TO_LT
Daylight Saving Time TO Local Time Converter / DT conversion
E
EQ
function EQual
EVENT
EVENT message
Monitoring
EXP
EXPonent
Arithmetic / Logarithms
EXTCT
EXTraCT type to type
F_TRIG
Falling flank TRIGgering of pulse
Standard / Flank recognition
FAC_D
Frequency/Analog Converter with

Distance
Binary
V-6
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
FCS
Force Cold Start
System functions
FF
function "Flip-Fliop"
Standard / Switches
GE
function "Greater or Equal"
GT
function "Greater Than"
H
HORN
HORN
Monitoring
HYST
HYSTeresis
IDF_1
sIngle Drive Function for unidirectional 1 units
Open-loop control
IDF_2
sIngle Drive Function for bidirectional Open-loop control

2 units
IDF_A
Individual Drive Function for Actuators
Open-loop control
INT_TO_CO
INTeger_TO_COde
INTEG
INTEGrator
L
LD_LG
LeaD LaG filter
Analog
LE
function "Less than Equal"
LIMIT
LIMITer of analog value
LIN
LINearization function
Analog
LN
Natural Logarithm
LOG
common LOGarithm
LT
function "Less Than"
LT_TO_DST
Local Time TO Daylight Saving Tme Converter / DT conversion
M
M_ANA
Monitoring of ANAlog value
Monitoring
M_BAV
Monitoring of Binary AntiValence
Monitoring
M_BIN
Monitoring of BINary value
Monitoring
M_BOUT
Monitoring of Binary OUTput
Binary
M_CONN
Monitoring of CONNection
Monitoring
M_GEN
GENeral Monitoring
Monitoring
M_SOE
Monitoring of Sequence Of Events
Monitoring
V-7
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
MAX
delivers MAXimum of up to 10 analog signals
MIN
delivers MINimum of up to 10 analog Standard / Statistic

signals
MOD
division MODulo function
Arithmetic/ Basic arithmetic
MONO_F
MONOFlop function
Binary
MUL
MULtiplication function
MUX
MUltipleXer of up to 10 signals
Standard / Switches
N
NE
function "Not Equal"
NOT
NegaTiOn of binary signal
Standard / Logic
NRT
N-th RooT
OF3
selectiOn oF three (3)
OR
logic OR function
Standard / Logic
P
P_DT
Pack year/day/time to DT-Typ
Converter / DT conversion
PBOBY
Pack BOOL to BYTE
PBODW
Pack BOOL to DWORD
PBOWO
Pack BOOL to WORD
PBYDW
Pack BYTE to DWORD
PBYWO
Pack BYTE to WORD
POW
POWer function
PRIM/SEC
PRIMary/SECondary switch
System
PWODW
Pack WORD to DWORD
R_TRIG
Rising flank TRIGgering of pulse
Standard / Flank recognition
RLIMIT
Rate of change LIMITer
ROL
ROtate bit Left function
Standard / Bit-shift operation
ROR
ROtate bit Rigth function
S
S_CONCAT
String CONCATe
Standard / String functions
S_DEL
String DELete part
S_FIND
String FIND
V-8
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
S_H
Sample & Hold
S_INS
String INSert
S_LEFT
String LEFT part
S_LEN
String LENght
S_MID
String MID Part
S_REPL
String REPLace part
S_RIGHT
String RIGHT part
SCAL
change SCALing of analog value
Analog
SEL
SELector switch between 2 signals
Standard / Switches
SGN
SiGNum function
SHL
SHift bit Left function
SHR
SHift bit Rigth function
SIN
trigonometric function SINe
SPLIT
SPLIT range
SQRT
SQuare RooT function
SR_RNDEV
SR - Receive DEVice module
Send and Receive
SR_RNVW
SR - Receive device VieW module
Send and Receive
SR_SNDEV
SR - Send DEVice module
Send and Receive
SR_SNVW
SR - Send device VieW module
Send and Receive
SR_URECV
SR - RECeiVe module
Send and Receive
SR_USEND
SR - SEND module
Send and Receive
SUB
SUBtraction function
TAN
trigonometric function TANgens
TAVER
delivers AVERage of Time signal

over a specified period
Analog
TDEAD
DEAD Time function
Analog
TFILT
Analog FILTer in Time
Analog
TIMER
TIMER with external Input
Binary
TLIMIT
LIMITer of Time
TMAX
delivers MAXimum of Time over a

specified period
Analog
TMIN
delivers MINimum of Time over a

specified period
Analog
TO_BO
conversion Data type TO BOOL
Converter / Data type conversion
TO_BY
conversion Data type TO BYTE

V-9
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
TO_IN
conversion Data type TO INT
TO_UI
conversion Data type TO UINT
TO_DI
conversion Data type TO DINT
TO_UD
conversion Data type TO UDINT
TO_WO
conversion Data type TO WORD
TO_DW
conversion Data type TO DWORD
TO_RE
conversion Data type TO REAL
TO_TI
conversion Data type TO TIME
TO_DT
conversion Data type TO Date&Time Converter / Data type conversion
TO_STR8
conversion Data type TO STRing8
TO_STR16
TO_STR32
TO_STR64
TO_STR128
conversion Data type TO STRing128 Converter / Data type conversion
TO_STR256
conversion Data type TO STRing256 Converter / Data type conversion
TOF
Timer with OF-delay
Binary
TON
Timer with ON-delay
Binary
TONOF
Timer with ON/OF-delay
Binary
TOUCH
binary key-TOUCH
Binary
TR
function TRigger
Standard / Switches
TREND
function for TREND acquisition
Acquisition
TRUNC
conversion FLOAT-format to
INTEGER-formats, TRunC
TS
Time Scheduler function
Analog
TUNE
SelfTUNE
Controller
UP_DT
UNpack Date and Time
Converter / DT conversion
UPBYBO
UNpack BYTE to BOOL
UPDWBY
UNpack DWORD to BYTE
UPDWWO
UNpack DWORD to WORD
UPWOBO
UNpack WORD to BOOL
UPWOBY
UNpack WORD to BYTE
logic eXklusive OR
Standard / Logic
X
XOR
V-10
Section V
Abbreviations
V 2 Functionblock Inputs and Outputs

Inputs
Outputs
Analog
Analog
Binary
Binary
Controller
Controller
Acquisition
Acquisition
Monitoring
Monitoring
Open-loop control
Open-loop control
i5
Standard Switches
I5
Standard Switches
i6
Standard Flank
I6
Standard Flank
i7
Standard Basic functions
I7
Standard Basic funktions
j5
Arithmetic Limiter
J5
Arithmetic Limiter
m2
Converter Binary
M2
Converter Binary
m3
Converter DT
M3
Converter DT
Constant
Constant
Name
Comment
Blocks
AB
Active Bias
AR
Active Ratio
ASP
Actual Set Point
AT
Actual Time
BIA
input of BIAs
c,e
BV
Basic Value
CD
Coefficient Derivative
e,i7
CE
Control Error
CLK
CLocK
i6
CP
Correction Proportionality constant
CTC
CounTer Current
C,D,H
CTP
CounTer Period
C,D,H
V-11
Section V
Name
Abbreviations
Comment
Blocks
DAY
DAY
m3,M3
DB
Dead Band
i7
DE
Disturbance End
DGO
Disable Gradient Output
DGS
Disable Gradient Set point
DIS
DISable
g,i5
DM
Disable Manual
DON
Disable ON
DOW
Day On Week
M3
DSO
Daylight Saving time On
m3,M3
DST
Disable STop
DST
Daylight Saving Time
m3,M3
DT
Date and Time
m3,M3
DTB
DisTurBance variable Z
DV
Default Value
DVH
Default Value High
DVL
Default Value Low
EN
ENable of functionblock
c,d,e,f,g,h,i5,i6,i7,j5,m2,m3,n,
ENO
ENable Output of functionblock
C,D,E,F,G,H,I5,I6,I7,J5,M2,M3,N
ERR
ERRor of functionblock
C,D,E,F,G,H,I7,J5,,M2,M3,
ET
Elapsed Time
ETP
Elapsed Time Period
ETS
Elapsed Time Step
FB
Feed Back
FB0
Feed Back Input 0
FB1
Feed Back Input 1
FBF
Feed Back Failure
FEP
Failure End Position
FL
Failure Leakage
FLT
FauLT
FRT
Failure Run Time
V-12
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
FTQ
Failure TorQue
G
GS0
Gain Schedule OFF
GS1
Gain Schedule ON
HOU
HOUr
m3,M3
H
HRN
output HoRN
HYH
HYsteresis High limit
i7
HYL
HYsteresis Low limit
i7
IL0
InterLocking 0
IL1
InterLocking 1
IN
INput
c,d,f,g,h,i7,j5,m2
IN0
INput 0
IN1
INput 1
f,g,h,i7
IN2
INput 2
f,g,i7
IN3
INput 3
f,i7
IN4
INput 4
IN5
INput 5
IN6
INput 6
IND
Nput Down
INU
INput Up
L1
Limit 1
c,d,e,g
L2
Limit 2
c,d,e,g
L3
Limit 3
e,g
L4
Limit 4
e,g
LH
Limit High crossed
LL
Limit Low crossed
LO1
Limit Output 1
LO2
Limit Output 2
LO3
Limit Output 3
LO4
Limit Output 4
LOC
LOCal
V-13
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
LR
Local Reset
LS
Local Set
LT
Local Time
m3,M3
MA
Mode Automatc aktivieren
c,d,e,h
MDD
Mode Disable Differential
MDI
Mode Disable Integrator
ME
Mode Extern
c,d,e
MI
Mode Intern
c,d,e
MIN
MINute
m3,M3
MM
Mode Manual
c,d,e,h
MNT
MaNTisse
k, K
MON
MONth
m2,M2
MR
Mode Ratio
MR
Mode Run
MRE
Mode Ratio Extern
MRI
Mode Ratio Intern
MRS
Mode Run Stop
MS
MilliSecond
m3,M3
MS
Mode Stop
MSP
Mode Set Point
Number of Steps
O00..O15
Output 00...15
M2
OAV
Output AVerage
OB
Output Binary
OB1
Output Binary 1
OB2
Output Binary 2
OBV
Output Basic Value
ODT
Output Dead Time
OFL
OverFLow
C,D
OH
Output value Y High
OL
Output value Y Low
N
NS
V-14
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
OMN
Output MiNimum
OMX
Output MaXimum
ON
Output Negative
OP
Operation Point
i7
OP
Output Positive
OPT
Output Pre Threshold value
OSO
Output Switch-Off value
OSP
Offset Set Point
OT
Output Track
OTA
Output value Tracking Automatic
OTM
Output value Tracking Manuall
OUT
OUTput
C,D,E,I7,J5, M2,N
OU1
OUt 1
C,H,I7
OU2
OUt 2
C,H,I7
OV
Output Visual
P
PCP
Program Cycles Passed
PCY
No. of Program CYles
PIV
Process Input Variable
POF
Program OF
PON
Program ON
PR
PReset Value
PR
PRotection
PR0
PRotection 0
PR1
PRotection 1
PS
Protocol Status
PSC
Program SCroll
PSK
Program SKip
PST
Program STop
PTV
Pre Threshold Value
PV
Process Variable X
output Q
I5,I6
QN
output Q Negative
I5
V-15
Section V
Name
Abbreviations
Comment
Blocks
Reset
i5
R
RAT
input of RATio
c,e
RC
Rate of Change
RES
RESet
c,d,h,i6,i7
RV
Ratio Value
Set
i5
S1
State output 1
I7
S2
State output 2
I7
S3
State output 3
I7
SAI
State Acknoledge Incoming message
SAO
State Acknoledge Outgoing message
SCD
State Coarse Dosing
SCN
State Carry Negative
SCO
State COnnection
SCP
State Carry Positiv
SCV
SChedule Value
SD
State Differentiation
I7
SEC
SECond
m3,M3
SEN
Set ENable
SFB
State Feed Back
SFD
State Fine Dosing
SH
Sample&Hold
i7
SH
State High
SIE
State set point Intern / Extern
C,D,E
SL
State Low
SL1
State Limit 1
C,D,E,G
SL2
State Limit 2
C,D,E,G
SL3
State Limit 3
E,G
SL4
State Limit 4
E,G
SMA
State Manual / Automatic
C,D,E,H
SMO
State Message Output
SMR
State Meassure Range
SOV
Switch-Off Value
V-16
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
SP
Set Point
SR
State Ratio
SR
State Run
SR1
Split Range point 1
i7
SR2
Split Range point 2
i7
SRC
State Rate of Change
SRE
State Ratio Extern
SRS
State Run Stop
SRT
State Run Time
SSO
State Stop Output
ST
Step Time
STA
STAte error
C,E,F,G,H,I7
STR
State TRack
STS
Self Tune State
SWB
State Wire Break
TIME
c,d
Time of integration
i7
TC
Time Current
TD
Time Derivative constant
e,i7
TLT
FauLT
TP
Tune Parameter
TQ0
TorQue 0
TQ1
TorQue 1
TR
Time Reset
TRC
TRaCking Y
TRG
TRiGger input
f, g
TS
Time Set
TSP
External Time Stamp for message
User Parameter
Message VALue
U
UP
V
VAL
V-17
Section V
Name
Abbreviations
Comment
Blocks
YEAr
m3,M3
Y
YEA
V-18
Section V
Abbreviations
V 3 Message Types / Limit Types

C
Analog
Binary
Controller
Monitoring
Open-loop control
Name
Comment
Blocks
B
BINARY
Message type for binary states
BREAK
Message type for wire break
DHh
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per hour h)
DHHh
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per hour h)
DHHm
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per minute m)
DHHs
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per second s)
DHm
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per minute m)
DHs
Limit type for rate of change overrun (Change per second s)
DLh
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per hour h)
DLLh
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per hour h)
DLLm
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per minute m)
DLLs
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per second s)
DLm
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per minute m)
DLs
Limit type for rate of change underrun (Change per second s)
END_POS
Message type for end position failure
G, H
ERROR
Message type for fault
G, H
Message type for run time error
G, H
Limit type for overrun
C, D, E, G,
F
FLT_TIME
H
H
V-19
Section V
Abbreviations
Name
Comment
Blocks
H
H_CE
Limit type for control difference overrun
H_R
Limit type for ratio limit overrun
HH
Limit type for overrun
C, D, E, G
HH_CE
Limit type for control difference overrun
HH_R
Limit type for ratio limit overrun
Limit type for underrun
C, D, E
L_CE
Limit type for control difference underrun
L_R
Limit type for ratio limit underrun
LH
Message type for limit underrun/overrun
C, G
LH_CE
Limit type for absolute value of control difference
LL
Limit type for underrun
C, D, E, G
LL_CE
Limit type for control difference underrun
LL_R
Limit type for ratio limit underrun
LOC_OP.
Message type for local intervention
G, H
Message type for safety intervention
G, H
TIME
Message type for TIMER function blocks
D, G
TORQUE
Message type for blockage
G, H
Message type for use in User Function Blocks
P
PROTECT.
U
USER
V-20
Glossary
Section W
Glossary
Access
Parameters from function blocks and preconfigured displays that either

authorize or prevent certain sizes, values or actions for the user.
Acknowledge level
The acknowledge level determines how events or messages on an operator

station have to be acknowledged: 1) incoming and outgoing; 2) incoming only;
3) no acknowledgment.
Alarm
An alarm is an event at a point of measurement or in the system with an associated message at the operator station.
Allocate
The trends and logs run on an operator station. This means that they are displayed and archived on the operator station. However, the data they require
are captured at the process station. For this purpose an acquisition module is
configured in the D-PS resource.
Basic value
Configurable start value for a counter function block.
Baud rate
Unit for measuring transmission speed in bits/s; a parameter of function blocks

that support the connection of Freelance 2000 to external bus systems (e.g.
function block Modbus Master).
Bias
Additive constant for the weighting adjuster or the ratio set point. In the case of
a constant, the value can be altered through operator action.
Block
The term block is used in the documentation when referring to a function

and/or a function block.
Block type
Identical to the tag type. The block type forms a short description of the block in
the library.
Caption
Name and short description of block and, if appropriate, number of the parameter display in which the operator is currently working.
Characteristic curve
Standard characteristic curves for converting thermal voltages or thermal resistances can be selected for the linearisation function block. A user-defined
characteristic curve with 32 points of coincidence can also be entered.
Class
A group of data sets or in Freelance 2000 a group of function blocks sharing

the same characteristics.
Classifying
The entry of values (parameters) in a fixed configuration on the engineering

station or operator station.
Coil
The telegram structure for Modbus transmission is implemented in registers

(WORD) or coils (BOOL). A coil may be either 8 or 16 BOOLs in length.
Colors
The colors that cannot be changed through the Windows interface can be set
individually in DigiTool in the project tree and the program editors.
W-3
Section W
Glossary
Configure
Engineering station operating mode in which user programs can be configured

or modified. Configuration can be carried out in the absence of an on-line link
to a Freelance 2000 process station. See also commissioning.
Constant
Constants can be assigned directly in IL and FBD programs. Depending on the

data type, this is done by entering the numeric values in the operands column
in IL and in the allocation bar in FBD. * Variable.
Constant block
If it is intended that the user should be allowed to alter constants, a constant

block should be configured.
Continuous controller
Continuous controllers that output a signal to the final control element continuously.
Correct (1)
Correcting (patching) is used to change the parameters for the selected tag
during commissioning. In contrast with writing, the changed parameters are
saved in the project.
Correct (2)
The state Correct is only assigned if no errors have been detected in the project tree or program when running plausibility checks on the selected project
objects. A program object cannot be loaded into a station unless it has passed
a plausibility check.
D-action
The differential connection or even derivative action has the effect that not only
the controlled variable or process value is injected into the controller input, but
also its rate of change.
D-action of
Parameter specifying whether the D-action is calculated from the controlled

variable (X) or from the control difference (XD).
Data format
The data format specifies how a data type is displayed in the operation interface, i.e. how many places before and after the decimal point (e.g. fff.ff for
340.05).
Data type
Data types are assigned to variables either directly in the program or through a
variable declaration in the variable list. Along with the basic data types such as
REAL or BOOL, user-defined data types can also be set up (structured variables).
Default value
Configurable, fixed default value in REAL format which, when the process signal is overstepped or understepped, is transferred through an analog input
converter.
Delay time
Delay time is entered in TIME format, e.g. T#10s.
Derivative gain
The amount by which the derivative gain KV raises the complete D-action of a
controller.
Dialog box
The dialog box is used to display messages or hints to facilitate both configuration and operation tasks.
W-4
Section W
Glossary
Dimension
The physical units used in displays. Can be entered directly or selected

through a selection window.
Disturbance course log
The disturbance course log is one of the state logs. It is used for logging
chronological sequences of selected analog and binary variables.
Disturbance course log

acquisition
Function block that records in the process station the values of up to 6 variables from a start point onwards and passes these values to the operator station.
Disturbance variable
The value that helps to smooth out undesirable jumps in the process value.
Dosing circuit
Pre configured function block for dosing quantities of process components.
Edit
DigiTool menu through which fields, objects or programs are edited. It includes
functions like calling programs or displays, general parameters, inserting,
copying or deleting fields or objects.
Error message
An error is reported if the system has encountered an error in the user program. In this case a system error message is generated with a message priority of 0.
Event
An event triggers a message or a control action.
Event function block
The name of the event function block that starts a logging process.
Execution mode
Default operating mode that is used when the program is loaded for this function block.
Exit
The menu choice Exit is used for leaving the current editor.
External
Controller operating mode in which the set point is supplied from the user program.
Fault message
Messages of priority 1 (red), 2 (yellow) and 3 (orange) for showing faults such
as violations of limit values in the operation interface.
FBD program
An FBD program is a program created using the Function Block Diagram.
Field Controller
A Field Controller is a compact station for interfacing field buses. It consists of

the controller and up to four field bus modules. The CPU of the Field Controller
executes the processing of the programs configured under the D-FC resource.
Function
When a function is executed it returns a single data item. Functions do not hold
any state information. Each time a function is called with the same arguments
(input parameters) it therefore always returns the same result (output parameter).
Function key
The function keys (F1 - F12) form a standard part of the keyboard, and some of
them have standard functions assigned to them.
W-5
Section W
Glossary
Graphic display
Configurable logging of system errors, error messages, switch messages, operator instructions and operator actions with attributes such as time and, in
some cases, acknowledgment.
Group display
A group display is a combination of several faceplates. It provides the user with

the opportunity to display related tags in the same display. After a displayed
faceplate has been selected, the corresponding tag can then be operated.
Hard disk requirement
The amount of hard disk space needed for a trend archive or a log file is calculated, during the configuration. If it is established at that point that the free
storage capacity on the fixed disk is not sufficient, an appropriate message is
issued.
Help
The Freelance 2000 help system enables operators to quickly call up relevant
information onto the screen while they are working with the software.
Hint
The option is provided to configure a hint for the operator for every message of
type Fault Message or Switch Message. These hints should be configured to
inform the operator of the cause of the message, options for remedying the
process anomaly and, where necessary, further operating hints. All hints are
saved in the hint list.
Hint filter
This is used to specify the priority levels for which hints should be displayed in
the hint list.
Hint list
The hint list contains a list of all hints that have arisen and not yet been acknowledged.
Horn
A field horn or control room horn can be controlled by an event. A horn function
is also provided that allows you to attach any control signals you wish to a
horn.
I branch
In a pure I-controller the correcting speed is proportional to the control difference.
Icons
The block type is symbolized by an icon in the case of function blocks and by a
function code in the case of functions.
Incorrect
Each newly created project object in the project tree that has yet to pass a
plausibility check or has not yet been correctly configured is assigned the state
Incorrect. Every entry made in a program, display or log similarly leads initially
to state Incorrect.
Individual drive function
Function block providing control over valves, pumps or servo drives.
Initial manual value
Initial value in manual operating mode.
Initial value
The value loaded when a process station is loaded, and therefore also when
parts of a project are loaded.
Input range
Definition of the input range being used: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA.
W-6
Section W
Glossary
Instruction list
User program for control tasks similar to an assembler programming language.

Its functional scope comprises operators that make a logical link between the
contents of the accumulator and the operand. All the Freelance 2000 function
blocks can be used alongside Instruction List
Internal
Controller operating mode in which the operator supplies the default set point.
Interval time
Interval time defines the time between processing of functions and function
blocks from subsidiary programs. Interval time is entered in TIME format (e.g.
T#4s500ms (=4.5s) d = days, h = hours, m = minutes, s = seconds and ms =
milliseconds).
Library
Comprises on the one hand the block library supplied in Freelance 2000, and
on the other hand the macro library for graphic symbols.
Limit value
Limit values form the basis for generating events. Limit values are thus declared in the operation interface and/or in a log, e.g. when a particular value is
exceeded.
Particular events are specified depending on the type of limit value. The message is generated with, amongst other attributes, a specific priority and a message text.
Limit value type
The limit value type determines the event triggered by the message (HH,
LL_XD, Dhm...).
Line break
Monitoring of the signal in the analog input converter for voltage interruptions.
Load
Transfer of programs or sections of programs in commissioning that have

passed the plausibility check without revealing any errors. In addition the objects or levels in the project tree are selected and transferred automatically to
the assigned resource by the load procedure.
Local intervention
Input to the function blocks individual drive function and final control element
which makes a local intervention possible directly at the field device without
any messages being issued.
Lock
A lock is designed to prevent an operator action from being performed in error.

The lock feature improves the safety of the system and should even achieve
P+F708 by virtue of its design.
Log type
Three different types of logs are provided: the signal sequence log (SSL), operation log (OPL) and disturbance course log (DCL) .
Manual
Operating mode in which the tag can be operated from within DigiVis.
Manual start mode
After being loaded into the process station, the blocks start mode is manual.
Measuring range end
The measuring range end is the physical value assigned to the transmitters
end point (e.g. 20 mA = 1000 l/h).
W-7
Section W
Glossary
The measuring range start is the physical value assigned to the transmitters 0point (e.g. 0/4 mA = 200 l/h).
Measuring ranges
The function of the measuring range start and end is the internal normalization
of the control algorithm for the controller. They also fulfill the same function as
does scaling in the display of faceplates.
Message line
The message line forms part of the operation interface and is included above
every display on the operator station. The message allows the operator to log
the most recently received messages without having to switch to the message
list.
Message list
In the message list the messages sent from the process stations to the operator station are displayed and managed. These messages may relate either to
the Freelance 2000 system or to the automated process. In the message list a
message can be selected and/or acknowledged, and the display assigned to a
message can also be called up through the display selection dialog. In this way
one can quickly obtain detailed information relating to the selected message.
Message priority
6 different priority levels are used, with priority 0 being reserved for system errors, 1 to 3 for fault messages, 4 for switch messages and 5 for hint messages.
Message text
Additional output text of a message in the message box and in the message
list.
Name
Names are textual labels for objects within the project. A name should be
unique within the project, and every object must be given a name.
Offset mode
This operating mode is used to determine which offset value is being used in
the time scheduler.
Offset value
Value added to the time schedulers set point.
Operating mode
States (on, off, manual, automatic) of the tags in the process station, respectively enabling particular operator actions or commands from the user program.
Preventing the operator from selecting certain operating modes for a tag or an
SFC program.
Operator action
An operator action is an action on the part of the operator through which a process state or process value is changed from the operator station.
Operator hint box
Display field in the message line showing whether or not there are any available hints relating to a message or event. Through the operator hint box or
message list one reaches a hint list showing any unacknowledged hints.
Operator interface
The operation interface is the sum of all the display objects and operating objects at the operator station.
Operator station
PC with MS Windows and DigiVis software. Used for operation and monitoring,
alarms, trends, archives, and reports.
W-8
Section W
Glossary
Output limit
Input of the upper or lower limit for a controllers output signal.
P-action
The control deviation is required in order to run through the a controllers correcting range. The value of this control deviation is termed the proportional action (abbreviated to P-action).
Parameter
Parameters are configurable attributes effecting the processing and display of

function blocks, displays and logs.
Parity
Simple error detection system using the parity bit (none, odd or even).
Pause length
A minimal pause between alternate correcting pulses with non-continuous

closed-loop controllers (step controllers).
Period duration
Resetting a counter after a fixed period of time. Where the entry field is empty
the period duration has no effect, resulting in continuous run. In this state no
value can be entered during commissioning.
Permanent
Scheduler operating mode whereby all sections of the set curve are run
through systematically.
Plausibility check
A project tree function whereby only those project objects that have not yet
satisfied a plausibility check are checked. The state Correct is a requirement
for the subsequent commissioning of the project. Incorrect project objects are
displayed in the color selected for this purpose.
Plausibility check errors
Any errors detected by the plausibility check on the selected project objects
that render commissioning impossible are displayed together in the error list.
Along with the plausibility check errors, warnings are also issued in the case of
less serious problems.
Port
Port selection (MODBUS is currently the sole option).
Process station D-PS
Serves for process control. Consists of a central unit and a maximum of two I/O
units.
Process value
The current controlled variable (X) for a controller is the actual value or process
value.
Processing
Control over which function blocks are included in processing is provided by

the parameter Processing On/Off. If the task is configured for autostart and the
program list already activated, the block will be executed if set to Processing
On.
Processing number
In the function block diagram, FBD, the key numbers displayed in the bottomright hand corner of the functions and function blocks indicate the processing
sequence within this FBD program.
Processing sequence
The processing sequence shows the sequence in time in which the project objects (e.g. program list, program or function block) contained in a task are
processed.
W-9
Section W
Glossary
Pulse duration
Entry of the duration of the output pulse in TIME format (e.g. T#5m3s).
Pulse length
Entry of the correcting pulse time for matching to various servo drives. If possible, the minimum pulse length should be a multiple of the task cycle time. Entered in TIME format.
Pulse scale-down
Scale-down factor in the range (f...999).
Ratio
Multiplication factor for the weighting adjuster or the ratio set point.
Ratio controller
Controller where the set point is calculated from the default set point and the
ratio.
Register
With Modbus transfer, messages are structured either in registers (WORDS) or

coils (BOOL). A register can be 1, 8 or 16 words in length.
Reset
Control action on function blocks to reset the counter in an internal register.
Ring memory
Fixed-size memory area which is overwritten after a specified length of time.
Rise speed / gradient
The rise speed is a measurement of change in the transition from the current
value to the following value. This term is generally applied to analog signals or
their rate of change with time.
Scale end
Defines the scale end for values in a tags faceplate.
Scale start
Defines the scale start for values in a tags faceplate.
Scan step-down
The scan step-down reduces the volume of data captured by a trend acquisition module. With a scan step-down of 10, only every 10th. value is recorded.
Selection
Operating technique from the operation interface. Selection is used to activate

displays or to select tags for operation.
Set point
The value that a controller should attain.
Set point controller
Function block enabling the operator to set default set points or analog values.
Short text
A text entry up to 12 characters in length as a brief description of a function

block or pre configured display.
Signal sequence log
Configurable logging of system errors, fault messages, switch messages, operator hints and operator actions.
Split point
Range limit on controller output.
Start address
Read address for the first binary variable (coil) with the Modbus-Master.
Start characteristics
Definition of the response of the system software at system startup.
State
See operating mode.
W-10
Section W
State text
Step controller
Glossary
Message text describing the function block state (e.g. High, Low, Open,
Closed).
The step controller is generally used in conjunction with servo drives. The control algorithm is that of a continuous controller, but the correcting variable is
converted to two opposingly-locked binary signals.
Switch duration
Minimum on/off switching duration for a level at the final control element. Entered in TIME format.
Switch message
Priority 4 message (white) for reporting switching events such as Pump On; not
to be confused with a fault message.
Tag
A tag is a pre configured function block. Every function block must be assigned
a tag name. All the tags recognized by the project are listed in the tag list.
Tag type
Brief description of the function block in the function library. See also function
type.
Time base
Time base for integration of the input - second, minute, hour or day.
Time scheduler
With a time scheduler, analog values defined as time-dependent are output;

these values can be transferred to other functions, e.g. to a controller as a setpoint input.
Time scheduler display
The time scheduler display displays the time schedulers state and enables it to
be controlled by the operator. This display consists of a trend region for tracking set points and process values, a state field and the associated faceplate.
Time-out
Parameter specifying the max. wait time in ms. Waiting for a response. Entered
in INT format in the range 0..10000 ms.
Trend
The function of a trend is to provide a graphic representation of values using a

time axis. In Freelance 2000 this is done by capturing the values in the process
station and transferring them to the operator station in blocks.
Trend data acquisition
Function block that captures the signal values of the linked variables and
transfers them in blocks to the operator station.
Trend display
The trend display is used to display values graphically using a time axis. A
maximum of 6 trends can be shown in one trend display.
Value
Numeric value of a variable that must be entered in a specific format depending on data type.
Variable
A variable is the data carrier for a value or piece of information. The variables
represent the link between the programs and displays; information based on a
data type is transported from one location to another through a variable.
W-11
Index
Section X
Index
A
ABS...........................................................................................................................................K-9
Absolute value ..........................................................................................................................K-9
ADD ..........................................................................................................................................K-6
Addition .....................................................................................................................................K-6
AI_TR......................................................................................................................................C-17
Aiken-Code ............................................................................................................................. L-17
Analog input transformation....................................................................................................C-17
Analog limiter ..........................................................................................................................K-15
Analog monitoring .................................................................................................................... G-6
Analog output transformation..................................................................................................C-24
Analog time filter .....................................................................................................................C-43
AND .......................................................................................................................................... J-6
AO_TR ....................................................................................................................................C-24
Arc sine, arc cosine and arc tangent ......................................................................................K-13
ASIN, ACOS, ATAN................................................................................................................K-13
Audio file ...................................................................................................................................B-9
AVER ...................................................................................................................................... J-10
Average................................................................................................................................... J-10
Average value in time .............................................................................................................C-37
B
BCD-Code............................................................................................................................... L-15
Binary conversion ..........................................................................................................L-15, L-21
Binary monitoring ..................................................................................................................... G-9
Binary monitoring of antivalence............................................................................................ G-12
Binary output.............................................................................................................................D-6
Binary switch........................................................................................................................... J-12
Block (definition) .......................................................................................................................B-5
BOOL - Constant ..................................................................................................................... M-5
BYTE - Constant ...................................................................................................................... M-5
C
C_ANA ....................................................................................................................................C-13
C_CR ......................................................................................................................................E-36
C_CS ......................................................................................................................................E-20
C_CU ......................................................................................................................................E-27
C_OS ....................................................................................................................................E-100
C_OU ....................................................................................................................................E-106
C_PS.....................................................................................................................................E-126
C_PU ....................................................................................................................................E-133
C_SR ......................................................................................................................................E-78
C_SS.......................................................................................................................................E-59
C_SU ......................................................................................................................................E-67
X-3
Section X
Index
CODE to INT ........................................................................................................................... L-21

Common Logarithm ................................................................................................................K-11
Concatenation of strings ......................................................................................................... J-37
Connection monitoring ........................................................................................................... G-21
Constants ................................................................................................................................. M-6
Continuous controller, ratio .....................................................................................................E-36
Continuous controller, standard ..............................................................................................E-20
Continuous controller, universal..............................................................................................E-27
Continuous Controllers ...........................................................................................................E-11
Controller selftune ................................................................................................................ E-143
Controller selftune block ...................................................................................................... E-144
Conversion of data types .......................................................................................................... L-7
Conversion of REAL data types.............................................................................................. L-14
Counter with analog input ........................................................................................................ C-6
CSTBO..................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTBY ..................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTDI ...................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTDT ..................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTDW .................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTIN ...................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTRE ..................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTSTR128........................................................................................................................... M-10
CSTSTR16............................................................................................................................. M-10
CSTSTR256........................................................................................................................... M-10
CSTSTR32............................................................................................................................. M-10
CSTSTR64............................................................................................................................. M-10
CSTSTR8............................................................................................................................... M-10
CSTTI....................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTUD..................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTUI ...................................................................................................................................... M-6
CSTWO.................................................................................................................................... M-6
CT_ANA ................................................................................................................................... C-6
CT_LT .................................................................................................................................... D-34
CT_P ...................................................................................................................................... D-28
CTT ........................................................................................................................................ D-25
CTUD ..................................................................................................................................... D-31
D
Data combinations .................................................................................................................... L-6
Data type x to data type BOOL ................................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to data type BYTE.................................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to data type DINT................................................................................................... L-6
Data type x to data type DT ...................................................................................................... L-6
Data type x to data type DWORD ............................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to data type INT ..................................................................................................... L-6
Data type x to data type REAL.................................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to data type TIME .................................................................................................. L-6
X-4
Section X
Index
Data type x to data type UDINT................................................................................................ L-6

Data type x to data type UINT .................................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to data type WORD ............................................................................................... L-6
Data type x to string type STR128............................................................................................ L-6
Data type x to string type STR16.............................................................................................. L-6
Data type x to string type STR256............................................................................................ L-6
Data type x to string type STR8................................................................................................ L-6
Data types
blocks ....................................................................................................................................B-6
Dead time function ..................................................................................................................C-35
Dead zone............................................................................................................................... J-24
DEADB.................................................................................................................................... J-24
DELAY ....................................................................................................................................C-30
Delay function .........................................................................................................................C-30
Deleting characters in a string variable................................................................................... J-38
DIFF ........................................................................................................................................ J-21
Differentiator ........................................................................................................................... J-21
DINT - Constant ....................................................................................................................... M-5
DISLOG .................................................................................................................................... F-6
Disturbance course log acquisition ........................................................................................... F-6
DIV ............................................................................................................................................K-8
Division .....................................................................................................................................K-8
DOS ........................................................................................................................................H-31
DOS_A....................................................................................................................................H-36
DOS_E....................................................................................................................................H-42
Dosing circuit ..........................................................................................................................H-31
Dosing circuit DOS_E .............................................................................................................H-42
Dosing circuit with analog input ..............................................................................................H-36
DST_TO_LT............................................................................................................................ L-34
DT-Constant............................................................................................................................. M-5
DWORD - Constant ................................................................................................................. M-5
E
Edge detection ........................................................................................................................ J-16
Effectiveness of output limits ..................................................................................................E-18
equal ....................................................................................................................................... J-11
EVENT ................................................................................................................................... G-23
Event message ...................................................................................................................... G-23
EXP.........................................................................................................................................K-11
Exponent.................................................................................................................................K-11
EXTCT .................................................................................................................................... L-25
Extract function ....................................................................................................................... L-25
Extract type to type ................................................................................................................. L-25
X-5
Section X
Index
F
FAC_D ................................................................................................................................... D-37
FCS .......................................................................................................................................... N-5
FF............................................................................................................................................ J-13
Flipflop..................................................................................................................................... J-13
Force cold start ........................................................................................................................ N-5
Force redundancy toggle ......................................................................................................... N-6
Frequency/analog converter .................................................................................................. D-37
Function (definition) ..................................................................................................................B-5
Function block (definition) .........................................................................................................B-5
G
General hints for operating .......................................................................................................A-6
General monitoring ................................................................................................................ G-15
Gray-Code............................................................................................................................... L-18
greater or equal....................................................................................................................... J-11
greater than............................................................................................................................. J-11
H
Hint............................................................................................................................................B-9
HORN..................................................................................................................................... G-26
Horn control............................................................................................................................ G-26
HYST....................................................................................................................................... J-29
Hysteresis ............................................................................................................................... J-29
I
IDF_1 ....................................................................................................................................... H-6
IDF_2 ..................................................................................................................................... H-13
IDF_A ..................................................................................................................................... H-22
Individual drive function for actuators .................................................................................... H-22
Individual drive function for bidirectional units ....................................................................... H-13
Individual drive function for unidirectional units ......................................................................... H-6
Input/output pins......................................................................................................................B-11
Inserting string variable ........................................................................................................... J-37
INT - Constant.......................................................................................................................... M-5
INT_TO_CO ............................................................................................................................ L-15
INTEG ..................................................................................................................................... J-18
Integrator................................................................................................................................. J-18
L
LD_LG.................................................................................................................................... C-32
Lead/lag filter.......................................................................................................................... C-32
less or equal............................................................................................................................ J-11
less than.................................................................................................................................. J-11
LIMIT .......................................................................................................................................K-15
X-6
Section X
Index
LIN ..........................................................................................................................................C-10
Linearisation............................................................................................................................C-10
LN ...........................................................................................................................................K-11
Local Time to Summer Time................................................................................................... L-32
LOG ........................................................................................................................................K-11
Logic And .................................................................................................................................. J-6
Logic EXOR .............................................................................................................................. J-7
Logic Or .................................................................................................................................... J-6
LT_TO_DST............................................................................................................................ L-32
M
M_ANA..................................................................................................................................... G-6
M_BAV................................................................................................................................... G-12
M_BIN ...................................................................................................................................... G-9
M_BOUT ...................................................................................................................................D-6
M_CONN ............................................................................................................................... G-21
M_GEN .................................................................................................................................. G-15
M_SOE .................................................................................................................................. G-19
MAX ........................................................................................................................................ J-10
Maximum ................................................................................................................................ J-10
Maximum value in time ...........................................................................................................C-39
Measuring ranges .....................................................................................................................B-7
Messages
parameter mask ....................................................................................................................B-7
MIN ........................................................................................................................................... J-9
Minimum ................................................................................................................................... J-9
Minimum value in time ............................................................................................................C-41
MOD..........................................................................................................................................K-8
Modulo ......................................................................................................................................K-8
MONO_F...................................................................................................................................D-9
Monoflop ...................................................................................................................................D-9
MUL ..........................................................................................................................................K-7
Multiplexer............................................................................................................................... J-12
Multiplication .............................................................................................................................K-7
MUX ........................................................................................................................................ J-12
N
Natural logarithm.....................................................................................................................K-11
Negation.................................................................................................................................... J-7
NOT .......................................................................................................................................... J-7
not equal ................................................................................................................................. J-11
O
OF3 ......................................................................................................................................... J-33
Operating time counter ...........................................................................................................D-34
Operating Time Counter .........................................................................................................D-34
X-7
Section X
Index
Operation with keyboard ...........................................................................................................A-6

Operation with mouse ...............................................................................................................A-6
Operation with mouse or keyboard ...........................................................................................A-6
OR............................................................................................................................................. J-6
Overview blocks ......................................................................................................................B-17
Overwriting characters in string variables ............................................................................... J-38
P
P_DT ....................................................................................................................................... L-28
Pack function........................................................................................................................... L-28
Pack functions......................................................................................................................... L-24
Parameter definition ..................................................................................................................B-6
Parameters..............................................................................................................................B-12
PBODW................................................................................................................................... L-24
PBYWO................................................................................................................................... L-24
POT...........................................................................................................................................K-8
Power ........................................................................................................................................K-8
PRIMSEC................................................................................................................................. N-6
Pulse counter ......................................................................................................................... D-28
R
R_TRIG, F_TRIG .................................................................................................................... J-16
Rate of change limiter .............................................................................................................K-21
Reading a string part............................................................................................................... J-36
Reading left string part ............................................................................................................ J-35
Reading right string part.......................................................................................................... J-36
REAL - Constant ...................................................................................................................... M-5
REAL to INTEGER data types .................................................................................................. L-6
RLIMIT ....................................................................................................................................K-21
ROL, ROR................................................................................................................................. J-8
Rotate left, rotate right............................................................................................................... J-8
S
S_CONCAT............................................................................................................................. J-37
S_DEL..................................................................................................................................... J-38
S_FIND ................................................................................................................................... J-39
S_H ......................................................................................................................................... J-31
S_INS...................................................................................................................................... J-37
S_LEFT ................................................................................................................................... J-35
S_LEN..................................................................................................................................... J-35
S_MID ..................................................................................................................................... J-36
S_REPL .................................................................................................................................. J-38
S_RIGHT................................................................................................................................. J-36
Sample & Hold ........................................................................................................................ J-31
SCAL...................................................................................................................................... C-27
Scale change ......................................................................................................................... C-27
X-8
Section X
Index
Scales .......................................................................................................................................B-7
Searching for characters in string variables............................................................................ J-39
SEL ......................................................................................................................................... J-12
Selection from three................................................................................................................ J-33
Selftune, controller ................................................................................................................E-143
Sequence of event monitoring ............................................................................................... G-19
Set point controller ..................................................................................................................C-13
SGN ........................................................................................................................................K-10
Shift left, shift right .................................................................................................................... J-8
SHL, SHR ................................................................................................................................. J-8
Sign.........................................................................................................................................K-10
SIN, COS, TAN .......................................................................................................................K-13
Sine, cosine and tangent value...............................................................................................K-13
SPLIT ...................................................................................................................................... J-26
Split range............................................................................................................................... J-26
SQRT ........................................................................................................................................K-9
Square root of an input .............................................................................................................K-9
Step controller, ratio................................................................................................................E-78
Step controller, standard.........................................................................................................E-59
Step controller, universal.........................................................................................................E-67
STR128 - Constant .................................................................................................................. M-5
STR16 - Constant .................................................................................................................... M-5
STR256 - Constant .................................................................................................................. M-5
STR32 - Constant .................................................................................................................... M-5
STR64 - Constant .................................................................................................................... M-5
STR8 - Constant ...................................................................................................................... M-5
String Constant ...................................................................................................................... M-10
String length............................................................................................................................ J-35
SUB...........................................................................................................................................K-7
Subtraction................................................................................................................................K-7
Summer time to local time ...................................................................................................... L-34
Syn. MAN to Auto ...................................................................................................................E-15
T
TAVER ....................................................................................................................................C-37
TDEAD....................................................................................................................................C-35
TFILT ......................................................................................................................................C-43
Three position controller, universal.......................................................................................E-133
Three-position controller, standard .......................................................................................E-126
TIME - Constant....................................................................................................................... M-5
Time counter ...........................................................................................................................D-25
Time limiter .............................................................................................................................K-18
TIMER.....................................................................................................................................D-21
Timer with External Time Input ...............................................................................................D-21
Timer, switch-off delay ............................................................................................................D-18
Timer, switch-on delay ............................................................................................................D-15
Timer, switch-on/off delay.......................................................................................................D-12
X-9
Section X
Index
TLIMIT.....................................................................................................................................K-18
TMAX ..................................................................................................................................... C-39
TMIN ...................................................................................................................................... C-41
TO_BO ...................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_BY ...................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_DI........................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_DT ...................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_DW ..................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_IN........................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_RE ...................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_STR128 .............................................................................................................................. L-6
TO_STR16 ................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_STR256 .............................................................................................................................. L-6
TO_STR32 ................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_STR64 ................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_STR8 .................................................................................................................................. L-6
TO_TI ........................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_UD ...................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_UI........................................................................................................................................ L-6
TO_WO ..................................................................................................................................... L-6
TO_xx........................................................................................................................................ L-7
TOF ........................................................................................................................................ D-18
TON........................................................................................................................................ D-15
TONOF................................................................................................................................... D-12
TOUCH .................................................................................................................................. D-40
Touch button .......................................................................................................................... D-40
TR ........................................................................................................................................... J-14
TREND............................................................................................................................ F-9, F-10
Trend acquisition............................................................................................................. F-9, F-10
Trigger..................................................................................................................................... J-14
TRUNC.............................................................................................................................L-6, L-14
TUNE ........................................................................................................................E-143, E-144
Two-position controller, standard......................................................................................... E-100
Two-position controller, universal ........................................................................................ E-106
Types of scripts..........................................................................................................................A-5
Types of symbols.......................................................................................................................A-5
U
UDINT - Constant..................................................................................................................... M-5
UINT - Constant ....................................................................................................................... M-5
Unpack function ...................................................................................................................... L-30
Unpack functions..................................................................................................................... L-26
Up/down counter .................................................................................................................... D-31
UP_DT .................................................................................................................................... L-30
UPDWBY ................................................................................................................................ L-26
UPDWWO ............................................................................................................................... L-26
UPWOBO................................................................................................................................ L-26
X-10
Section X
Index
UPWOBY ................................................................................................................................ L-26
V
Virtual keys (recurring)..............................................................................................................A-7
Visual orientation hints..............................................................................................................A-5
W
Warm start behaviour .............................................................................................................B-14
WORD - Constant .................................................................................................................... M-5
X
XOR .......................................................................................................................................... J-7
X-11
3 B DD0 1 2 5 1 4 R0 1 0 1
Form 3BDD012514R0101 Printed in Germany. March 2001
Copyright 2000 by ABB Automation Products GmbH, as an Unpublished Work, All Rights Reserved
Registered Trademark of ABB Automation Products GmbH
Trademark of ABB Automation Products GmbH
ABB Automation Inc.

29801 Euclid Avenue
Wickliffe, Ohio USA 44092
Phone +1 440 585 8500
Fax +1 440 585 8756
ABB Automation Products GmbH

Dudenstrae 44-46
D-68167 Mannheim, Germany
Phone +49 (0) 1805 266 776
Fax +49 (0) 1805 776 329
ABB Automation Products AB

SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 34 2000
Fax +46 (0) 21 13 7845

3BDD012514R0101 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3BDD012514R0101 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ControlIT

Engineering Reference Manual

Engineering Reference Manual

IEC 61131-3 Programming

Process Station FieldController

Process Station ABB FieldController 800

Engineering Reference Manuals

Communications and Fieldbusses

Getting Started: DigiTool

Visual Orientation Hints ..................................................................................... A-5

General Description and Overview

General .............................................................................................................. B-5

Analog Function Blocks

Overview Analog Function Blocks ..................................................................... C-5

Binary Function Blocks

Controller Function Blocks

Overview Binary Blocks ..................................................................................... D-5

Overview Controller Functions Blocks ............................................................... E-5

Overview Acquisition Blocks.............................................................................. F-5

Monitoring Function Blocks

Open-loop Control Function Blocks

Overview of Open-loop Control Function Blocks............................................... H-5

Overview of Monitoring Function Blocks ........................................................... G-5

Overview Standard ............................................................................................. J-5

Overview Arithmetic........................................................................................... K-5

Overview Converter ............................................................................................L-5

Overview of Function Block Constants ..............................................................M-5

Overview of System Functions .......................................................................... N-5

Function and Function Blocks............................................................................ V-5

Getting Started: DigiTool

Getting Started: DigiTool

Visual Orientation Hints ........................................................................................A-5

General Hints for Operating DigiTool ..................................................................A-6

Getting Started: DigiTool

A 1 Visual Orientation Hints

Representation for (selectable) menu items or parameters.

Inputs to be made via the keyboard, also via virtual keys.

Highlights important information, also as an orientation hint.

Information on operation with the keyboard, inasmuch as it differs from

Special hints, must be observed!

Preconditions which must be fulfilled to implement commands or for satisfactory results.

Getting Started: DigiTool

A 2 General Hints for Operating DigiTool

A 2.1 Operation with mouse or keyboard

Cursor on menu item

ALT + underlined letters

Cursor on menu item

Enter only underline letters

Cursor on program element

Cursor on programme element

Cursor on start position

Cursor on start position

move to desired position and release SPACE

Getting Started: DigiTool

A 2.2 Recurring virtual keys

The parameter dialog is quit and the parameter status saved.

The parameter dialog is quit without saving the parameter status. A

The parameters of the active parameter window are reset completely to

Call up the Windows On-line help (with F1 also).

Getting Started: DigiTool

Change to the previous

General Description and Overview